OptiTex PDS User Manual

7/28/2019 OptiTex PDS User Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/optitex-pds-user-manual 1/727

SGS Digitize™, PDS™ & Grade™

User’s Manual



SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

This agreement gives you certain rights and duties regarding the Software Program, the User’s Guides and thecopy protection key (the “Key”) that you are licensing from Scanvec Garment Systems Ltd. (“Scanvec GarmentSystems”). The Software Program, the User’s Guides and the Key will be referred together here as the “Licensed

Materials”.

1. License grant and termination. Scanvec Garment Systems grants you personal, non-transferable, non-exclusivelicense to use the Licensed Materials for the ordinary purposes of your business. If you breach any terms of this

Agreement, this license will immediately terminate and you must promptly return the Licensed Materials toScanvec Garment Systems. The Licensed Materials are proprietary products of Scanvec Garment Systems, andScanvec Garment Systems retain title to and ownership of the Licensed Materials.

2. Scanvec Garment Systems copyright, etc. no copies or transfer, etc. You acknowledge that the LicensedMaterials are protected by copyrights held by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You acknowledgethat Licensed Materials embody trade secrets owned by Scanvec Garment Systems’ parent company. You may

not copy any part of the Licensed Materials for any purpose. You may not disassemble, decompile, reverseengineer or otherwise modify, tamper with or make changes to the Licensed Materials under any circumstances.You may not rent, lease, loan, assign or transfer the Licensed Material to any third party. You may not allow any

third party to use the Licensed Materials or to make copies of them. You may not use the Software Programwithout the Key. You may not emulate, duplicate, replace or modify the Key.

3. Warranty, disclaims, remedies. Scanvec Garment Systems warrants that the Media containing the Software

Program (the “CD’s”) are free from defects of materials and workmanship. SCANVEC GARMENT SYSTEMSDISCLAIM ALL OTHER EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES REGARDING THE CD’s AND THELICENSED MATERIALS. You agree that your only remedy for any breach of the above warranty will be that if you discover any defects in the CD’s within three months after receiving them, Scanvec Garment Systems will

replace the defective CD’s with non-defective CD’s.

4. No damages beyond Purchase Price. You agree that if, in connection with your use of the Licensed Materials,you incur direct or indirect injury of any kind, including injury to persons or property or lost profits, Scanvec

Garment Systems shall be liable to you only for the Product Price. In no event will Scanvec Garment Systems,

its stockholders, directors, officers or employees be liable to you for any damages, including lost profits or otherincidental or consequential damages arising out of your use or inability to use the Licensed Materials.

Copyright 2001, Scanvec Garment Systems

ALL RIGHTS RESERVE



Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures ______________________ 1

Welcome to OptiTex! ____________________________________________________ 1

How to Use This Book ___________________________________________________ 2

Package Contents _______________________________________________________ 3

Registration____________________________________________________________ 3

Help Services Provided __________________________________________________ 3

Technical Support ______________________________________________________ 4

Installing OptiTex_______________________________________________________ 5

Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter _______________________________________ 9

Configuring Output Control Center (OCC) as output manger _________________ 12

Setting Up a Plotter ____________________________________________________ 15



Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars_______________________________________ 17

The Tools _____________________________________________________________17

Grading Toolbar _______________________________________________________21

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E) __________________________________________24

System Toolbar ________________________________________________________31

Insert Toolbar _________________________________________________________34

Edit Notch Dialog Box: __________________________________________________39



The Edit Toolbar ______________________________________________________ 73

The Modify Toolbar ____________________________________________________ 85

The Darts Toolbar _____________________________________________________ 90

The General Toolbar ___________________________________________________ 95

The Advanced Toolbar_________________________________________________ 102

The Dimensional Toolbar ______________________________________________ 103

The Accessories Toolbar _______________________________________________ 107

The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar: _____________________________________ 123

The Template Toolbar: ________________________________________________ 124



Chapter 3: File Menu ______________________________________________ 125

New (Ctrl+N): ________________________________________________________ 125

Open (Ctrl+O)________________________________________________________ 126Merge Style File ______________________________________________________ 128

History ______________________________________________________________ 131

File Finder ___________________________________________________________ 134

Save ________________________________________________________________ 144

Save As______________________________________________________________ 145

Digitize______________________________________________________________ 147

Digitizer Setup _______________________________________________________ 163

OptiTex Panel commands:______________________________________________ 166

Digitizer Dialog Box: __________________________________________________ 194



Export to CAD/CAM files ______________________________________________197

Import from CAD/CAM Files ___________________________________________201

Layers Table Dialog Box: _______________________________________________212

Dictionary Dialog Box: _________________________________________________214

SGS Modulate ________________________________________________________217

Plot _________________________________________________________________219

Plotting Options for Graded Pieces_______________________________________243

Plotter Setup _________________________________________________________244

Print ________________________________________________________________246

Printer Setup _________________________________________________________248

Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities ______________________________________249

Exit (Alt+F4) _________________________________________________________253



Chapter 4: Edit Menu _____________________________________________ 255

Undo (Ctrl+Z) ________________________________________________________255

Redo (Ctrl+Y) ________________________________________________________255

Cut Current Piece (Ctrl+X) _____________________________________________255

Copy Pieces __________________________________________________________256

Paste Piece (Ctrl+V) ___________________________________________________257

Copy/Paste Internals___________________________________________________258

Clear Selected Pieces___________________________________________________258

Clear Selected Piece ___________________________________________________259

Replace Old: _________________________________________________________259

Remove Current ______________________________________________________260

Make New ___________________________________________________________260Move Base Line _______________________________________________________261

Delete Piece (Del)______________________________________________________263

Attributes (Enter) _____________________________________________________265

Add Relative _________________________________________________________268

Align Points __________________________________________________________274

Round Corner ________________________________________________________275

Extend Internal _______________________________________________________276

Segment _____________________________________________________________277

Make Pieces __________________________________________________________283

Video________________________________________________________________285



Chapter 5: Piece Menu_____________________________________________ 287

Info (Ctrl + I) ________________________________________________________ 287

Global Info __________________________________________________________ 295

Style Area and Perimeter Values Dialog Box_______________________________ 297

Global Change Internals _______________________________________________ 299

Global Notch Grading _________________________________________________ 300

Order of Internals_____________________________________________________ 301

Modify ______________________________________________________________ 301

Rotate_______________________________________________________________ 301

To Rotate the Baseline: ________________________________________________ 303

Flip Horizontal _______________________________________________________ 305

Flip Vertical _________________________________________________________ 305Mirror ______________________________________________________________ 306

Scale and Shrink______________________________________________________ 308

Optimize Cutter Ordering______________________________________________ 311

Points Cleanup _______________________________________________________ 312

Set (0,0) Point ________________________________________________________ 314

Start Point ___________________________________________________________ 314

Base Parallel to Segment _______________________________________________ 315

Make New Base Line __________________________________________________ 317Guideline Parallel _____________________________________________________ 318

Seam________________________________________________________________ 318

Reseam (F6)__________________________________________________________ 319

Update Notches _______________________________________________________ 320



Digitize, PDS & Grade Manual336

Work on Seam (F5) ____________________________________________________320

Switch all Pieces to Cut (F5 + Ctrl) _______________________________________322

Switch all Pieces to Sew (F5 + Shift) ______________________________________322

Unseam______________________________________________________________322

Walk ________________________________________________________________323

Switch Direction (F11) _________________________________________________326

Notch Both (F12) ______________________________________________________327

Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl) ___________________________________________327

Notch Moving (F12 + Shift) _____________________________________________327

Fabric and Stripes _____________________________________________________327

Fabric Pattern ________________________________________________________328

Relate Piece to Stripes__________________________________________________332

Set Group____________________________________________________________334Ungroup _____________________________________________________________334



Chapter 6: Grading Menu __________________________________________ 335

Stack Point___________________________________________________________336

Load Sizes ___________________________________________________________337

Reshape Variation Grading _____________________________________________338

Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C) _____________________________________________339

Relative (Ctrl + G, R) __________________________________________________339

Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P) _____________________________________________340

Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X) ___________________________________________340

Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y) ___________________________________________340

Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A) _____________________________________________340

Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F) ____________________________________________341

Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L) ____________________________________________341

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E) __________________________________________341

Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q) __________________________________________342

Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z) _______________________________________________342

Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N) _____________________________________________343

Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O) _____________________________________________343

Sizes (Ctrl + G, S) _____________________________________________________344

Change Size Order ____________________________________________________347

Base Size_____________________________________________________________347

Sizes Variation: _______________________________________________________348

Graded Nest __________________________________________________________352

Grade Proportional____________________________________________________354



Chapter 6: Grading Menu __________________________________________ 335

Stack Point___________________________________________________________336

Load Sizes ___________________________________________________________337

Reshape Variation Grading _____________________________________________338

Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C) _____________________________________________339

Relative (Ctrl + G, R) __________________________________________________339

Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P) _____________________________________________340

Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X) ___________________________________________340

Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y) ___________________________________________340

Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A) _____________________________________________340

Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F) ____________________________________________341

Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L) ____________________________________________341

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E) __________________________________________341

Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q) __________________________________________342

Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z) _______________________________________________342

Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N) _____________________________________________343

Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O) _____________________________________________343

Sizes (Ctrl + G, S) _____________________________________________________344

Change Size Order ____________________________________________________347

Base Size_____________________________________________________________347

Sizes Variation: _______________________________________________________348

Graded Nest __________________________________________________________352

Grade Proportional____________________________________________________354



Chapter 7: Pleats Menu ____________________________________________ 371

Add Pleat Lines ______________________________________________________371

Add Pleat By Angle ___________________________________________________371

Remove Pleat Lines ___________________________________________________372

Create Box or Knife ___________________________________________________372



Chapter 8: Darts Menu_____________________________________________ 373

Open Dart ___________________________________________________________373

Open Multiple Darts __________________________________________________373

Create Dart __________________________________________________________374

Edit Dart ____________________________________________________________375

Remove Darts ________________________________________________________375

Copy Darts __________________________________________________________375

Paste Darts __________________________________________________________376

Rotate Dart to Point ___________________________________________________376

Rotate Around Center _________________________________________________377

Fix Darts ____________________________________________________________378

Reform Dart _________________________________________________________379



Chapter 9: Design Menu ___________________________________________ 381

Create Parallel________________________________________________________381

Cut Parallel __________________________________________________________383

Segment Length_______________________________________________________384

Hole to Piece / Piece to Hole _____________________________________________387

Point Connection______________________________________________________388

Equal Segments _______________________________________________________390

Custom Fit ___________________________________________________________392

Custom fit tools _______________________________________________________398

Industrial Fabrics _____________________________________________________405

Hole By measure ______________________________________________________408

Create Parallel Cutting_________________________________________________410

Scatter Pieces_________________________________________________________411

Unscatter Pieces ______________________________________________________411

Arrange For Plot______________________________________________________411



Chapter 10: Template Menu_________________________________________ 413

Open Library_________________________________________________________413

Add To Library_______________________________________________________415

Save As______________________________________________________________416

Choose ______________________________________________________________417

Primitive Tools Bar: ___________________________________________________418



Chapter 11: View Menu ____________________________________________ 421

Template Window_____________________________________________________421

Screen Coordinates____________________________________________________421

Rulers _______________________________________________________________422

Pieces Bar____________________________________________________________422

Piece in one scale______________________________________________________423

Piece List ____________________________________________________________423

Piece Attributes _______________________________________________________424

Bubble Info __________________________________________________________427

Colors by Mode_______________________________________________________427

Base Only (F4)________________________________________________________429

Show Seam (Ctrl + F6) _________________________________________________429

Grading Table ________________________________________________________429

Grading Rules Library_________________________________________________429

Compare Length ______________________________________________________430

Calculator ___________________________________________________________434

Tool Bars ____________________________________________________________435

Status Bar ___________________________________________________________438



Chapter 12: Options Menu __________________________________________ 439

Snap and Selection ____________________________________________________439

Draft Setup __________________________________________________________440

Grid and Stripes ______________________________________________________443

Colors and Line Types _________________________________________________444

Fonts________________________________________________________________447

Working Units ________________________________________________________447

Grading Manually by Edit Tool _________________________________________450

Open Move Point Dialog _______________________________________________450

Open Move Piece Dialog________________________________________________451

Open Create Dialog____________________________________________________451

Auto Reseam _________________________________________________________451

Auto Update Notches __________________________________________________452

Lock Piece (F3) _______________________________________________________452

Preferences___________________________________________________________453



Chapter 13: Help Menu ____________________________________________ 459

Index (F1)____________________________________________________________459

Keyboard Map _______________________________________________________459

Scenario (Ctrl + F1) ___________________________________________________460

Using Help ___________________________________________________________460

Check Plug Protection _________________________________________________460

SGS on Line__________________________________________________________461

Tip of the Day ________________________________________________________461

About OptiTex PDS ___________________________________________________461

Send File_____________________________________________________________462

How to Contact SGS ___________________________________________________464



Chapter 14: Using the Mouse________________________________________ 465

Right Mouse Button ___________________________________________________465

Select Tool ___________________________________________________________466

Edit _________________________________________________________________467

Insert _______________________________________________________________468

Tools ________________________________________________________________469

Zoom _______________________________________________________________470

Transform ___________________________________________________________471

Move Base Line _______________________________________________________473

Delete _______________________________________________________________473

Attribute ____________________________________________________________473

Segment _____________________________________________________________474

Grading _____________________________________________________________475



Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands ____________________________________ 477

SGS Keys commands __________________________________________________477

Cursor Movement Keys ________________________________________________480

Dialog Box Keys ______________________________________________________480

Editing Keys _________________________________________________________481

Help Keys____________________________________________________________481

System Keys__________________________________________________________482

Text Selection Keys____________________________________________________482

keyboard shortcuts ____________________________________________________483

PDS ShortCut Keys____________________________________________________487



Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation ____________________________________ 491

Installing the Numonics AccuGrid _______________________________________491

Configuring the GTCO Calcomp Drawing Board 3 Digitizer _________________495

Installing the Altek Digitizer For Use With SGS Software ___________________496

Installing the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer For Use In SGS software ______________502

Installing the SummaSketch II For Use In the SGS software _________________507

Installing the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer For Use In SGS _________________511

software _____________________________________________________________511

Installing the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer For Use In SGS software___________516

Installing the MicroGrid IV Digitizer For Use In SGS software_______________521

Installing the MicroGrid II Digitizer For Use In SGS software _______________526

Installing the Summagraphic 4 Button Digitizer For Use In SGS software ______530

Installing the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer For Use In SGS software____534

Digitizer Manufacturers _______________________________________________539



Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation_______________________________ 541

Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software _____________________________ 541

Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter _______________________________ 544

Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter____________________________________ 551

Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter ____________________ 560

Ioline 28 Plotter ______________________________________________________ 568

Ioline 600 Plotter _____________________________________________________ 578

Ioline Studio Plotter___________________________________________________ 588

Ioline Stylist Plotter ___________________________________________________ 597

Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software ___________ 605

Plotter Technology Plotter _____________________________________________ 619

Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter ___________________________________________ 626Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters_______________________________________ 632

Gerber AP700 Plotter _________________________________________________ 637

NovaJet Plotter_______________________________________________________ 642

Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter ___________________________________ 650

Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter _______________________________ 657

Lectra plotter ________________________________________________________ 664

Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter ____________________________________ 669

Eastman Cutter ______________________________________________________ 673

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250 ____________________________________ 677

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91 _____________________________________ 679

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93 _____________________________________ 682



Glossary Terms ___________________________________________________ 685



Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures 1

Chapter 1: Introduction and Installation Procedures

Welcome to OptiTex!

OptiTex is your complete software solution for computerized pattern design,

grading and marker making. It was created specifically for the manufacturer of the apparel, transportation interiors, upholstery and sewn products industries.

OptiTex’s powerful CAD tools enable you to draft pattern scratch or modify

existing pattern quickly and accurately. Simply import a pattern from your

favorite CAD/CAM program, create a new pattern using OptiTex’s freehanddesign tools or utilize OptiTex’s unique digitizing capabilities.

With OptiTex’s digitizing function, your pattern appears on your computer

screen as you digitize. If you make a mistake, simply erase it with the click of

a button. The OptiTex digitizing system is designed to work the way you want

to work. You can enter piece perimeters first, then enter notches, internals andother piece information later. It’s quick, easy and compatible with industry

standard digitizers.

Once your patters have been created and entered, OptiTex provides a

multitude of interactive editing tools. The most commonly used design andediting tools are represented as icons in the OptiTex toolbar so you can access

commands with the click of a mouse; there’s no need to navigate through a

series of pull down menus. Add or remove different types of notches, createdarts, add seam allowances pleats and buttons and view everything on screen

as you are working.

Add, move or delete points of a pattern, or move entire section of a pattern to

quickly lengthen or shorten pieces. And obtaining measurement has neverbeen easier. Whether you’re measuring vertically, horizontally, diagonally or

between pattern pieces, OptiTex’s measuring tool is as easy to use your own

tape measure.




OptiTex Makes grading pattern pieces quick, simple and automatic is just as

interactive as the editing process. Grade any pattern, point by point or globallyaccording to previously stored rules. OptiTex enable you to witness the results

immediately on screen. With OptiTex , it’s easy to create your own rule

libraries, add new rules or remove old ones. You can even grade internals such

as notches, dart, pleats, buttons and lines.

When it comes to marker making, OptiTex provides both manual andautomatic nesting capabilities to help you design markers quickly and

efficiently. In addition, OptiTex gives you the flexibility to change order

quintets, substitute size, change marker dimensions and additional patterns toyour marker from other styles. Match your pattern piece to specific locations

on your striped, plaid or printed materials.

With the extensive training and knowledgeable technical support services we

offer, we are confident you will find OptiTex to be most users Friendly

production tool you have experienced.

Thank you choosing OptiTex.

How to Use This Book

This manual is design to mirror your computer interface. The chapters arebased on the pull down menus and tool icons. To find information in this book,

use the index, table file, which allows you to view, print or save pertinent

information.

The remainder of this chapter is dedicated to explaining the different training

and technical support services SGS offer. Lastly, we offer completeinstallation directions with pictures.

Feel confident knowing that you not only purchased the most complete

software package for computerized pattern design, grading and marker

making, but also that SGS will continue to support you in every way we can.




Package Contents

Security Lock

** VERY IMPORTANT** OptiTex will not operate without the Security

Lock!

Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS) will replace your CD if it is lost, but WILLNOT replace lost or stolen Security Lock. If the Security lock becomes

defective it will be replaced, but only after it has been returned to SGS. If you

must return the security lock, the package should be insured.

CD

The OptiTex Program Disk.

Documentation

OptiTex Manual and Lesson Plans

Registration

Before you begin, send in the Product Registration card to register yourself as

an owner of OptiTex. This card can be faxed or mailed to the address on the

card.

As a registered owner, you’ll be informed of updates, upgrades and trainingseminars; you’ll be on the mailing list for technical bulletins and product

information.

Help Services Provided

SGS offers extensive customer service. Below are the operational support

services available to you as a Registered OptiTex user.




Technical Support

Our US and Canada Technical Support department will provide assistance for

problems of a technical nature. If you are having problems printing or plotting,for example, technical support will assist you.

When calling for technical support, please be at your computer with the

following information:

• OptiTex Version Number.

• OptiTex Security Lock # (listed on the lock).

• Detailed description of the problem, including exact wording of any error messages.

Technical Support offices

USATel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI

Fax: 610-521-1564

ISRAELTel.: 972-3-904-9979

Fax: 972-3-904-2710

Internet

Messages can be sent via Internet to our support at the following address:

E-Mail Technical Support: [email protected]

E-Mail Sales & Marketing: [email protected] Page

http://www.optitex.com




Installing OptiTex

Before you run the installation program for OptiTex, make sure your computer

meets the minimum requirements to run the software.

OptiTex Requirements

Pentium or better processor

16 MB of RAM

Microsoft Windows ™ 95

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

SVGA 15’’ monitor running at resolution 800X600, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 1 serial port

Recommended Equipment

Pentium II – 350 or better processor

64 MB of RAM

Microsoft Windows ™ 95 or Windows 98 or Windows NT

Hard Drive with 150 MB of free disk space

Microsoft mouse or other compatible pointing device

AGP display card with 4 MB of memory




17’’ monitor running at resolution 1024X768, 256 colors,

1 parallel port, 2 serial ports

USB port

SGS recommends using a Bus mouse if you intend to install a serial plotter ordigitizer, since most computers are only equipped with two serial outlets.

In order to use OptiTex, you need to do the following:

• Attach the OptiTex Security.

• Install the OptiTex Software.

• Configure your Plotter.

Attach the OptiTex Security Lock

There are five steps, which must be performed in order to attach the OptiTex

Security Lock.

• Turn your computer off.

• Remove any cable or Security Lock which may be connected to

your printer (LPT1 – the printer port is a female slot at the rear

panel of your computer).

• Plug the male side of the OptiTex Security Lock into the printer

port (LPT1).

! Note: Before plugging in the Security Lock you may want to write down

the serial number located on the plug. This number will be necessary

when calling for Technical Support and is required on the Product

Registration Card.




• Plug anything, which was previously attached to the printer intothe back end of the OptiTex Security Lock.

! Note: If you have a printer connected to the back of the OptiTex Security

Lock make sure the printer is properly grounded. If it is not grounded

correctly, the printer can short out your Security Lock. Do not connect

the Security Lock to an A/B switch box or a cable, as this also short out

the Security Lock (you may find that it will work for a while, but it will

eventually destroy the Security Lock). The OptiTex Security Lock

MUST be plugged DIRECTLY into the printer port (LPT1).

! Note: SGS does not guarantee that its copy protection and software are

compatible with all kind of computers.

Install the OptiTex Software

• Start Microsoft Windows 95.

• Place the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.

• The installation screen will display on the screen automatically.

• Select “Install Optitex 8.0.”

• In the first screen select the installation language. Click NEXT.

• Select the Optitex language.

! Note: The installation will take few minutes to copy the necessary files to your hard drive.

• The destination directory dialog box will be displayed. Thedefault installation path will be set to C:\Program files\Optitex8.

Click Browse button to select a different path. Click Next.




• Select the options that you would like to have install and click next.

The program will begin installing the files to the selected drive and directories.

After the installation is complete, a dialog box will display thanking you for

installing the latest version of SGS software. Click OK and icons will beplaced on the desktop of your computer for OptiTex PDS and OptiTex Mark.

To open PDS or Mark, double click on the correct icon. You must restart you

computer after first OptiTex installation (no need to restart it if you upgradethe existing OptiTex software).




Configuring OptiTex to Your Plotter

There are several steps to configuring your plotter. You must set up your

communication parameters, configure the plot manager, and use the plottersetup command in the File menu.

You can use the plot manager of your choice. OptiTex supplies you with

OutMan (output manager) which supports different standard and non-standard

plotters as well as OCC. The OutMan uses Windows communication routines

and has its own Queue of file to plot.

Set Up Communication Parameters

You must first set up the communication parameters for the Com port to whichyour plotter is connected (there is no need to configure parallel port). Refer to

your plotter’s manual to find its particular communication parameters.

! Note: It is absolutely necessary to setup the communication parameters for

the Com port to which your plotter is connected.

Configuring the OutMan as the Output manger

To configure OptiTex to your plotter, the OutMan must be loaded on the

station connected to the plotter. This way all users can share the plotter. Do not

load the Output manager on stations without a plotter connected.

The OutMan installation will copy all relevant files to your disk and place theOutMan icon in your Startup group. OutMan displays a complete review of the

file being plotted, including the amount of paper left on the roll and otheruseful information.

You must perform the following steps for each plotter you will be using.




• On the station connected to the plotter, double click the OutManicon. The OutMan dialog box will be displayed.

• In the Out Man dialog box select the Communication commandin the Options menu. The Communication dialog box will then

be displayed.

• Select the proper communication port and set the correctcommunication parameters for it.

OutMan Dialog Box




Stop Action

Stop Action command is used to stop the current plot job.

Exit

Exit command is used to close the output manager.

Communication

Used to set up the port, baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, flow, and

protocol.

Working Units

Allows you to choose the working unit of your choice: mm, cm, inches, or

feet.

Font

Allows you to change the font size and type.

AboutDisplays information about the version of software.











Setting Up a Plotter

• Open the OCC and choose "setup -> Plotters" from the filemenu.

• The “Plotter Setup” dialog appears:Press the "ADD" button, to add a new plotter

Choose the way the plotter is connected and press "Next"If your plotter is connected directly to your computer, choose

"My computer"

• And if it's a plotter that's connected to another computer on yournetwork, choose "Network computer".

Choose the way the plotter is set. Choose the port (LPT,COM orFile),

•Choose if you want to print to Lectra, Gerber or Standadplotting protocol, and choose the data bits, stop bits, parity and

baud rate as they are in your plotter's manual. In your plottermanual you should also have the switches (communication

parameters) for your specific plotter.

• After setting up everything press on the "Next" button.

• In the plotter name dialog, write the name of your plotter (or anyname you want) and choose a path where you want to keep your

queue files (file to plot), and then press on Finish.

• If you want other people on your network to be able to plot withyour plotter, you have check the "Shared Plotter" box.




In the new window you can see your plotters, and the name of the computerthat they are connected to. On the lower part of this window, you can see

which plotter is the Default one, If you want to change the default plotter, all

you have to do is to click once on the plotter you want to make as default andthen press on the "set Default" button.

When you're satisfied with your plotter settings press the "Close" button, to getinto the main window of the OCC application again.



Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars 17

Chapter 2: Icons and Tool Bars

The Tools

Tools are small icons or pictures that represent different features within the

software. Tools are displayed across the top of the screen in bars (rows)located below the pull down menus and above the piece bar. There are five

different Toolbars in the PDS and GRADE software:

! Note: Toolbars may vary in appearance and number of available tools on each

Toolbar based on software modules that were purchased. For example, the

Advanced Toolbar may have fewer icons if the Custom Fit software module was

not purchased. This section covers all tolls on all Toolbars.

The Grading Toolbar:

The System Toolbar:

The Insert Toolbar:




The Edit Toolbar:

The Modify Toolbar:

The General Toolbar:

The Advanced Toolbar:

The Custom Fit Toolbar:

The Accessories Toolbar:




The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar:

Toolbars may be viewed on the screen, or they may be hidden from view.When all Toolbars are displayed, the size of the working area is reduced. To

control the display of Toolbars on the screen, use the Toolbars command in theView menu. To display a particular Toolbar on the screen, place a check mark

next to the name of the Toolbar. To hide a particular Toolbar, uncheck the

name of the Toolbar. To check or uncheck a selection, click on the name of

the Toolbar in the Toolbar menu. Toolbars toggle from on to off each time themouse clicks on the name of the Toolbar.

To Customize a Toolbar:

• From the View menu, select Tool Bars.

• Click on Customize.

• Click on New. Name the new toolbar.

• Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and

on the working screen.

• Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed forthe highlighted toolbar on the left.

• Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A descriptionof that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.

• Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbaron the working screen.




• Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeatthis until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: The buttons from the Template Basic Shapes toolbar cannot be transferred

to a customized toolbar.

To Reset a Toolbar:

Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default

toolbar.


• Highlight the desired toolbar.

• Click Reset.

• Click Close.

! !! ! Note: The Reset command changes to the Delete command when a customized

toolbar or a Template toolbar is highlighted.

To Create a Template Toolbar:

A Template Toolbar is a toolbar in which the buttons are pattern pieces, whichcan be stretched to a desired length and width.

• Save your file as a Template (From the Template menu, select"Save As".)

• Exit PDS.




• Open PDS.

• From the View menu, select Tool Bars. The Template will beadded to the bottom of the Toolbar list.

Engaging a Tool

Clicking once on the tool activates most tools. The cursor changes from the

normal pointer (an arrow) to another type of pointer that coincides with the

selected tool. For example, when the Walk tool is activated, the normalpointer turns into a cross hair line with two small feet. The two small feet

remind the user that the walk feature is currently activated.

Disengaging a Tool

Returning to the normal arrow pointer disengages a tool. To return to the

normal arrow pointer, either click on the tool that looks like an arrow, or click

the right mouse button, and select the first option in the pop up menu, “SelectTool” using the left mouse button.

Selecting another tool from one of the Toolbars also disengages tools currently

in use.

Grading Toolbar

The Grading Toolbar consists of tools that are directly related to the gradingcommands in the Grading pull down menu. These commands are also covered

in the Grading chapter.




Previous Point

Use Previous Point to select the next grading point in the counterclockwise

direction from the currently selected grading point. This tool eliminates using

the mouse to select grading points.

Copy Grading (Ctrl + G + C)

Use Copy Grading to place the X and Y grading increments of a selected

Grade point on the Windows clipboard. After clicking on the Copy Grading

tool, the X and Y grading increments are copied to the clipboard and remain

on the clipboard until another item is copied. Typically, the Copy Grading toolis used as the first step in pasting grading increments from one point to

another.

Paste Relative (Ctrl + G + R)

Paste Relative is used to automatically apply opposite grading on a piece when

using the Paste command related to the position of the point; left, right, up,down to the point where the grading value came from. Opposite grading refers

to grading increments that reverse in the negative or positive direction. Acheck mark next to Relative in the Grading menu indicates that the Relativeoption is activated. Another way to activate the Paste Relative option, is to

click on the Paste Relative icon in the Grading Toolbar. The Paste Relative

icon appears highlighted when activated.




Paste Grading (Ctrl + G + P)

Use Paste Grading to paste the X and Y grading increments from the Windows

clipboard onto the selected point. Select the point where the same X and Ygrading increments are desired and then click the Paste Grading tool. After

clicking on the Paste Grading tool, the X and Y grading increments are pasted

on to the selected point. Typically, the Paste Grading tool is used as the second

step for pasting grading increments from one point on to another.

Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G + X)

Use Paste X grading to paste only the X grading increment that was copied

onto the clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.

Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Y)

Use Paste Y grading to paste only the Y grading increment that was copiedonto the clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.

Paste Grading Around (Ctrl + G +A)

Use Paste Grading Around to paste the average of a specific grading valuearound a selected piece.




Zero Grading (Ctrl + G + Z)

Use Zero Grading to nullify a grading value of a selected point(s).

Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G + F)

Flip X Grading of the current selected point, reverses the direction of Xgrading values. If the X value for a grade point is +1/2” for each larger size,

Flip X reverses the X so that it is -1/2” for each larger size.

Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G + L)

Flip Y Grading reverses the direction of Y grading values. If the Y value for a

grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip Y reverses the Y so that it is -

1/2” for each size larger.

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E)

Use Equal X Grading so that only one grading value must be entered for an

entire size range on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious andrepetitive typing.




To Use Equal X Grading:

• Type in the X growth amount for the next larger size from thebase size.

• Move the cursor to the top of the X column in the grading table.

• Click the cursor with the left button one time to highlight theentire X column in black.

• Select Equal X Grading from the Grading menu or use the EqualX tool

• All sizes are now equally graded.

! !! ! Note: If the grading is not visible or only partially visible on the screen, press the

F4 key on the keyboard to activate all grading.

Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Q)

Use Equal Y Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire size

range on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious and repetitive

typing.


•Type in the Y growth amount for the next larger size from thebase size.

• Move the cursor to the top of the Y column in the grading table.

• Click the cursor with the left button one time to highlight the






Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G + O)

Zero Y Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the Y

column. This command is commonly used to remove grading from a particularpoint.

To Use Zero Y Grade:

• Select one or more grading points with the arrow tool. If selecting multiple points, drag the arrow in the clockwise

direction from the first point to the last point.

• Select Zero Y Grade from the Grading menu or use the Zero Y

icon.

• All sizes on the select point/s are now grading zero in the Ydirection.

Graded Nest

Allows building a graded nest using pieces that came from another CAD

application via a DXF, AAMA or any other file format where grading value

information and relationships between pieces is lost. For example, if a marker

is imported that contains a men’s shirt style including sizes S, M, and L, all thepieces are imported into SGS OptiTex software as separate pieces. No

relationships between sizes are imported with the data. The Graded Nest toolprovides the ability to stack all same pieces of different sizes into a graded nest

and relates the pieces as the same piece but different sizes.




To Use the Graded Nest Tool:

• First, sizes must be defined using the Size command under theGrading Menu. Define the Base size and size range to be used.

(See the Grading Chapter.)

• Display the point numbers for each pattern piece using the

Display Piece Attributes dialog box in the View menu. Makesure that the zero point to be used for each size is set to the same

number. In the example below, all pocket pieces use point #1 as

the zero point. If the zero point for each size is not set to thesame number, use the Start Point command in the Piece Menu.

(See the Piece Chapter).

• Click on the Graded Nest tool. Notice that the status line at thebottom of the screen prompts the user to select the Base size

first.

•Click on point #1 of the medium sized pockets (the base size).

• Click on point #1 of the small sized pocket.

• Click on point #1 of the large sized pocket.




• The pocket pieces should now display as a graded nest. If thegraded nest is not visible, press the F4 key on the keyboard.

Grade Proportional

Grade Proportional is used to apply grading on curved pattern edges. Forexample, proportional grading is commonly used on the hemline of a circle

skirt or on scalloped edges.






System Toolbar

The System Toolbar consists of many standard Windows type tools as well asseveral SGS specific tools.

Pointer

The Pointer tool (sometimes called the Selection tool or the Arrow tool) is thedefault tool used in the PDS software. This tool is used to select pieces, points,

and line segments.

! !! ! Tip: Double click the Pointer tool to redraw the screen.

! !! ! Note: To access the Pointer tool without clicking on the Pointer icon, click the

right mouse button one time. With the left button, select the Pointer tool

from the pop-up menu.

New (Ctrl + N)

Use the new tool to start a new design (DSN) file. A DSN file contains all the

pieces necessary to make one complete garment or other sewn product. Whenthe New tool is selected, the Make Rectangle dialog box displays by default.

Enter specific length and width values for the new pattern piece or select

Cancel to bypass the Make Rectangle dialog box.The number of pieces in a DSN file is limited only by the amount of memoryavailable on your computer.






















Angle

Angle indicates the angle of the notch from the line where the notch is placed.

To apply a notch on the outside of a pattern piece, use an angle setting of 180degrees. Other way to edit the notch angle, is using the mouse click. Click on

the "Angle by mouse click" and click again on the general direction of the

selected notch. It will be move to the click direction.

Attributes

The Attributes button activates the Notch Attributes dialog box. This dialog

box is used to establish parameters for an automatic cutter and to establishstripe adjust points when working with stripe, plaid, or repeated print fabrics.

Parameters for the cutter include notch type: draw, cut, or punch. Additionally,this area is used to establish operational stops (op stops) for temporarily

stopping an automatic cutter before or after cutting a piece.













Distance from Grading Points

When this box is selected, all measurements originate from the previous or

next grading point only. If this box is not selected, all measurements originate

from the previous or next point regardless of whether it is a grading point or anon-grading point.




! !! ! Note: While this dialog box remains open, different notches may be selected and

changed. After each notch is changed, click the Apply button. No changes

are implemented unless the Apply button is clicked. After editions are final,

click Close to exit.

! !! ! Tip: To create a notch that is the same distance from a point for all sizes

(sometimes referred to as a notch with a tangent rule), use either the From Previous, or from Next options. Use APPLY to apply changes, then use

COPY TO ALL to copy the notch to all sizes, then use REGRADE ALL, so

that the notch behaves the same on all sizes.

Seam

Use the Seam tool to add seam allowance to piece.

! !! !

Note: Refer to the Seam section in the Piece chapter for more information.

To Add Seam Allowance:

• Select the Seam Allowance tool.

• Either select a point on a piece indicating that seam allowance isto be added to the entire piece, or select the segment on thepiece on which to apply seam allowance.

• To select a single point for adding a constant seam allowance tothe entire piece, point the Seam Allowance tool at a point on the

piece and click the mouse twice.

• To select a segment or multiple segments, point the SeamAllowance tool at the first point and click the mouse, then drag

the Seam Allowance tool to the last point of the segment andclick the mouse.




! !! ! Note: It is not recommended to choose a curve point as a start or end point for a

seam.

• When the Point Attributes dialog box displays, enter the amountof the allowance in the Seam Width box at the lower left of thedialog box. If the seam allowance is added to the entire piece,

select the appropriate corner type by clicking on the

corresponding corner icon. If the seam allowance is added to asegment of the piece, choose the type of corner to apply to the

start of the seam and to the end of the seam from the Start Seam/

End Seam boxes. The icons illustrate available corner types. To

leave the corner types as standard corners, it is not necessary tomake a corner selection.

• Click OK after appropriate information is added.








• Click the left mouse button on the first point of the dart (See thediagram below).

! !! ! Note: There must be existing points on the first and last dart points on the piece’s

boundary. If points do not exist where the dart is to be placed, use the Add

Relative command in the Edit menu. (See the Edit chapter).

• Click the left mouse button again on the last point of the dart.The cursor automatically becomes the center point (apex) of theline created between the two selected points.

• Drag the cursor internally to create the dart depth and click the

mouse button a third time. After clicking the mouse button a

third time the Dart Attributes dialog box will appear.

! !! ! Note: The dart is always created symmetrically.

•When the Dart Attributes dialog box displays, select the desiredoptions.

• Click OK.




Dart Attributes Dialog Box:

Name

Use name field to give a name for the dart apex point.

! !! ! Note: If your dart apex point as a name, you will be able to apply a grading rule

(by using “Apply Rule by name” command from grading menu) for the

dart apex without selecting the dart apex point.




Direction

Select the direction to fold the dart, clockwise, or counter clockwise. The

Overlap box below must be checked in order to select a direction.

Overlap

Check the Overlap box to establish that the dart is to be folded in a specific

direction. Checking this box activates the Direction options above.

Depth

Use the Depth field to view the current depth of the dart or enter a specificdepth for the dart.




Equal for All Sizes

If the dart should not grade with the pattern piece, check this box. If the dart

should grade with each size, uncheck this box.

Drill, Draw, Cut, None

Select the desired option for the drill hole.

Distance

Enter the distance to place the drill from the apex of the dart. To place the drill

hole one half inch below the apex, enter .5 in the Distance box.

To Pivot a Dart to a New Location:

• Select the Dart tool.

• Click and hold the left mouse button on the center point of thedart.

• Drag the cursor to the new location along the perimeter of thepattern piece where the dart is to be pivoted Click the mouse a

second time.

• As shown in the diagram, click on point #1 and drag to #3. Click the mouse button again at point #3 to pivot the entire dart to the

side seam. This step directly relates manual pattern making

when closing a dart after the pattern has been slashed.













Pleat

The Pleat tool is used to create pleats. Both Box pleats and Knife pleats may

be added using the Pleat tool. The Pleat tool allows for even and variable(uneven) pleating. Pleat depth and the amount of spacing between each pleat

may also be specified in the Pleat dialog box.

! !! ! Note: Error messages appear if a pleat is placed over a sharp curve or

corner. Error messages also appear if the number, depth, and distance between each pleat exceed the existing piece’s dimensions.

Error messages indicate that the values entered into the Pleat dialog

box are incorrect.

To Make a Pleat:

• Select the Pleat tool.

• Click the mouse on the piece at the point where the pleat is to

start.

• When the Move Point dialog box displays, either confirm thevalues in the Move Point dialog box by pressing Enter, or enter

the desired values and click OK.

• Click the mouse on the piece at the point where the pleat is toend. Repeat step 3.

• When the Define Pleat Characteristics dialog box displays, enterthe desired pleat information. (See the Pleat CharacteristicsDialog Box section below).

• Click OK.




Pleat Characteristics Dialog Box:

Box

Select Box Pleat in order to create box pleats. This type of pleat has four

folds. When Box Pleat is checked, an image of the pleat displays on the upper

right side of the dialog box.

Knife

Select Knife Pleat in order to create knife pleats. This type of pleat has two

folds. When Knife Pleat is checked, an image of the pleat displays on theupper right side of the dialog box.




CCW Folded

This option is activated only when the Knife Pleat box is selected. Selecting

this option makes the knife pleats fold in the counter clockwise direction. If this option is not selected, the pleats fold in the clockwise direction.

Variable Pleat

The variable pleat option is used to create uneven pleats. For example, avariable pleat may be 1” at the top of the pleat and .5” at the bottom of the

pleat. If this option is not selected, the pleat is even or parallel from top to

bottom. See the diagram below for illustration.

Depth

Depth refers to the size (thickness) of the pleat. For example, a pleat may be

1” in depth.

First

First is activated only when the Variable option is selected. The depth of thepleat on the first line is entered in this box, and the depth of the pleat on the

second line is entered in the above box. The above box, “Depth,” changes to

“Second” when the variable option is activated. This prompts the user to entera pleat depth for the second line.

Number of Pleats

Enter the number of pleats in this box.

Pleats Distance

This option is only activated when 2 or more pleats are entered in the Number

of Pleats box above. Enter the distance between pleats. For example, theremay be two pleats on a pattern piece that are spaced 2” apart.




Pleats First Distance

This option is only activated when 2 or more pleats are entered in the Number

of Pleats box and when the Variable option is selected. Enter the distancebetween pleats on the first pleat line in this box. In this case, the distance

between pleats on the second pleat line is entered in the Pleats Distance box

above.

Counter Clockwise

This option controls the direction that the pleats are placed from the originaldefined pleat line (see step #2 in the “To Make A Pleat” section). If this box is

checked, pleats are placed in the counterclockwise direction from the original

line. If the box is unchecked, pleats are placed in the clockwise direction fromthe original line.




! !! ! Note: See the following diagram for the results of the above options on a

skirt pattern.




Circle

Use the Circle tool to create a circular line on a piece. Circles may be created

with a specific radius, and they may also be duplicated.

To Make a Circular Line:

• Select the Circle tool.

• Click the mouse on the piece where the center of the circle is tobe placed.

• Drag the mouse away from the center point to the approximatesize of the desired circular line, and click the mouse again.




• When the Edit Circle dialog box displays, confirm the existingradius by pressing Enter, or specify an exact radius by entering aspecific value in the Radius box.

! !! ! Note: Use the Name filed to give a new to your circle

! !! ! Note: If your circle as a name you will be able to apply a grading rule (by

using “Apply Rule by name” command from grading menu) for the

dart button without selecting the dart apex point.

• OPTIONAL: To create duplicate circles, press the Duplicatebutton and enter the necessary information in the Duplicate

dialog box.

• Press OK.




Button

Use the Button tool to create drill holes. Buttons are also used to mark a match

point, for stripe matching on a marker when working with stripe, plaid, orrepeated print fabrics. Buttons may be duplicated quickly and easily without

having to recreate each button. The button tool can also be used to mark a drill

hole for pockets or as OpStop for the cutting machine.

Buttons can be graded or they can serve as stack points. (Refer to the Stack

Point command in the Grading chapter.)

To Create a Button (drill hole):

• Select the Button tool.

• Click the mouse on the piece where the button is to be placed. If the mouse is clicked on an existing point, the Add Point Relative

dialog box displays which allows the user to specify a specificdistance from the existing point where the button is to be placed.

If the mouse is not clicked on an existing point, the Button

Attributes dialog box displays.




• When the Button Attributes dialog box displays, select the typeof button to create and the desired Operation Stop CuttingOption. (See note below). Also, indicate the stripe adjust

number if the button is for stripe matching.




• OPTIONAL: To create duplicate buttons, press theDUPLICATE button and enter the necessary information in theDuplicate dialog box.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: Op Stop options control whether the cutter stops before, after, or does

not stop before or after a drill.

! !! ! Note: Buttons are also created using the Add Relative command from the

Edit pull down menu. This method of adding buttons allows placement of the buttons a specific distance from an existing point.

(Refer to the Edit chapter for details).

Buttons on Distance

Use Buttons on Distance to add several buttons on equal distance.

• Select the Button on Distance tool.

• Place the Button on Distance tool directly over a point, if the

buttons are to be

related to that point, where the buttons will begin. If not, placethe Button on

Distance tool to the desired location on the piece. Click with the

mouse button.

• Drag the tool to the point where the buttons will end. Click withthe mouse button.

• The Set Buttons on equal distance dialog box will display.




• Enter the Number of buttons desired

• Between - the number of buttons in between the first and lastbutton

• Before - the number of buttons before the first button

• After - the number of buttons after the last button

• Distance shows the distance between the first & last button.

• Enable the Set First option in order to display the first button.

• Enable the Set Last option in order to display the last button.




• Enter a value for the Radius of the buttons.

• Select the Command for either a plotter or cutter.

• Click OK.

Text

Use the Text tool to add text. This tool is commonly used to add instructions

or other information to a piece to aid the cutting process. The text is plotted on

the pieces either from the PDS software, or it is plotted from the Markingsoftware. Text may be added at an angle.

! !! ! Note: It is not necessary to use the text tool for standard piece information

such as the piece name, style name, piece code, piece description, size name, or sequence number. Standard piece information in entered

using the Piece Information dialog box. (See the Piece Chapter for details). This information is controlled in the Marking software. It is

optional to plot all, some, or none of this “standard” information. See the SGS Marking Manual for more details.

To Place Text:

• Click the Text tool. The arrow becomes a text cursor.

• Move the cursor to the desired position within the selected

pattern piece and click the mouse button.

• When the Enter Text at Screen Position dialog box displays,type the appropriate text in the dialog box.

• Click OK. The text displays on the screen.




To Change or Delete Text:

• Select the Text tool.

• Select the text to be changed or deleted by clicking on top of the

text.

• When the Enter Text at Screen Position dialog box displays,either change the existing text or use the delete key or the

backspace key to remove unwanted text.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: There are limitations to the text size according to your output device.

The text size and font are changed through the Fonts command in

the Options menu.

Pleat Lines

The Pleat Lines command has three sub options: Add, Add by Angle &

Remove. Pleat lines are a special line type that runs between 2 points. It is a

dashed line that is attached to its end points. If you move on of these points,

the Pleat line will move with it.

To define an Pleat line between two points:

• Using the Pleat Lines tool, select the two points by clicking onthe first point, and then hold down the Shift key while selectingthe second point.

Or




• Using the Pleat Lines tool, click on a point and then drag thecursor to the next point and click again with left mouse button.To remove the Pleat line either select the two points and choose

the ‘Remove’ option from the Pleat command, or select the Pleat

line with the pointer (arrow) and use the ‘Delete’ (Del) key from

the keyboard. Remember that any selected element becomesRED while the cursor is close to that element.




The Edit Toolbar

Tools in this Toolbar are used to reposition pieces on the screen such as flip

and rotate pieces. It also allows you to edit the contour of the piece by usingthe move point tools.

Move Point

Select the Move Point Tool to move a single point.

To Move a Single Point:

• Select the Move Point tool.

• Click on the point to be moved. The selected point is nowattached to the cursor.

• Move the point to the desired position and click the mouse againto anchor the point. The Move Point dialog box displays with

the new point coordinates.




• OPTIONAL: Enter the desired values to move the point to a

specific location.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: The display of the Move dialog box may be turned off by clicking the Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not displayed until this

option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog Box command in the

Options menu.




Move Proportional

Select the Move Proportional tool to move a section proportionally between

two grading points.

To Move Points Proportionally Between Two Grading Points:

• Select the Move Proportional tool.

• Click on the grading points on each end of the segment to bemoved proportionally.

• Move the points to the desired position and click the mouse

again to anchor the points. The Move Segment Proportional

dialog box displays.

• OPTIONAL: Enter the desired values to move the points to aspecific location.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: Segments may be moved proportionally between non-grading points,

however, the results are different. Grading point’s function as

anchoring points for the segment that is being proportionally moved.

! !! ! Note: The display of the Move dialog box may be turned off by clicking the

Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not displayed until this option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog Box command in the

Options menu.




Move Parallel

The Move Parallel tool moves a segment of a piece. For example, this tool is

commonly used to extend or lengthen one side of a pattern piece.

To Move Parallel:

• Select the Move Parallel tool.

• Click and drag the cursor in a clockwise direction to select thepoints to move.

! !! ! Tip: After selecting points, the Move Point command from the Edit menu

may also be used to move the selected group of points.

• Click on any of the selected points and move the segment to thedesired location.

• Click the left mouse button to anchor the position. The MoveParallel dialog box displays.




• OPTIONAL: Enter values for the exact placement of thesegment in the X and Y directions.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Note: The display of the Move Parallel dialog box may be turned off by

clicking the Disable This Dialog option. The dialog box is not displayed until this option is reversed using the Open Move Dialog

Box command in the Options menu.

Round Corner

Round Corner is used to create a curved intersection where two lines intersecton a boundary line as well on a multiple point selection.

To Create a Rounded Corner:

• Select the intersection point(s) to create a rounded corner.

• Select ROUND CORNER from the EDIT menu.

• Enter a value for the radius of the rounded corner in the dialogbox.

! !! ! Note: Round corner command supports multiply corners point selection.

! !! ! Tip: To undo the rounded corner, select Undo from the Edit menu.




Align Points

The Align Points command aligns a selected group of points horizontally,

vertically or by a specified angle.

When choosing the Align Points command, more than one point must be

selected. To select points, click and drag the cursor clockwise along the piececontour until the appropriate points are selected (always select points in a

clockwise direction).

To Align Points

• Click and drag to select the points to be aligned.

• From the EDIT menu choose ALIGN POINTS.

• When the Align Points dialog box displays, select the alignmentmode: Horizontal, Vertical, or enter a value in the Angle box toalign points on an angle.

• Click OK.

Set Point (0,0)

Select the Set (0,0) Point command to change the start measuring point for theselected pattern piece in the working area. This command is used in

conjunction with the Coordinates command in the Display menu. Thiscommand is particularly useful during the freehand editing of points with the

mouse because it shows the relative moving position of the cursor in any

direction.




! !! ! Tip: Use this command to add notches, add or move points, etc. with the mouse by opening the Coordinates window in the Display menu.

To set (0,0) Point:

• Select the point to use as the new start point.

• From the PIECE menu choose SET (0,0) POINT.

! !! ! Note: Changing the 0,0 point causes the grid to align itself to the 0,0 point.

(To view the grid, check the Grid and Stripes option in the Options pull down menu.)

Start Point

Select this command to define which grading point will become the first point.

The first grading point and the order of all other grading points is especially

important when using All Point (Global) Grading rules. To display pointnumbers, select Point Numbers from the Display pull down menu.

! !! ! Note: While using the All Point Grading (Global) rules, point numbers play

an important role.

To Set the Start Point:

• Select the point to set as the first piece point.

• From the GRADING menu choose START POINT.

• The selected point is now the first point. Number one GlobalGrading rules will apply to this point.




Move

This tool resembles a hand and is used to move pattern pieces around on the

working area.

To Move a Pattern Piece:

• Select the Move Piece tool.

• Click on the pattern piece to be moved. The piece is now

attached to the mouse and can be moved in any direction.

• Move the piece to the desired location.

•

Click mouse button a second time to anchor the piece at the newlocation.

! !! ! Tip: The keyboard shortcut for the Move Piece tool follows: Click the

pattern piece to be moved, then press the Space Bar once. The cursor changes to a hand and the piece can be moved to the desired location.

Move Internal

The Move Internal tool is used to move any internal element, lines, buttons,

circles and texts on a pattern piece.




To Move an Internal Element on a Pattern Piece:

• Select the Move Internal command.

• Click on the internal element to be moved. The internal elementis now attached to the mouse and can be moved in any direction.

• Move the internal element to the desired location.

• Click mouse button a second time to anchor the piece at the newlocation.

! !! ! Note: You can also copy internal elements to any location on the pattern by

using the Shift + move Internal tool.

Select Rectangle

Selects several internal elements at once (including the baseline).

• Select the piece with the internals to be highlighted.

• Select the Select Rectangle tool.

• Click with the mouse button and drag the cursor so that arectangle is defined around the desired internals.

• Lift the mouse button up to reveal which internals arehighlighted.

• The Copy / Paste Internals (Edit Menu) function can now beperformed.




Rotate Segment

Select the Rotate Segment tool to alter a section by rotating it around a pivot

point. The pivot point can be placed anywhere on the piece. You can use therotate segment for slash and spread purposes.

To Rotate a Segment:

• Select the Rotate Segment tool.

• Click the mouse at the location to place the pivot point. A smallred X displays to mark the spot.

• Click and drag the cursor in a clockwise direction to select the

segment to Rotate.

• Click on one of the selected points and drag in the desireddirection. The segment rotates around the pivot point as

it is dragged.

• Click the left mouse button to anchor the rotated segment.

The Rotate Angle dialog box displays.




• OPTIONAL: Enter new values to define specific measurements.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Tip: To change the cursor back to the normal pointer (arrow), click the

right mouse button and select Previous from the pop up menu.

Rotate Piece

Use the Rotate Piece command to rotate the entire piece around a pivot point.

To Rotate a Piece:

• Either select a point with the pointer, and then select theROTATE PIECE tool to establish a specific pivot point. Or,

simply select the ROTATE PIECE tool to rotate from the centerof the piece.

• The piece is now controlled by the cursor. Move the cursor tothe location where the piece is rotated as desired. Click themouse button.

• When the Rotate Internal Angel dialog box displays, click OK toaccept the rotation angle, or enter specific angle values for the

rotation.

! !! ! Note: Pieces are also rotated by selecting the Rotate option from the Piece menu. (Refer to the Rotate command in the Piece Menu).




Flip Horizontal

This command flips the current pattern piece 180ø along the Y-axis (Back and

Forth).

Flip Vertical

This command flips the current pattern 180ø along the X-axis (Up and Down).




The Modify Toolbar

This toolbar is used to modify the piece or elements of the piece according to

the base line.

Rotate

Select the Rotate command to rotate a piece, internal element or baseline by a

specified number of degrees to the left or right.

To Rotate a Pattern Piece:

• Select the piece to rotate.

• From the PIECE menu choose ROTATE.

• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box displays,check the Piece box.




• Enter the desired rotation value.

• Select the rotation direction, left or right.

! !! ! Note: The selected piece rotates each time the Left or Right button is

selected. The piece and the base line rotate as if they are locked

together.

To Rotate a Selected Element:

• Select an internal element (internal line, text, circle, etc.).


• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box is displayed,

check the Selected Element box.

• Enter the desired rotation angle.


! !! ! Note: The selected element rotates each time the Left button or Right

button is selected.

To Rotate Piece Over Base:

• Select the baseline or the piece.


• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box is displayed,check the Baseline box.






! !! ! Note: The outcome of Rotate when using the Baseline Only option is the

same regardless of whether the baseline or the entire piece is selected.

! !! ! Note: The piece rotates and the baseline remains in its original position

each time the Left or Right button is selected.

Rotate to Baseline

The Rotate to Initial Base line command is used to rotate the piece back to its

original positioning. The base line, or grain line, is a line (usually horizontal)which ensures the placement of the piece is in the correct direction on the

screen and on the marker.

To Rotate to Initial Base line:

• Make sure everything is ungrouped.

• From the PIECE menu choose ROTATE TO INITIAL BASELINE.

• The pattern piece is returned to its original position, and allinternal elements are rotated along with the piece. This

command also sets the current base line to a horizontal position.

The ratio between the base line and the contour remainsconstant.

Rotate Line Parallel to Segment

Use Base Parallel to Segment to realign the base line to another internal line or

to a line segment on the piece’s boundary.




To Make the Base Line Parallel to a Segment:

• Select the 2 point internal line or line segment to which the baseline will be aligned.

• From the PIECE menu, select BASE PARALLEL TOSEGMENT.

• The base line realigns with the selected segment.

! !! ! Note: When using a line segment from the piece’s boundary, the direction

and sequence of choosing the two points is important affects the direction of the base line. If the base line is placed outside the piece

after using this command, use the Make New Base line command to

move it inside the piece (See the following section).

New Base Line

This command is used to edit base lines that run off a piece. Sometimes base

lines move to the outside of the piece while working with the Cut tool or using

the Create Parallel to Segment command.

This command is useful if the base line was not digitized, or if two pieces were joined resulting in an odd shaped piece. This command places the current base

line inside the piece close to the center.

! !! ! Note: The length of the base line may change during this process.To Make a New Base line:

• From the PIECE menu choose MAKE NEW BASE LINE.

• The Base line is placed closer to the center of the pattern piece.




Mirror

This command creates a new piece exactly the same as the selected piece

except the new piece has two symmetrical halves made from the originalpiece. Note that this command creates an exact symmetric duplicate, which is

the same on both sides.

To Mirror a Pattern Piece:

• Select two consecutive points by clicking on the first point, thendragging (clockwise) to the next point.

• From the PIECE menu choose MIRROR.

•

A new piece is created which is symmetrically placed accordingto the selected points. The new piece displays in the furthermost

right-hand box in the Piece Display Bar. See the diagram below.




The Darts Toolbar

This toolbar is used to create, multiply, copy and paste, close and fix darts.

Create Dart

The Crate Dart tool crates a close dart.




• From the DART menu chose CREATE DART.

• The Dart Attributes Dialog Box Appears.

• When the Dart Attributes dialog box displays, select the desiredoptions.

• Click OK.

Multiply Dart

The Multiply Darts command creates several darts on a selected segment at the

same time.

To create a multidart:

• Click and drag to the points on a segment where the darts are tobe created.

• From the Darts menu select Open Multiple Darts.

• The Open MultiDart dialog box will display.

• Enter the desired multiple dart information and click OK.

• The darts will be created on the first and last selected points. If more than 2 darts are created, they will be equally distributed

between the points.




The below dialog will be displayed so you can make any specifications that

will apply to all new darts.

Copy Dart

Use the Copy Dart command to copy selected Dart to the clipboard. Then use

the Paste Dart command to paste the copied Dart into the same DSN file or todifferent DSN file. The copied selection can continue to be pasted until

something else is placed onto the clipboard.

• Select the Dart to be copied.

• From the DART menu choose COPY DART.

• Open the layout where the object is to be pasted.




• From the Dart menu choose PASTE DART. The selectedobjects is placed into the file and displayed in the working area

Paste Dart

Use the Paste Dart command to paste the last dart cut or copied onto the

clipboard into the current DSN file or into a different .DSN file. The

cut/copied selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placedonto the clipboard.

To Paste a Dart into a DSN file:

• Cut or copy the selected Dart by choosing the appropriatecommand from the Dart menu.

• Open the layout where the object is to be pasted

• From the DART menu choose PASTE DART. The selected Dartis placed into the piece

Close Dart

The Close Darts command closes the selected dart(s).

• Select the apex of the dart to close.

• From the Darts menu select Close Darts. The pattern will adjustas if the dart was physically closed.

• To reopen the dart, select the Undo tool.




Fix Dart

The Fix Darts command fixes an existing dart by changing the direction of the

dart apex.

!!!! Note: It is important to note the four options in this dialog box to turn the

dart triangle to and even sided triangle.




The General Toolbar

This toolbar is used for most general functions of the software such as

zooming in and out, undo and redo functions as well as cutting and pasting.

Zoom In

The Zoom tool is used to display a selected area in a maximized view.

To Zoom In on an Area of the Screen:

• Click the Zoom tool.

• Click and drag a box around the area to zoom.

! !! ! Tip: To return to the normal view of the screen, use the Zoom All tool

Zoom Out

The Zoom tool is used to Zoom Out After zooming in to get a full Imagedisplay.

Click On The Zoom Out Tool several times to achieve the correct zoom.

! !! ! Note: You can use the Zoom Out Tool also for zooming In, by holding the

Shift key while clicking on the Zoom Out Tool.




Zoom All

The Zoom all Tool is used To achieve the max possible view of All the pieces

in the Working Area.

! !! ! Note: Use Zoom All + ALT key, for zooming selected piece only.

Zoom Real Scale

Views a selection up close by clicking on it to receive the maximum “filling”

when the piece is edited.

• Select the Zoom Real Scale tool.

• With the Zoom Real Scale tool, click on the area to zoom in.

• The desired area will then center on the working area.

. ! !! ! Tip: To return to the normal view of the screen, use the Zoom All tool.




Separate

Use this tool to perform a zoom on a selected piece while leaving the rest of

the pieces off the working area.

• Select the Separate tool.

• With the Separate tool, click on the piece to zoom in on.

• A dialog box will display to Replace Old (Yes) or RemoveCurrent (No) of the other pieces on the working area

Undo (Ctrl+Z)

Use the Undo tool to reverse the most recent action performed in the design

file. The Undo tool may be selected up to 20 times undoing the 20 most recentoperations, back to adding a piece to the working area. Undo does not work toundo the loading of the file.

! !! ! Tip: Press the Control key and the Z key to undo.

! !! ! Note: Refer to the Edit Chapter for more information




Redo (Ctrl+Y)

Use the Redo tool to reverse any operation changed by the Undo command.

Continue to choose the Redo tool until all of the “undone” operations havebeen reversed.

! !! ! Tip: Press the Control key and the Y key to redo.

! Note: Refer to the Edit Chapter for more information.

Cut (Ctrl + X)

Cut is used to cut a pattern piece from a file. The cut piece is transferred to the

clipboard and remains on the clipboard until another item is placed on the

clipboard. This tool is often used to cut one piece out of an existing design fileand paste it into another design file.

Copy (Ctrl + C)

Copy is used to copy a pattern piece from a file. The Copied piece istransferred to the clipboard and remains on the clipboard until another item is

placed on the clipboard. This tool is often used to copy one piece from an

existing design file and pastes it into another design file.




Paste (Ctrl + V)

Paste is used to paste an item from the clipboard into another file. The Paste

command is used as a secondary step to either the Copy command or the Cutcommand.

Swap Pieces

Swap pieces exchanges a piece on the working area for the original piece in

the piece bar. This feature is used to compare the original piece (the piece inthe piece bar) with the piece that is being changed (the piece in the working

area) during the editing process.

Remove Current

Remove Current removes piece in the working area without updating theoriginal pieces. Use this option to clear the working area of all pieces without

keeping any edits.

! !! ! Note: Refer to the Clear Pieces section in the Edit Chapter for more

information.




Make New

Make New removes pieces from the working area and simultaneously creates

a new piece in the Piece Display Bar of pieces that were previously in theworking area. However, if a piece is placed in the working area and changed,

the Make New command will create a new piece which contains the changes.

Use this option to clear the working area and create New pieces. (See diagramsbelow).




! !! ! Tip: To place pieces that have been cleared back into the working area, use

the Undo command from the Edit menu.

Replace Old

Replace Old replaces the piece in the piece bar with the current piece on the

working area. Use this option to clear the working area of a selected piece

while updating the original piece with the newly edited piece. Using theReplace Old tool keeps the edits made to the selected piece.

! !! ! Note: Refer to the Clear Pieces section in the Edit Chapter for more

information.




The Advanced Toolbar

The Advanced Toolbar consists of tools used for Advanced Features in PDS,specifically, the Custom Fit Feature and the Fabric Feature. The Fabric feature

is covered in the Piece chapter and the Custom Fit feature is covered in the

Design chapter.

Hide Fabric Pattern

Hide Fabric Pattern hides a selected fabric pattern from display on the screen.

Show Fabric Pattern

Show Fabric Pattern shows a selected fabric pattern on the screen. The fabric

displays on the entire working area of the screen.

Clip Fabric Pattern

Clip Fabric Pattern shows the selected fabric only on the pieces that are

displayed in the working area of the screen.




Show/Hide Control Points

This tool toggles between displaying the control points of a piece and not

displaying the control points of a piece. Fabric appearance is cleaner when thecontrol points are hidden from view.

The Dimensional Toolbar

The Custom Fit Toolbar gives you the right tools to take almost any kind of

garment and create a set of parameters, that by definition, if these parameters

will be changed, the specific garment will fit any customer measurements.

Horizontal Measurement Tool

The Horizontal tool is used to fix the Horizontal measurement between pair of

points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of

numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:Side_Seam+1 and means that the distance is the side-seam body measurement

plus one inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be

points of the external contour (the current version supports custom fitting of external contour only, future versions will support internals as well).




In order to create a Horizontal Measurement:

Select the Horizontal tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2nd point (one by

one, the order is not important,).

Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and click again. An

Edit Dimension dialog will open.

In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required Expression.

After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule will appear onthe screen.

You can also take the Horizontal rule tool and add a new rule between points

which sets the vertical distance between them to 0.0 as they should align (pay

attention that we set the Horizontal distance to 0.0 and not the vertical

distance).

Vertical Measurement Tool

The vertical tool is used to fix the vertical measurement between pair of points

to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:

BACK_SHOULDER/2+1 and means that the distance is a half of the shoulder

to shoulder body measurement plus one inch. The points must belong to the

same pattern and can only be points of the external

Contour (the current version supports custom fitting of external contour only,

future versions will support internals as well).




In order to create a Vertical Measurement:

Select the vertical tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2nd point (one by

one, the order is not important).

Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and click again. An

Edit Dimension dialog will open.

In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the required Expression.

After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rule will appear onthe screen.

You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rule between points


attention that we set the vertical distance to 0.0 and not the horizontal

distance).

Diagonal Measurement Tool

The Diagonal Measurement tool is used to fix the diagonal measurement

between a pair of points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to anyexpression made of numbers and body measurements, for example, an

expression can be: SHOULDER/2 and means that the distance is the shoulder

measurement divided by 2. The points must belong to the same pattern andcan only be points of the external contour.

In order to create a Diagonal Measurement:

• Select the Diagonal tool from the Dimension toolbar.

• Click on the first point, and then click on the last point.




• Drag the mouse to the place on the screen where the rule shouldappear. Click again.

• An Edit Dimension dialog box will open. In the Expressionfiled of this dialog, enter the required Expression.

• After the Expression has been added, click OK. The new rulewill appear on the screen.

Curve Measurement Tool

The Curve Measurement tool is used to fix a curve measurement between a

pair of points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expressionmade of numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:

ARMHOLE + ½ and means that the distance is the armhole measurement plus½ an inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be pointsof the external contour.

In order to create a Curve Measurement:

• Select the Curve tool from the Dimension toolbar.

• Click on the first point, and then click on the last point.

• Drag the mouse to the place on the screen where the rule shouldappear. Click again.

• An Edit Dimension dialog box will open. In the Expression

filed of this dialog, enter the required Expression.

• After the Expression has been added, click OK. The new rulewill appear on the screen.




The Accessories Toolbar

This toolbar contains a group of tools that you can use to manipulate pieces as

well as its segments.

Walk

The Walk tool is used to walk two pieces against each other. This tool is usedafter the pieces to be walked have been locked together on a shared point using

the Move (hand) tool.

! !! ! Tip: To back up one step, use the Undo command in the Edit menu or use

Ctrl + Z.

! !! ! Note: Refer to the Piece chapter for a detailed description of the Walk

feature.

Measure

Select the Measure tool to measure distances between any two points. The

points can be vertical, horizontal or diagonal.

To Measure Distances:

• Select the Measure tool.




• Click the point to begin the measurement.

• Move the cursor to the point where the measurement is to endand click the mouse.

• The All Dimension Values dialog box displays showing themeasurement.

• Click OK.

Trace Piece

Select the Trace tool to create a new pattern piece out of two or more pieces

laying on top of each other, thereby creating a conjunction of the pieces. Thistool traces the intersecting lines of the pieces in order to create a new piece.

(See the diagram below).

To Create a New Piece with the Trace Tool:

• Place the pieces to be joined overlapping in the working area.

• Select the TRACE tool.

• Click the mouse button on any point of the new perimeter. Thewhole piece becomes highlighted in red.

• Click the next point in a clockwise direction on the intersectingsegment from the second piece. The PDS software generates anew piece from the intersections of the original pieces

• Once all segments are traced, shown by the new formhighlighted in red, click the Trace tool on a blank area of the




working screen.

• The newly created piece is displayed in the Piece Display Bar asan individual piece.

Join Pieces

The Join Piece tool is used to join two different pieces together as one along a

shared segment. If the two pieces have the same length and angle, they are

joined perfectly. If they do not have the same length and angle, and if the linesegments are not parallel, the pieces are joined, but their junction is not

perfect. It may be necessary to edit the intersecting lines on the newly joined

piece. Patterns may be cut multiple times and rejoined.

To Join Pieces:

• Select the Join Pieces tool.

• Click within one piece, near the segment where the pieces are to




be joined.

• Drag the cursor to the other pattern (crossing the commonsegments of both patterns).

• Click the mouse button a second time.

• When the join Pieces Alongside dialog displays, click OK to

accept the joining.




! !! ! Note: It is recommended to join two pieces at the beginning or end of a

segment. One point will always be shared by both pieces.

Join Pieces Dialog Box:

To join pieces into one single piece, unchecked the "Move Pieces Along SideOnly option

! !! ! Tip: Since the join pieces tool is joining two segments even if they do not

have the same length, the direction of pointing is important. The first




clicked piece becomes stationary and the second piece will move towards the first one. The joining point is the closest point right to the

line that is created by the join tool.

Delete Seam:

Select this option to delete the seam between the joined pieces, making the

joined pieces one individual piece.

Move Piece Along Side Only:

Select this option to move the pieces next to each other only, without deleting

the seam in between the pieces. The two pieces remain separate individualpieces.

Cut

Use the Cut tool to cut a piece. The Cut tool draws a line across the piece andsplits the piece along the line. The line may be a simple, two point’s line. Or it

may be a multi point curved line. The PDS software has the ability to

automatically grade the piece along the cut if grading is necessary. Thiseliminates figuring out difficult grading values.

To Cut a Piece:

• Select the Cut tool.

• Click the mouse on the boundary of the piece where the cut is tobegin.

• When the Move dialog box displays, either enter values tospecify the exact location of the first point, or press OK or the




Enter key to bypass this dialog box.

• Click the mouse where the next point of the cut line is to beplaced. Repeat steps #3 and step #4 until the cut line reaches

another boundary line of the piece.

• When the dialog box displays asking, “Do you want to aligncutting by base size?”select NO to automatically grade along the

cut, or select YES not to grade the cut.

• When the Seam Attributes dialog box displays, enter the desiredseam width and corner types

• Click OK.

! !! ! Tip: To create a curved cut line, hold the Shift key down when clicking the

mouse to select a point.

! !! ! Tip: If you need to cut the piece along a known angle you can use the F2

key just after you clicked the first (start) point of the piece.

Draft

Use the Draft tool to draft multi point internal lines.

To Draft a Line:

• Select the Draft tool.

• Click the mouse anywhere on the selected piece.

• When the Add A Contour Relative To Current Point dialog boxdisplays, enter specific values for exact placement of the point




or select OK to bypass this dialog.

• Repeat Steps #2 and #3 until the desired line is constructed.

• To finish drafting the line, click the right mouse button andselect Finish Draft from the pop up menu.

! !! ! Tip: To create a curved cut line, hold the Shift key down when clicking the

mouse to select a point.

Cut Along Internal

Use Cut Along Internal to cut (split) a piece along an existing internal line.The internal line has to start and end exactly on the pieces external perimeter

line.

To Cut Along an Internal:

• Select the Cut Along Internal tool.

• Click the mouse somewhere along the internal line where thepiece is to be cut.

• When the dialog box displays asking, “Do you want to aligncutting by base size?, select NO to automatically grade along the

cut, or select YES not to grade the cut.

• When the Seam Attributes dialog box displays, enter the desiredseam width and corner types.

• Click OK.




Trace Segments

Trace Segments is used to trace segments from an existing piece in order to

create a new piece. For example, this tool is often used to create facing andlining pattern pieces. It is possible to use the trace tool to create a new piecefrom two existing pieces.

To Trace Segments:

• Select the Trace Segments tool.

• Click the mouse on each line segment from which to create thenew piece. Select line segments in the clockwise direction. Eachsegment highlights in red during the selection process and an

‘X’ mark will appear on the next grading point.

• When all segments are selected (a closed contour shape has beendefined), a dialog box displays asking, “Finish form contour?”.

Click YES to complete the tracing procedure. Click NO to

continue tracing, or click CANCEL to cancel the procedureentirely.

• The new piece appears on top of the original piece. Use theMove (hand) Tool to move the new piece away from the original

piece.




! !! ! Note: When you use the draft tool and you want to zoom out, click on the

mouse right button. From the menu that will appear, click on “Select

Tool” with the mouse left button + Ctrl key!

! !! ! Note: To delete the line, select the line with the pointer tool and press the

Delete key. Or, select the line with the pointer tool and select Delete Internal Elements from the Edit menu. Another way to delete the

line is to use the Undo tool, the Undo command in the Edit menu, or press Ctrl + Z.

Build Piece

Build piece is used to build pieces from an existing pieces in order to create a.

pattern pieces. It is possible to use the trace tool to create a new piece fromtwo existing pieces.




To Built piece:

• Select the built piece tool.

• Click the mouse on the first area for the new piece. The closedcounter will be highlight.

• Click the mouse on the next area to be joined to the new piece

• The counter of the new piece will highlight.

• In order to place the build piece click on the selected area again.

• The new piece appears on top of the original piece. Use theMove (hand) Tool to move the new piece away from the original

piece.

Fold Out

Use the Fold out tool to fold out part of a pattern piece. This toll is commonly

used to make pattern pieces with attached facings.

To Use the Fold Out Tool:

• Create an internal line on the pattern piece using the MakeParallel command in the Design Menu. (see the Design

Chapter).

• Click on the Fold Out tool.

• Click on the mirror line of the pattern piece. (see the diagrambelow).




• Click on the newly added internal fold line.

• Delete unnecessary internal lines. (See the diagram below toreview the new pattern piece with the fold out facing).




Fold In Tool

Allows the user to fold the patterns on a selected line in order to check

symmetric pieces.

• Select the Fold In icon.

• Highlight the segment(s) to fold in by clicking and dragging in aclockwise manner.

• The Move Point dialog box will appear in order to confirm theend of the segment.

• Click OK.




! !! ! Note: Use the Fold Out tool in order to unfold the piece

Flip Along

The Flip along tool is used to manipulate a pattern piece on the screen by

flipping it along a selected line segment.

To Use the Flip Along Tool:

• Click on the Flip Along tool.




• Click on the segment where the piece is to be flipped along.

• Click on the center of the piece.

Swap Segment

Allows the user to swap between internal segment and external segment.

• Select the Swap Segment tool.

• Click on the first point of the external segment.

• Click on the last point of the external segment.

•

Click on the first point of the internal segment.

• Click on the last point of the internal segment.

• The Swap Segments of Contours dialog box will appear. Selectthe desired information.

First Points Swap/Last Points Swap




Substitute – Switches the internal line with the external line.

Extrapolation – Keeps the internal line an internal, makes the external line an

internal, and draws external lines from their end points until the lines cross.

Choose Segments Dialog Box

The Choose Swap Segments dialog box allows the option to shorten orlengthen the selected line. Contour Segment is the external line. Segment to

Swap is the internal line.

• Select Choose Segments in the Swap Segments of Contoursdialog box.

• Under the Point section, choose which point to move.

• Click the Shift Point buttons in order to move the selection of

the line.

• Click OK.




The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar:

The Template Basic Shapes Toolbar is a default template toolbar that loads

with the software. Rectangles, triangles, polygons, and circles can be created

from this toolbar.

To Create a Piece from the Template Tool Bar:

• Select the desired piece from the Template Tool Bar.

• On the working screen, click and drag the mouse cursor to

expand the piece to the desired width and length.

• By holding down the Ctrl key while clicking and dragging, thesegment lengths will display on the working screen.

• By holding down the Shift key while clicking and dragging, thepiece will grow proportionally.

• After placing the piece on the working screen, place the cursoron the edge of the piece until it becomes a two-sided arrow.

• Click and drag the cursor to display the Scale Dialog box inorder to scale the piece to the appropriate size.

• Click OK.




The Template Toolbar:

Template Toolbar can be created from the template libraries to display those

pieces in the template file.

To Create a Piece from the Template Toolbar:

• Select the desired piece from the Template Tool Bar.

• On the working screen, click and drag the mouse cursor toexpand the piece to the desired width and length.

• By holding down the Ctrl key while clicking and dragging, thesegment lengths will display on the working screen.

• By holding down the Shift key while clicking and dragging, the

piece will grow proportionally.

• After placing the piece on the working screen, place the cursoron the edge of the piece until it becomes a two-sided arrow.

• Click and drag the cursor to display the Scale Dialog box inorder to scale the piece to the appropriate size.

• Click OK.



Chapter 3: File Menu 125

Chapter 3: File Menu

The commands available in the File Menu are used for bringing files into and

out of the PDS program. The File menu is also used to print, plot, and digitize.

To select one of the File menu commands, select the command in the pulldown menu and press the left mouse button, or use the shortcut listed in

parentheses next to the command in the pull down menu. Commands may also

be selected by using the corresponding tool icon displayed on the Standard

Tool Bar.

New (Ctrl+N):

The New command is used when creating a new style (DSN) file. A DSN filecontains all the patterns necessary to make one complete item. Pieces are

added to a style file by digitizing pieces, drafting from scratch, or merging and

editing pieces from existing style files. The number of pieces in a DSN file islimited only by the amount of memory available on the computer.

To Start a New File:

• From the File menu select New, press CTRL+N, or click on theNew icon from the toolbar. The Make Rectangle dialog box is

displayed.

• Enter the desired values for the length and width of the rectangle.

! !! ! Note: The Cancel button may be used to bypass the Make Rectangle dialog box.

• Click OK.




The new piece is displayed in the Piece Display Bar. The new DSN file is

“Untitled.” To save the file, choose the Save or Save As commands from theFile menu.

! !! ! Note: Only one DSN file can be opened at a time. The last 4 opened files

are displayed at the bottom of the File menu.

Open (Ctrl+O)

Use the Open command to open an existing style (DSN) file. A DSN file

contains all the pattern pieces necessary to make one complete item.

No more than one file may be opened at a time. If a DSN file is currently openand the Open command is chosen, the Save Current Changes dialog box is

displayed. Select Yes to save the changes and close the current file or select

No to close the file without saving any of the changes.

! !! ! Note: The last directory where style files have been saved becomes the default directory for the Open and Save commands.

To Open a File:

• From the File menu select Open, press CTRL+O or click on theOpen icon on the tool bar. The Open dialog box is displayed.

• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive and/or directory to findthe desired file.

• Select the desired file from the File List dialog box.

• Click OK.

! !! ! Tip: Double click on the file name to quickly open the file instead of using

the OK button.




Open Dialog Box:

File List and File Name Dialog Box

The File List field displays the DSN files that exist in the current drive and

directory. If there is more information than fits in the box, use the scroll bars

to scroll up and down the list. The File Name field remains empty until a file is

selected. Once a file is selected, the selected file is displayed in the File Namefield and if available a preview is displayed in the Preview field to the right.

! !! ! Note: You can also open OptiTex Modulate files (*. cus) directly from

OptiTex PDS open dialog box, just change the file type to *.cus!

Drive and Directory

To change to another directory, click on the arrow to the left of the Look In

field to display a list of the directories or click on the Up One Level icon tomove up one folder. If there is more information than what fits in the field, use

the scroll bars to scroll up and down the list.




Options

The Open button loads the selected file, whereas the Cancel button exits the

Open dialog box without loading a file. If running Windows for Workgroups,click on the Network button to display the Connect to Network Drive dialog

box.

Merge Style File

Use the Merge DSN File command to load an existing style file into the

current style file.

The merged style file receives all the size characteristics of the already open

style file. If the merged file does not have the same number of sizes or thesame size names as the open file, the merged file automatically takes on the

sizes and size names of the current DSN file (regardless of base size or other

parameters).

To Merge Files:

• From the File menu select Merge Style Files. The Open dialogbox is displayed.

• Select the desired file from the File List box.

• Click Open.

! !! ! Note: The number of pattern pieces in any Style file is limited only by the

amount of memory available on the computer.There are cases when the merged file creates strange grading on a single piece

in the working area. A dotted rectangle displays over the top of the piece witha small black dot. Simply reset the grading on the piece to zero (0) and begin

the grading process again.




To Reset the Grading on a Piece:

1. From the View menu select Grading Table.

2. Move the cursor to the top of the X column until the standard

select tool (arrow pointer) changes to a black downward arrow.

Now click the left mouse button to select the entire X column.

• From the Grading Menu select Zero X Grading. All values in theX column should now be zero. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Y

column, except select Zero Y Grading.

• Use the copy and paste commands in the grading table to changethe values on all grading points to zero 0.

• Re-grade the piece.

! !! ! Note: Grading commands are covered in detail in the Grading menu.

How to use the "Merge Style Files" dialog box:

The merge style files dialog enables the user to select the desired size listaccording to the current size list and the merges size list:




There are three options:

• Use Current Sizes List - Choose this option when you want usesthe current lists (the left column).

• Use Merge Sizes List - Choose this option when you want usesthe merge lists (the right column).

• Merge both Sizes List-Choose this option when you want to work with both size lists.

Base Size:

The base size is marked with "*" in both size list current and merge list, you

can't select a different base size (to change the base size use "Sizes" dialog inGrading menu).




Variation grading:

The "Delete variation grading" is enabled only if one of the style files (current

or the merge) has variation grading, only then can you choose to delete sizes:

History

The History command enables the user to save additional information witheach Style file. This information enables the user to follow up or to retrieve the

positioning of a file at a specific point of time. This allows the company to

create a History Log for each style and tracks the changes to a file according todates. Two options are offered. One enables the user to add text description

comments to the file, the second option enables the user to make a file

generation with the ‘Save Version’ command allowing the possibility in thefuture to retrieve the file layout at certain stages of the design process.




To Enable the History Command:

• Select History from the File menu and activate (check)Automatically Save History on Close.

• Click the Close button to leave the History dialog box.

• The Save History dialog will open on every Save command.Comment may be typed in addition to saving the file with all the

information as it is at the moment of the Save command.

To Save History:

• The History dialog box is displayed when a file is saved.

• The date and user name is automatically noted.




• Type comments in the comment field.

• OPTIONAL: Save graphic information by activating (checking)the Store Version field.

• Click OK.

At any point of time History may be selected from the File Menu to view any

comments attached to the file. Delete messages by clicking the Delete button.

! !! ! Note: If a specific layout is saved with the file, the size of the file is going

to be much larger and might cause a delay during File Open. Do

not save information that will not be used, or delete it before the final save.




File Finder

Find and Update command

This application finds style (DSN) files and pieces in OptiTex PDS. After

finding, the file can be opened or updated according to the style file.

In order to use the Find and Update application select the File Finder

command from the File menu.

! !! ! Note: The Find and Update application is also available in OptiTex Mark.

Find

After setting all search parameters, click on the Find button. The found itemswill display at the bottom of the dialog box. There are two items that can be

found – Style Files or Pieces in a Style File.

These two choices affect what will display in the list of found items at the

bottom of the dialog box. For example, a search for pieces with a name

beginning with “BA” with the selected item to find as Piece, will result in a listof all files containing pieces with a name beginning with “BA” . The same file

might be listed a few times, because it has several pieces beginning with a

matching name. If the item to find is a Style File, the file will display onlyonce even though it has several pieces with a matching name.

! !! ! Note: The file finder supports “Regular Expression” (*.*)




Find Tab:

The main function of the Find Tab is to look for Style (DSN) files according to

the OptiTex application it is launched from. When working from the PDS

application, it will manage Style Files and Pieces within the Style Files. While

looking for a style file in the PDS application, the Find dialog box enables theuser to input further search filters, such as Style name, Piece name, Material

type, Piece Description, etc.




! !! ! Note: Click on the small arrow with the mouse left click to open a drop list

of the previous fields names or use the mouse right button to open

utility box for editing the previous fields names list:

Search Options:

Style File

Type a file name to search for specific Style Files by file name.

Look in

This field defines the scope of the search to specific directories or subdirectories.

Show file name only

Once the Show File Name Only is checked, the finder will look only for

*.DSN file. Otherwise, when unchecked, the finder will look for pieces from*.DSN files.

! !! ! Note: Whenever this command is unchecked, “Replace Piece” and

“Delete Piece” in the Update property page will be enabled and vice

versa.

Look in sub folders

This option extends the search to sub folders.

Filters:

Piece Name filter

Use this option as a filter. Type the piece name to limit the search to files thatcontain a specific piece.




Piece Code filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a piece code to limit the search to files that

contain a specific piece code.

Piece Description filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a piece description to limit the search to files

that contain a specific piece description.

Material filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a material to limit the search to files thatcontain a specific material.

Style Name filter

Use this option as a filter. Type a Style Name to limit the search to a specificstyle name.

Match case

When this option is selected the program will find only files that match thecase of the characters in the piece name, style name, file name and material

exactly. Otherwise, the command will finds files with either uppercase or

lowercase characters that match the characters in the piece name, style filename and material strings.

Match whole word only

When this option is selected the program will find only files that match thespecified piece name, style name, file name and material with no extra

characters. Otherwise, the command matches any string, whether it is a

fragment of a larger string or not.




Options:

Find now

Click this button to activate the search process.

Open file

Click this button to open the selected files in the OptiTex PDS program.

Select All

Click this button to select all the files in the current file list.

Stop

Click this button to halt the search operation and return control to the user.

Maximize

Click this button to enlarge the Find & Update dialog box to maximum size.

Cancel

Click this button to quit Find and return to the host application.

! !! ! Note: All the parameters entered during the search are saved in the ini

file. This allows you to utilize existing data without having to retype the data.

Select Tab:

The Select Tab enables you to select and mark the chosen or current piece tocopy or replace in other files. It is also possible to click the Get Style File

button to access the file that is currently marked in the search list (It will be in

gray color). The piece names and pieces will be displayed. The Open button




will prompt the standard Open dialog to open a file in the host application

(PDS). The pieces names and pieces will display. The Open option enablesyou to open any file, even if it is not in the File list!




Options:

Get Style File

Click this button to load the selected style file from the file list. The selected

file will be the source file.

Open

Click this button to open a style file.

Update Tab

The Update tab is used in connection with the Select tab. Files may be

updated by adding pieces to a file, replacing a piece in a file, or updating an

existing piece in a file. Multiple files may be selected from the File list to beupdated.

To Add a Piece:

• First select the target files in the File list.

• Select a piece in the source file by using the Select Tab.

• Click on the Add Piece button.

• The piece from the source file is added to the target file or files inthe File list.

Repeat as above for Replace Piece and Delete Piece clicking on theappropriate buttons.

! Note: The Update tab can not be used until a source file has been chosen

using the Select Tab.




Add Piece

Click on this button to add the selected piece in the Select Tab to the currentstyle file, selected in the File list.




Replace Piece

Click on this button to replace the selected piece in the Select Tab to the

current style file, selected in the File list.

Delete Piece

Click on this button to delete the piece selected in the file selected in the File

list.

Report Tab

The Report Tab prepares a report describing the contents of one or more DSNin ASCII (text) format. This report can be imported into applications such as

Word, Excel, Lotus 1-2-3 and Access, for editing and/or printing.




Append File

When the Append File checkbox is selected, the report will be added to the

end of an existing report file, rather than create a new file.

Report File Name

This field is used to specify a new file name for the created report, or choose

an existing file name for appending the report.




Report to Data Base

Click this button to create a report from the currently selected style file and

then, save it under the specified file name.

Save

The Save command saves the file displayed on screen with the current filename in the specified drive and directory. To ensure that a file is saved with

the correct options, use the Save As command to save the file the first time.

The last directory where design files have been saved becomes the defaultdrive for the Open and Save commands.

! !! ! Note: The DSN extension is added to the file name automatically.

To Save a File:

• From the File menu choose Save or click the Save icon on the toolbar.

! !! ! Tip: It is a good habit to periodically save files while working. Use the

Save command or Ctrl + S every ten to twenty minutes to prevent

loss of data in the event that the computer improperly shuts downwhile working.




Save As

The Save As command is used to save a file for the first time to ensure the

current file name and paths are specified. Save As can also be used to save thecurrent file under a different name. For example, if a user wants to create a

new design based on an existing design, the existing design may be saved as adifferent name. The original design file still exists under its original name anda replica exists under a new name.

To Save As:

• From the File menu select Save As. The Save As dialog box isdisplayed.

• OPTIONAL: Select the desired drive and directory to save thefile.

• In the File Name field, type the name of the file.

! !! ! Note: The .DSN extension is automatically added to the file name. File names are limited to eight alphanumerical characters or less.

• Click SAVE.

If the name of the file already exists, a dialog box will ask to overwrite the file.Click Yes to overwrite, click No to enter a new name.

! !! ! Note: You now have the option to save the file in Version 7.3 format!




Save As Dialog Box:

! !! ! Note: You can save DSN files in OptiTex Modulate format (CUS

extension) by changing the saving files types to *.CUS

Save In

The Save In field lists the current drives and directories that may be selected.

To change to another directory, double click the first option (usually C:\) and alist of directories will display. If there is more information than what fits in the

current box, use the scroll bars to scroll up and down the list.

File Name and File List Box

The File Name box field remains empty until a file name is typed. The file

type will default to DSN unless a different file format has been selected. The

File List field displays the DSN files that exist in the current directory. If thereis more information than what fits in the current file list box, use the scroll

bars to scroll up and down the list.




Save As Type

This drop down field determines what types of files will display. This option

defaults to .dsn in PDS.

! !! ! Note: SGS software only opens DSN files. To open any other type of file,

the Merge or Import commands must be used.

Digitize

Digitizing is the process of using a digitizing tablet and cursor to enter a

handmade paper pattern into the computer. A digitizing tablet is an electronic

board. SGS software supports many different brands and sizes of digitizingtablets.

SGS software has drivers for several main digitizer formats on the market

today, including Summagraphic, Numonics, Calcomp, and GTCO.

There are 3 main steps to configuring Digitizers for use with the SGS

software: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring the serial port

communications through Windows, 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGSsoftware.

1. Configuring the Tablet

There are two main modes: ASCII mode and binary mode. Large scaledigitizers with 16-button cursor are in ASCII mode. Small digitizers, usually

with 4-button cursor, use BINARY mode.

The internal working units for the digitizer are defined as inches, which isusually set as Default by the manufacturer. The digitizing mode for alldigitizers is Point Mode.

Enable the <CR> and Line Feed. Digitizer should be set up in Remote mode.






Tips

It is recommended that SGS software users purchase a 16 button digitizing

cursor to speed the digitizing process.

SGS software uses its own internal digitizer drivers. Do not use the driversprovided by the digitizer manufacturers when using SGS software.

The windows program Terminal can be used to check that the comport anddigitizer are communicating. When using the terminal program, the digitizer

coordinates should display on the screen. The digitizer manufacturers usually

provide a program to check that the comport and digitizer are communicating.

Digitizer installation:

Make sure your digitizer is installed and turned on. SGS supplies the

installation software and driver for all digitizers it supports. Do not install

software, which comes with your digitizer!

Using the 40” X 60” Digitizing Tablet

This tablet sometimes requires additional configuration processes. Test to seeif the digitizer is working by opening the SGS digitizing screen in the PDS

program by selecting Digitize from the File menu. Try to digitize a basic

shape using the #1 and #2 button (see diagram below). Tape an 8.5 X 11”sheet of paper to the tablet for testing purposes. If nothing appears on the

digitizing screen on the computer while digitizing a basic shape, follow the

steps below.

! !! ! Note: Make sure the 16-button cursor is activated before attempting to

digitize. The cursor is active when the proximity light is yellow-

green at the top center of the tablet. If this light is red, place the

cursor on the tablet and press the #1 button. The red light should now be yellow-green.




The shape that you are attempting to digitize should appear on the digitizing

screen on the computer as you digitize each point.

• Insert the Numonics diskette into drive A:

• Type in A: and press <enter>.

• Type CD UTILITY and press <enter>.

• Type ASC COM1:9600,E,7,2 <enter>. *If the digitizer is pluggedinto COM2, use COM2 in place of COM1.

• Place the 16 button cursor on the digitizer tablet and press the #1key. The Proximity light at the top center of the tablet should turn

from red to yellow-green

• Touch any letter key on the keyboard.

• Move the 16-button cursor around on top of the tablet. Thecomputer screen should scroll a list of coordinates as the cursor

moves. If the coordinates appear on the computer screen, the

board should now work with SGS software.

• Exit the Numonics program. Use the backslash (\) key.

• Open the PDS program and open the digitizing screen. Try to

digitize a basic shape using the #1 and the #2 keys on the 16

button cursor.




• If the board still does not respond, repeat the section above“Configuring the Tablet.”

Attaching the Digitizer Panel:

The digitizer panel contains all the piece attributes and information found in

the Piece Info dialog box. Using the Digitizer panel eliminates the need toenter the relevant attributes and information into the Piece Info dialog box.

The user can customize the digitizer panel. See Edit Panel found in the

Digitizer Setup dialog box.

• Tape a print out of the Digitizer Panel onto the Digitizing Tablet.The digitizer panel can be printed using Edit Panel found in theDigitizer Setup dialog box.

• Select Digitize from the File menu. The digitizer dialog boxdisplays.

• Using the mouse, select Panel Pos from the digitizer dialog box.

• Place the digitizer cursor in the lower left-hand corner of the

digitizer panel and press button number 1.

• Place the digitizer cursor in the upper right hand corner of thedigitizer panel and press button number 1.

A gray rectangular area will display in the digitizer dialog box; this areaillustrates the panel position on the digitizer tablet.

Attaching the digitizer menu:

If the digitizer cursor has only four buttons, a digitizer menu may help if it isattached to the digitizer tablet. The digitizer menu enables the user to define

the location of various point types, notches, buttons, internal lines, etc. When

using a sixteen-button cursor, the digitizer menu is not needed.




• Make a rectangle with 11 equally sized rows. The rectangle(digitizer menu) should consist of the following 11 rows; Point,Grade, Notch, Button, Line, Circle, Grd/Crv, Ngrd/Crv, Dart,

Contour and Baseline.

•

Tape the newly created Digitizer Menu onto the Digitizing Tablet.

• Select Digitize from the File menu. The digitizer dialog box isdisplayed.

• Using the mouse, select Menu Pos from the digitizer dialog box.

• Place the digitizer cursor in the lower left-hand corner of the

digitizer menu and press button number 1.

• Place the digitizer cursor in the upper right hand corner of thedigitizer menu and press button number 1.

A gray rectangular area will display in the digitizer dialog box; this areaillustrates the menu position on the digitizer tablet.

Preparing patterns for digitizing:

Before digitizing a pattern, mark or note the following items on the patternpieces.

• Grade points and/or grade rule numbers. This is only necessary if the patterns are going to be graded.

• Baseline or Grainline. The baseline is used to determine how thepiece is positioned on the screen.

• Notches. Not all the patterns have notches.

• Button or drill holes. Not all the patterns have drill holes




• Internal lines and internal elements. Not all the patterns haveinternal lines or elements.

• Darts. Not all the patterns have darts. The dart should be markedwith 4 points. Three of the four points are on the boundary line,

the beginning, end, and middle of the dart. The fourth point is theapex or depth of the dart.

• Any Piece Information that the user would like to enter using thedigitizer panel, for example piece name, piece description,

quantity, and flip restrictions.

To Digitize:

• OPTIONAL: Display the grading table. The base size in thegrading table should be the size of the piece being digitized.

! !! ! Note: If the size is not defined in the grading table, the SGS software defaults to the size name base. The size name can be changed to

another name some other time.

• Attach the prepared pattern onto the digitizer tablet using drafting

tape. Pattern pieces can be taped to the digitizer tablet in any

direction, or even on top of each other. The baselineautomatically straightens the piece when displayed on the screen.

! !! ! Note: Drafting Tape is easier to remove from the digitizing tablet and

paper patterns. Rather than using tape, some users prefer to use a

big sheet of clear vinyl or plastic to hold pieces in place.

• From the File menu select Digitize to display Digitizer dialogbox. The digitizer dialog box is divided into three sections. Theleft section contains digitizer commands used with a four-button

digitizer. The right section is a scaled down view of the digitizing

tablet. The bottom section assigns a number to each button on the




digitizer cursor.

• Digitize the piece perimeter in the clockwise direction usingcorrect cursor buttons to achieve the shape desired. Always close

the perimeter by using button number 2 on the digitizer cursor.SGS recommends the user always begin digitizing at the bottom

left hand corner of each piece. The first point digitized will be

assigned point #1 but can be changed in the system later.

• After the piece boundary has been digitized and closed, thefollowing elements can be digitized in any order.

Baseline:

The Baseline or Grainline must be digitized after the piece perimeter. If nobaseline is digitized, the software automatically creates one that is parallel to

the lower edge of the digitizing tablet.

Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each end of the baseline and select

B.

Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over baseline in the piece menu and

select number 1(or using the mouse select baseline from the digitizer dialogbox).

! !! ! Note: You can use “Base line as last digitized line” command from

Digitizer Status dialog box.

Notches:

Notches can be digitized while digitizing the piece boundary, or after

boundary has been completed.




Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each of the notches and select

number 5. The system will place the default type notch on this point. Notchtype can be changed in the digitizer dialog box.

Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over notch in the piece menu and select

number 1(or using the mouse to select the notch from the digitizer dialog box

and define the type of notch to be digitized).

Drill Holes:

Buttons or drill holes must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed.

Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each of buttons and select number

7.

Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over each of the buttons and select

number 1(or using the mouse to select button from the digitizer dialog box).

Internal Lines:

Internal 2 point lines must be digitized after the piece boundary is complete.

Using a 16-button cursor: Place cursor over each end of the internal lines and

select number 6.

Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over line in the piece menu and selectnumber 1(or using the mouse select line from the digitizer dialog box).

Internal Contours:

Internal contours must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed.Using a 16-button cursor: Select button F. Place the cursor over each point of

the internal line and select a point (1,3,9,0). Select button F again to finish the

Internal Contour.




Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over contour in the piece menu and

select number 1(or using the mouse to select contour from the digitizer dialogbox).

Circles:

Internal Circles must be digitized after the piece boundary is completed. Usinga 16-button cursor: Place cursor over the center of the internal circle and select

number 8 then place the cursor over the edge of the internal circle and selectnumber 8.

Using a 4-button cursor: Place cursor over the center of the internal circle andselect number 1, place the cursor over the edge of the internal circle and select

button number 1(or using the mouse select circle from the digitize dialog box).

Darts:

Darts are partially digitized while completing the piece boundary by enteringthe beginning, end, and middle points of the dart as non-curve points.

Using a 16-button cursor: Place the cursor over the beginning point of the dart

on the piece boundary and press the button D

Using a 4-button cursor: Place the cursor over the apex and press on button D.Place the cursor over dart in the piece menu and select button number 1(or

using the mouse select dart from the digitizer dialog box). Place the cursor

over the apex and press the button number 1.

OPTIONAL: Piece Information maybe entered at this point if panel is being

used on digitizer. All the commands on the panel are selected with number 1;information is entered with number 1 and closed with number 1 on the

digitizing cursor.

• Begin digitizing a new piece or stop digitizing. To stopdigitizing, use the mouse to select Done in the Digitize dialog




box. To begin digitizing a new piece, refer to step number 4.

! !! ! Note: The piece contour must be closed before selecting Done in the

digitizer dialog box. If the piece is not closed, it will not be saved

with the file.

To Digitize pieces with Grade rules:

When the rule number to be applied to a grading point is known at the time of

digitizing it is very simple to apply it while digitizing. The rule number can

also be applied using the SGS grading software at a later time.

! !! ! Note: The rules are applied relative to the baseline, therefore it is

extremely important that the baseline is digitized accurately.

• Open the grade rule library to be used.

• Load the sizes.

• Using a 16-button cursor: Digitize the piece as regular. Whendigitizing a point with a grade rule number, use button number 1to create a graded turn point or use button 0 to create a graded




curve point. Use button E to enter the grade rule number/name

using the letters and numbers on the digitizer panel then press Ato hear a confirmation beep. If the same rule is applied several

times in a row, press A and the last rule in memory will be

applied.

• Using a 4-button cursor: Digitize the piece as regular. Whendigitizing a point with a grade rule number, use button number 1to create a graded turn point or use the digitizer menu to create a

graded curve point. Select the Rule Name command on the

digitizer panel; enter the grade rule number/name using the lettersand numbers on the digitizer panel. Then select the Apply Rule

command on the digitizer panel. Select the Apply Rule command

on the digitizer panel and the last rule in memory will be applied.

Applying Grading rules using the panel:

Using a panel, there is an option to apply grading for each point whiledigitizing.

Follow these steps:

• From View menu select Grading Library.

• Click the right mouse button and select the Rules or use the OpenRule library icon on the Grading Library dialog box.

• Select the required library. It is vital to have the Grading Rule

Library open while digitizing and applying its rules.




• A dialog box may display “The file sizes list does not match therules library list”

• Click OK

• To load those sizes select “Load sizes” option from the Gradingmenu.

• OPTIONAL: From Grading menu select the “Sizes” option anddefine new sizes and colors.

• Choose the grading rule from the Panel and then choose Apply

Rule on the Panel. Grading with the digitizer panel is done afterthe panel is created by the user and attached to the digitizer.

! !! ! Note: To apply the grading rules, the panel must contain the exact rule names as they are written in the library and the commands “Apply Rule” and “Rule Name”.




To Digitize oversized pieces:

When the paper patterns are too big to fit on the digitizer tablet, follow these

steps.

•Break the large piece up into several smaller pieces by drawingtemporary “cut” lines on the large paper piece.

• Extend the base (grain) line on the large paper piece, so that thebaseline extends past the entire temporary “cut lines”.

• Tape the large paper pattern to the digitizer tablet. Digitize thefirst “temporary” piece.

! !! ! Note: Be sure to digitize the Baseline on the “temporary” piece.

• Move the large paper pattern and digitize the next “temporary”

piece.

• When all of the “temporary” pieces have be digitized, use the Join

tool in the SGS Pattern Design Software (PDS) to paste the“temporary” pieces together.

To Digitize a graded nest:

If the paper patterns are graded, but the growth values are not known, it can be

very helpful to digitize the graded nest. Digitizing the graded nest allows the

SGS software to automatically calculate the growth values.

• Stack the paper patterns on top of on another and tape them to thedigitizing tablet.

• Display the Grading Table and load the sizes to be digitized.

! !! ! Note: Only the sizes taped to the digitizer tablet can be displayed in the




Grading Table. The Base size digitized must be the base size in the

grading table.

• Using a 16-button cursor: Digitize the base size piece as normal.When digitizing a boundary point on the base size that grades, usebutton number 1on base size to create a graded turn point or use

button 0 to create a graded curve point. Than place the cursor on

the corresponding point of the smallest size and press buttonnumber 4, place the cursor on the corresponding point of the

second smallest size and press button number 4, continue pressing

button number 4 on the corresponding points from the smallest tolargest size.

! !! ! Note: Digitizing a graded nest may not be done with a 4 -button cursor.

Digitizing a pattern using a 16 button cursor:

The attributes for each of the 16 -buttons are described in the Digitizing dialogbox.

1 = Grading point on a line. Start to digitize with this point.

2 = Close Perimeter automatically from the last digitized point to first one.

3 = Curve point (Simple and not Graded).

4 = Graded. Assign the last Grading rule to the currently selected point.

5 = Notch. Digitize a Notch once the perimeter is closed.

6 = Line. Digitize two points.

7 = Button (or any other sign). Click in the desired place.

8 = Circle. Center and radius




9 = Non grading point on a line.

0 = Grading point on a Curve.

A = apply previously entered rule number

B = Base Line (Grain Line). Digitize from left to right (clockwise).

C = Undo

D = Dart. Used if the dart points already exist on the perimeter line.

E = Rule. It is also possible to enter a rule from the Digitizer keypad.

F = Contour - internal with multiple points.

Digitizing a pattern using a 4 -button cursor:

The attributes for each of the 4 buttons are described in the Digitizing dialog

box.

Each button on the 4-button cursor has a unique color. They are arranged likethis.

Yellow

White Green

Blue

• Yellow is button #1; it is used to create graded turn points. (nonecurve)

• White is button #2, it is used to close a contour.




• Blue is button #3; it is used to create non-grading curve points.

• Green is button #4; it is used to UNDO.

Additional commands for the 4 Button digitizer are displayed along the left

side of the Digitizer dialog box. The additional commands can be chosen using

the mouse in the dialog box or by using button number 1 and the digitizermenu.

Digitizer Setup

The Digitizer Setup command is used to define the brand and size of digitizertablet to be used and to edit the digitizer panel.

Digitizer Panel:

The digitizer panel contains all the piece attributes and information found in

the Piece Info dialog box. Using the Digitizer panel while digitizing eliminatesthe need to enter the relevant attributes and information into the Piece Infodialog box.




Customizing the Digitizer Panel:

The user can define the look of the panel, the number of rows and columns,

the location of each command, and the text strings.

• Select Digitizer Setup from the File Menu.

• Select Edit Panel from the Select Digitizer Setup dialog box.

• Select Load Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Paneldialog box.

• Load the panel you wish to edit.




! !! ! Note: The panel has two types of boxes, Control and String. String type

boxes contain only text, letters and numbers. Control type boxes are

commands that active different area of the software. For example

the Piece Name control box lets the software know that theinformation that is about to be entered is the Piece Name.

• To edit the control type boxes, double click on the control box.The Control Type dialog box will be displayed. Choose the type

of command you will like the control box to represent. An

explanation of what each control command does is found underDigitize in this Chapter.

• To edit the string type boxes click in the string box and type theinformation of your choice.

! !! ! Tip: To change the box from a control box to a sting box or visa versa,

select the box to be changed and select Control Type or String Type

from the Type menu.• Once all of the edits have been made, select Save Panel or Save

Panel As in the File Menu.

Printing the Digitizer Panel:

After customizing the digitizer panel, a copy of the digitizer panel must be

attached to the digitizer tablet.

• Select Digitizer Setup from the File menu.

•Select Edit Panel from the Select Digitizer dialog box.

• Select Load Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Paneldialog box.

• Load the panel of your choice.




• Select Print Panel from the File menu in the Digitizer Panel dialogbox. The Digitizer Panel Size dialog box will display.

• When working with inches, in the X enter 10, in the Y enter 8,and select OK. The Print dialog box will display.

! !! ! Note: In the Options menu of the SGS software, the printer fonts must be set to 6.

• Print in Landscape, not Portrait. Select OK, to begin Printing.

• OPTIONAL: Rather than follow the above instructions, press theAlt+Print keys on the keyboard, open Microsoft Word and Paste.Resize and position the panel the way you want it with in MS

Word and print.

Instructions for Attaching the Digitizer Panel are found under Digitize in this

Chapter.

OptiTex Panel commands:

This is the description of all the digitizer commands that belong to “OptiTexPanel”. The digitizer commands come with OptiTex installation (the default

panel directory is: C:\OptiTex7\digpanel7.pnl).

In a case you have 4-buttons digitizer cursor, it’s recommend to create/defined

on your digitizer board menu position (see on the SGS help digitizer setup

section “attaching the digitizer panel”).




Command: How to use the

command:

Remarks:

Piece

Name

After you finish digitizing

a piece, select “Piece

Name” command withkey number 1 on thedigitizer cursor, then

select the desirable name

by using the panel letters(select the desirable

letters and click on key

number 1).

After you select the piecename, click again on

“piece name” command!

Don’t forget to click again on the

piece name command to insert

the selected piece name!

Quantity After you finish todigitize a piece, select

“Quantity” command

with key number 1 on thedigitizer cursor, then

select the desirable

name/number by usingthe panel letters (select

the desirable letters and

click on key number 1).

After you select the piece

quantity, click again on“Quantity” command!

Don’t forget to click again on thequantity command to insert the

selected quantity!

Material After you finish to Don’t forget to click again on the




Type digitize a piece, select

“Material Type”

command with keynumber 1 on the digitizer

cursor, then select the

desirable name/numberby using the panel letters

(select the desirable

letters and click on keynumber 1). After you

select the piece material

type, click again on“Material Type”

command!

Material Type command to insert

the selected Material Type!

Piece

Description

After you finish to

digitize a piece, select

“piece description”


cursor, then select the

desirable name by usingthe panel letters (select

the desirable letters and

click on key number 1).

After you select the piecedescription, click again

on “piece description”command!


piece description command to

insert the selected piece

description!

Buffer After you finish to


“Buffer” command with


buffer command to insert the




key number 1 on the

digitizer cursor, then

select the desirable buffervalue by using the panel

letters (select the

desirable letters and click on key number 1).


buffer, click again on

“buffer” command!

selected buffer!

Piece Code After you finish to


“Piece Code” commandwith key number 1 on the


select the desirable piececode by using the panel

letters (select the

desirable letter and click on key number 1).


code, click again on

“piece code” command!


piece code command to insert the

selected piece code!

Style

Name

After you finish to

digitize a piece, select“Style Name” commandwith key number 1 on the


select the desirable stylename by using the panel


style name command to insert theselected style name!




letters (select the

desirable letters and click

on key number 1).

After you select the stylename, click again on

“Style Name” command!

Rotate Any

Way

After you finish to


“Rotate Any Way”command Click on

“Rotate Any Way”

command with key

number 1 on the digitizercursor if you want that,

the piece rotation will be

any way!

There is no need to click twice

on the rotate any way command!

Rotate

None

After you finish to

digitize a piece, select“Rotate None” command

Click on “Rotate None”


cursor if you want that,


none!


on the rotate none command!

Rotate 4

Way

After you finish to

digitize a piece, select“Rotate 4 Way”

command Click on

“Rotate 4 way” command


on the rotate 4 way command!




with key number 1 on the

digitizer cursor if you

want that, the piecerotation will be 4 way!

Rotate 2Way After you finish todigitize a piece, select

“Rotate 2 Way”

command Click on“Rotate 2 Way”

command with key

number 1 on the digitizercursor if you want that,


2 way!

There is no need to click twiceon the rotate 2 way command!

Internal

Contour

Select the “Internal

Contour” command to

change to internal mode.

To change to internalmode click on the

“Internal Contour”

command with keynumber 1.

For exit from the internalmode click again!

Also F key on the digitizer cursor

is change to internal mode!

PieceOrient.

Right

Select the “Piece Orient.Right” command to

create to digitize piece

orientation to the right.

There is no need to click twiceon the Piece Orient. Right

command!




To create piece

orientation to the right,

click on the “PieceOrient. Right” command

with key number 1.

PieceOrient.

Left

Select the “Piece Orient.Left” command to create

to digitize piece

orientation to the left.

To create pieceorientation to the left,

click on the “Piece

Orient. Left” commandwith key number 1.

There is no need to click twiceon the Piece Orient. Left

command!

Piece

Orient.None

Select the “Piece Orient.

None” command to createto digitize piece

orientation to the None.

To create piece

orientation to the None,click on the “Piece

Orient. Left” command

with key number 1.


on the Piece Orient. Nonecommand!

Use one Select the “Use one”

command if you want to

cancel “Use Both”orientation for the digitize

piece.

Use this command if you already

apply the “use both” command

and you want to cancel her.




Use Both Select the “Use Both”

command to create to

digitize piece orientationof Both.

To create pieceorientation to the Both,

click on the “Use Both”

command with keynumber 1 on your

digitizer cursor.


on the “Use Both” command!

Notch by 2

points

Select this command to

create notch with angle.

Click on the “Notch by 2

points” with key number1 on the digitizer cursorto select the command.

Then click twice, first

click on the segment (in

the desirable location)and the second click,

click on the piece to mark

the notch angle!

To go back to point position

(normal digitize position), click

on key number 0 on yourdigitizer cursor! Then you will be

able to continue digitize a newpiece.

T – Notch Select this command to

create T notch.

Click on the “T – Notch”


If you have digitizer cursor with

4 buttons only, select the notch

command from the digitizermenu!




digitizer cursor to select

the command.

Then use key number 5

on your digitizer cursor toadd a notch in the

desirable location!

You can also create menu

position on your digitizer! This

way you will be able to selectnotch command on your digitizer

board.

V – Notch Select this command to

create V notch.

Click on the “V – Notch”


digitizer cursor to selectthe command.


on your digitizer cursor toadd a notch in thedesirable location!

-“-

U – Notch Select this command to

create U notch.

Click on the “U – Notch”with key number 1 on the


the command.


on your digitizer cursor toadd a notch in the

desirable location!

-“-




I - Notch Select this command

to create I notch.

Click on the “I – Notch”


digitizer cursor to selectthe command.


on your digitizer cursor to

add a notch in thedesirable location!

-“-

L – Notch Select this commandto create L notch.

Click on the “L – Notch”with key number 1 on the


the command.

Then use key number 5on your digitizer cursor to

add a notch in the

desirable location!

-“-

Flip

Allowed


create “Flip Allowed” in

Piece Information”dialog.

Click on the “Flip

Allowed” command with

key number 1 on your

You don’t need to click twice on

Flip Allowed command!





this command.

Flip Non

Allowed


cancel “Flip Allowed”

command.

Click on “Flip NonAllowed” with fey

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor to cancelflip allowed.

“Undo” command (C key on the

cursor) in the digitizer dialog

doesn’t cancel commands, onlypoints (point keys number 1, 3, 0

and 9).

Mirror Select this command to

create a mirror to thedigitize piece.

Click on “Mirror”command with key

number 1 on yourdigitizer cursor to select

this command.

The mirror line will be

between the last point and

first point!

You will not see the mirror

command in the digitizer dialog!

Notch –

Prop


create attribute of proportional point in

notch dialog.

Click on the “Notch

Prop” command and then

When you select the notch prop

command, you are changing thenotch default!

This mean that all the nextnotches that you will add will

have “proportional” attribute!




use key number 5 on your

digitizer cursor to add a

notch with the desirableattribute.

Notch –Prev Select this command tocreate attribute of

previous point in notch

dialog.

Click on the “NotchPrev” command and then


digitizer cursor to add a

notch.

When you select the Notch Prevcommand, you are changing the

notch default!

This mean that all the next

notches that you will add willhave “previous” attribute!

Notch –

Next


create attribute of nextpoint in notch dialog.

Click on the “Notch

Next” command and then


digitizer cursor to add anotch.

When you select the notch next

command, you are changing thenotch default!

This mean that all the next

notches that you will add will

have “next” attribute!

Cut Select this command tocreate cut attribute for

internal contour.

Click (before you start

digitize internal contour)on “Cut” command with


When you change the default of internal mode, it will be stay in

the last mode until you willchange the mode again.




digitizer cursor. Then

change to internal mode

with F key or “Internalcontour” commands on

the digitizer panel and

creates the desirableinternal.

Draw Select this command tocreate draw attribute for

internal contour.

Click (before you start

digitize internal contour)

on “Draw” commandwith key number 1 on

your digitizer cursor.

Then change to internalmode with F key or

“Internal contour”

commands on thedigitizer panel and creates

the desirable internal.

-“-

Sew Select this command to

create sews attribute for

internal contour.

Click (before you startdigitize internal contour)on “Sew” command with


digitizer cursor. Thenchange to internal mode

-“-




with F key or “Internal

contour” commands on

the digitizer panel andcreates the desirable

internal.

Quality Select this command to

create quality attribute for

internal contour.

Click (before you startdigitize internal contour)

on “Quality” command

with key number 1 on

your digitizer cursor.Then change to internal

mode with F key or

“Internal contour”commands on the

digitizer panel and creates

the desirable internal.

-“-

Apply

Rule


apply grading rule toselected point.

If you already selectgrading rule (see “Rule

Name” command), afteryou digitize a point, click on “Apply Rule”

command with key

number 1 on your

Don’t forget to load Grading

library before you start digitize!




digitizer cursor.

Rule name Select this commandwhen you want to apply

certain grading rule to

point!

After you finish todigitize a point (after you

create a point), click on

“Rule name” command,then select the rule name

from the panel letters and

click again on “Rule

name” command to saveto rule name.

1. Don’t forget to load Gradinglibrary before you start digitize!

2. Don’t forget to click again on

“Rule name” command after you

select the rule name.

3. After you select rule name, the

rule will automatically apply toselect point.

4. If you want to use the same

rule on different point, you can

select the new point and use“Apply Rule”.

Drill Select this commandwhen you went to create a

button with drill

command.

Click on “Drill”

(command before youcreate the button) with


digitizer cursor, then adda button in a desirable

location with key number

7 on your digitizer cursor(16 buttons cursor).




Aux Drill Select this command

when you went to create a

button with Aux Drillcommand.

Click on “Aux Drill”(command before you

create the button) with

key number 1 on yourdigitizer cursor, then add

a button in a desirable

location with key number7 on your digitizer cursor

(16 buttons cursor).

Punch Select this command

when you went to create anotch with punch

command.

Click on “Punch”(command before you

create the button) with

key number 1 on yourdigitizer cursor, then add

a notch in a desirable



NoneMode

Select this commandwhen you went to create a

notch or button with none




mode command.

Click on “None Mode”

(command before you

create the notch/button)with key number 1 on

your digitizer cursor, then

add a notch/button in adesirable location with


digitizer cursor (16buttons cursor).

Before Cut Select this command

when you went to create anotch, circle, button or

internal contour with

plotting/cutting time thatis before the external

contour.

Click on “Before Cut”

(command before youcreate the notch, button,

circle or internal contour)

with key number 1 on

your digitizer cursor, thenadd the desirable element

in the desirable locationwith the relevant keynumber on your digitizer

cursor (16 buttons

cursor).




In Cut

Time

Select this command

when you went to create a

notch that theplotting/cutting time is

together with the external

contour.

Click on “In Cut Time”

(command before youcreate the notch) with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor, then addthe notch in the desirable



This command is enable only if

the notch that you add is I notch

with Punch command! If youselect “In Cut Time” command

but your notch or the command

is not correct (I notch and punchcommand), the plotting/cutting

time will be before the external

contour!

After Cut Select this command

when you went to create anotch, circle, button or

internal contour with

plotting/cutting time thatis after the external

contour.

Click on “After Cut”

(command before you

create the notch, button,circle or internal contour)

with key number 1 onyour digitizer cursor, then

add the desirable element

in the desirable location




with the relevant key

number on your digitizer

cursor (16 buttonscursor).

DefaultMode Select this commandwhen you want go back to

the default mode of all

internal elements.

Click on “Default Mode”command with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor.

You can set notch defaults inoption menu preferences dialog,

for all the other internal

elements, circle, button, dart andinternal contour the default will

be the last mode!

Default

Time

Select this command

when you want go back to

the default time of allinternal elements.

Click on “Default time”

command with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor.

You can set notch defaults in

option menu preferences dialog,

for all the other internalelements, circle, button, dart and

internal contour the default time

will be the last plotting/cuttingtime!

Max Tilt Select this command

when you want to create atilt angle to your digitize

piece.

Click on the “Max Tilt”

command with keynumber 1 on your


Don’t forget to click again on

max tilt command after youselect the tilt value.




select the tilt angle value

with the panel number

and click again on “MaxTilt” command to save

and apply the tilt.

Flip non -

Allowed

After you finished

digitizing the piece, select

“Flip non – Allowed”command by clicking on

“Flip non – Allowed” cell

with key number 1 on thedigitizer cursor in order

give your digitized piece

“None” Flip Allowedattribute.

There is no need to click twice on

the “Flip non – Allowed” cell.

Flip X –

Allowed

After you finished

digitizing the piece, select

“Flip X – Allowed”command by clicking on

“Flip X – Allowed” cell

with key number 1 on thedigitizer cursor in order


“X Flip” Flip Allowedattribute.


the “Flip X – Allowed” cell.

Vice SideFlipped X

After you finisheddigitizing the piece, select“Vice Side Flipped X”

command by clicking on

“Vice Side Flipped X” cellwith key number 1 on the

There is no need to click twice onthe “Vice Side Flipped X” cell.




digitizer cursor in order


“Left/Right” OppositePiece attribute.

Vice Side

non Flipped

After you finished

digitizing the piece, select“Vice Side non Flipped”

command by clicking on

“Vice Side non Flipped”

cell with key number 1 onthe digitizer cursor in

order give your digitized

piece “None” OppositePiece attribute.


the “Vice Side non Flipped” cell.

Notch

Width

Select this command to set

your digitized notch width.

Click on “Notch Width”cell with key number 1 on


Now click on key number

5 on your digitizer cursor

to create notch on thedigitized piece.

NotchAngle

Select this command to setyour digitized notch width.

Click on “Notch Angle”cell with key number 1 on





Now click on key number5 on your digitizer cursor

to create notch on the

digitized piece.

ButtonRadius

Select this command to setyour digitized button

radius.

1. Click on “ButtonRadius” cell with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor.

2. Select the button

radius from the

digitizer penal buyclicking on desirable

numbers cells.

3. Click again on

“Button Radius” cellcommand.

Now use key number 7 to

add a button to your

digitized piece.

DartDistance

Select this command to setyour digitized dart

distance.

1. Click on “Dart

Distance” cell with






1. Click on “AuxDrillmode” cell with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor.

Now use D key to add aDart to your digitized

piece.

Dart CutMode

Select this command tochange your dart drill

mode to “Cut mode”.

1. Click on “Cart Cut

Mode” cell with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor.

Now use D key to add a

Dart to your digitized

piece.

Dart Draw

Mode


change your dart drill

mode to “Draw mode”.

1. Click on “Dart Draw

Mode” cell with key

number 1 on yourdigitizer cursor.

Now use D key to add a

Dart to your digitized




piece.

Vice Side

Flipped Y


your digitized pieceattribute to be “Left/Right”

attributed under Opposite

Piece filed in OptiTexpiece info dialog box.

1. Click on “Vic SideFlipped Y” cell with key

number 1 on your

digitizer cursor after youfinish digitized piece.

Flip Y

Allowed


your digitized piece

attribute to be “Y Flip”attributed under Flip

Allowance filed inOptiTex piece info dialog

box.

1. Click on “Flip Y

Allowed” cell with key

number 1 on your digitizercursor after you finish

digitized piece.

Buffer TypeAround

Select this command to setyour digitized piece buffer

attribute to be “Around”

type under Buffer Typefiled in OptiTex piece info




dialog box.

1. Click on “Buffer Type

Around” cell with key

number 1 on your digitizer

cursor after you finishdigitized piece.

Buffer Type

Up


your digitized piece bufferattribute to be “Up” type

under Buffer Type filed in

OptiTex piece info dialogbox.


Up” cell with key number

1 on your digitizer cursorafter you finish digitized

piece.

Buffer Type

Down


your digitized piece bufferattribute to be “Down”

type under Buffer Type

filed in OptiTex piece infodialog box.

1. Click on “Buffer TypeDown” cell with key

number 1 on your digitizercursor after you finish

digitized piece.




Buffer TypeLeft


attribute to be “Left” type

under Buffer Type filed inOptiTex piece info dialog

box.


Left” cell with key number

1 on your digitizer cursorafter you finish digitized

piece.

Buffer TypeRight


attribute to be “Right” type

under Buffer Type filed inOptiTex piece info dialog

box.


Right” cell with keynumber 1 on your digitizer

cursor after you finish

digitized piece.

Point Name

Enter

Use this command to load

a point name.

1. Click on “Point Name

Enter” cell with key

number 1 on yourdigitizer cursor after

you finish digitised

Only after you load a point name

into the digitizer panel, “Set point

Name” command is available.




piece.

2. Now select the point

name by clicking on

the name letters cells

with digitizer cursor.

3. Click again on “PointName Enter” cell.

Set Point

Name

Use this command to

implement point name todigitised point.

1. After you finish

digitised a point, click

on “Set Point Name”

cell with the digitizercursor (key number 1).

This command is available only

after you load a point name with“Point Name Enter” command!




Digitizer Dialog Box:

Digitizer Type

This field lists the type of digitizer tablet being used.




Panel

This field displays the panel currently being used. The panel taped to the

digitizer must be the same panel that is defined here. See above forinstructions on printing the Digitizer Panel.

Edit Panel

Click on this button to edit existing digitizer panels and to make new panels.See above for instructions on editing the digitizer panel.

Browse

Click on Browse to find and define the digitizer panel you wish to use.

Communication Port

Defines which communication port the digitizer is plugged into. Thecommunication port must also be set up for the defined digitizer type.

Working Units

Defines the working units.

Resolution

Defines the resolution.

16 Buttons Cursor

Enable 16 buttons cursor when using it. Disable 16 buttons cursor when using

a 4 buttons cursor.

Tablet Size

Width:




Defines the width of the digitizer tablet.

Height:

Defines the height of the digitizer tablet.

Shift Digitizer 0/0 point

Defines the 0/0 point on the digitizer.

Digitizer Communication Setup

Defines the specific communication parameters for your digitizer.

! Note: Digitizer installation Instructions of the supported devices can be

found in the output device installation chapter latter in this book.




Export to CAD/CAM files

The Export CAD/CAM files command converts SGS files to any other graphic

formats listed in the dialog box.

Use the Layers table to define which items should be exported to which layer.The exported file is created using the working units defined in the Options

Menu.

To Export Files:

• From the File Menu select Export to CAD/CAM files... TheExport to CAD/CAM File dialog box is displayed.

! Note: Export individual sizes by selecting them with an “X” in the

Grading Table dialog box prior to choosing this command.

• Type in the name of the file to be exported.

• Click Browse to select the drive and directory where the file is tobe exported.

• Select the desired file format.

! Note: SGS software recognizes only the basic attributes of the different

ASCII geometry standards for each file format. Situations may arise

where the saved file does not appear exactly as it did in the original

application. The same limitation exists with the Import CAD/CAM

files command. If the file is not importable, use Import setup and change the parameters accordingly.

• OPTIONAL: Select any other options or set the scale size.

• Click OK.




Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box:

File name

Type a name for the file to be exported.

Browse

Click on the Browse button to display the dialog box to change drives and

directories.

Formats:

This area is used to define the type of file to be created. Choose from:

DXF is an AutoDesk/AutoCAD ASCII file format.

ANSI/AAMA the American Apparel Manufacturing Association formats is

based on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all

large CAD/CAM manufacturers.

IGES is the Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.




CADL is a CADKEYO ASCII file format.

NST is the cncKad ASCII file format.

Contours

This area is used to define the contours that will be exported (only if theexported piece has a seam). User can choose which of piece contours (sewing

or cutting) will be exported. The default setting is both sewing & cuttingcontours.

Layers Table…

Select this button to view the Layers dialog box. This box is used to define the

layers for each element of the file to be exported.

Layers Table Dialog Box:




Dictionary Dialog Box:

Piece Name

Defines how the export file refers to the piece name.

Piece Code

Defines how the export file refers to the piece code.

Annotation

Defines how the export file refers to the annotation.

Size Name

Defines how the export file refers to the size name.




Base Size Mark

Defines how the export file refers to the base size.

Material Code

Defines how the export file refers to a defined material group.

Quantity

Defines how the export file refers to the quantity.

Best Quality

Defines how the export file illustrates that the following defines the bestquality.

Orientation

Defines how the export file refers to the orientation.

Restore Defaults

Restores the default dictionary names for each item.

Import from CAD/CAM Files

The Import CAD/CAM command is an optional module of software that isactivated within SGS software packages when the Import Module is

purchased.

The Import Module converts any ASCII geometry file format from the list of

recognized formats to the SGS file format. The new file is loaded directly onto

the screen. Files from any directory or disk may be chosen as long as it is aformat recognized by the Import module.




! Note: AutoCAD files can be imported into SGS software regardless if

pieces were originally drawn clockwise or counter clockwise

To Set up the Import Options:

• From the File Menu choose Import CAD/CAM files... The ImportCAD/CAM files dialog box is displayed.

• Select the type of file to Import by checking the appropriate fileformat under the File Format field.

• Click Browse, and a second Import CAD/CAM File dialog box isdisplayed.

• Select the desired file(s) to import.

! Tip: To select multiple files, hold down the shift key and click on the

desired files.

• Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box is displayed

again.

• Select the desired Import options.

• Click on Setup. The Import Setup dialog box will be displayed.

• Select the options and enter the desired values.

•

Click OK. The Import CAD/CAM Files dialog box will bedisplayed again.

• Click OK. The selected files are imported with the desired valuesand options implemented.




Import CAD files Dialog Box:

CAD Files to Import

This field will list the file to be imported. Click on the Browse button to select

the file or files to be imported.

Working Units

Select the desired working units: mm, cm, m, inches, feet, or yards. SGS

software uses the selected working units while converting files from one

format to another. If the units are not correctly defined, the pieces are importedas the wrong size and the command will have to be repeated.




File Format

Choose the type of file to be imported. Following are the different importable

file formats:

DXF - AutoDesk/AutoCAD ™ ASCII file format.

AAMA - The American Apparel Manufacturing Association format is based

on the AutoCAD DXF file format. It was confirmed and agreed by all largeCAD/CAM manufacturers.

IGES - Initial Graphics Exchange Specification file format of NBSIR.

CADL – CADKEY ™ ASCII file format.

Gerber - Gerber Cutter & Cutting Edge file format.

DFT - cncKad ASCII file format.

HP/GL - General output file format that can be sent to most HP-GL-compatible plotters. Approved by the American National Standard of the

Electronic Industrial Association.

MICROJET- File format used with the Microdynamics plotters.

DM-PL – Based on HP-GL format the use for IOLINE plotters.

No Sizes

When this option is disabled, all pieces with the same name become separatepieces. When this option in enabled, all pieces with the same name are made

into a graded nest.

! Note: For a graded nest to be created, the pieces name and size name must

be defined in the import file. The grade points are the break points




(sharp corners). AAMA format files can be imported with grading,

but often the graded nest does not come through correctly. If the

Graded Nest does not come through see Graded Nest tool in the

Grading Menu section. This new SGS tool offers a solution to this

problem.

Make DSN files

If this command is enabled, a Style (DSN) File is created when importing aMarker File.

Material

This field notes the Material Group in Piece Info for the imported file(s).

Quantity

Defines the quantity in Piece Info for the imported file(s). If an import filecontains several of the same pieces, SGS software reads only one and willinsert the right number of copies into the Piece Info box. If there are

differences between the images, SGS software may not recognize that the

pieces are multiples of the same pattern piece.

Ignore Internals

Defines the specific components to be imported from the import file.

Eliminating specific components, like Notches, Texts, Lines, Arcs, or Circles,speeds the Import procedure. Selecting the Ignore Notch or Internals option

(Lines, Arcs, Circles, or Text), does not mean that these elements are not read.

In this case, these elements are read without being identified or sorted. Forexample, a V notch on the piece perimeter becomes part of the contour rather

than being recognized as a notch having a V attribute.




OK

Click on the OK button after selected the file to Import. The file will be

imported.

Box

Click on this button to import a file within a closed contour box. This option

is used to bring in information if the file will not be imported properly. Usehis option when an error dialog box appears such as “Entities Out of Contour”

or “No Closed Contours Found”.

Setup

Click on the Setup button to display the Import Setup Dialog Box.




Import Setup Dialog Box:

Tolerance

The Tolerance Value determines the farthest distance between two points on a

contour can be placed apart and still be treated as the same perimeter (SGS

software usually handles only properly closed contours. However, thetolerance value ensures that some contours that are not closed properly will be

read).




Bulge (Chord Error)

Bulge (Chord Error) is a parameter used to define the smoothness of Curves

and Arcs. A smaller value creates many additional points and segments withinthe piece.

Min. Area

Min Area section uses to define the smallest piece that will be recognized inOptiTex import program as a piece.

Any element that is smallest from the value in the “Min. Area window” will be

recognizes as internal element!

! Note: In OptiTex Import Program, internal elements that are not located

in a piece (external contour that is close), will be not import!

Piece

If a piece boundary is smaller than the value defined in this box, the Import

command disregards the piece and throws the piece away.

Hole

A hole is a closed contour on the same layer as the piece boundary. Use this

area to define the minimum size of a hole. The minimum area of a hole shouldbe smaller than the smallest piece.

Default Internals Sizes:

These fields define the default settings for internals when importing fromanother file format.




Button Radius

This field is used to set the default size for the radius of a button.

Notch Depth

This field is used to set the default depth of a notch.

Notch Width

This field is used to set the default for the width of a notch.

Text Size

This field is used to set the default for text size. If a text size was defined inthe Imported file, SGS software maintains that value.

Text is information typed directly onto the piece. Piece Description text is

defined using the Dictionary dialog box.

V Notch’s Recognizing parameters

Max. Internal angle

This field is used to define V notch size in order to help the import system to

recognize V notch when the import format is DXF.

! Note: In AAMA import format there are special layers that define V notch.




Max. Relative angle

This area is used to define the maximum angle of a V notch.

Near Angle

This area is used to define the smallest near angle of a V notch.

Min Circle Radius

This field defines the smallest size of an internal circle that will be imported.

Max Notch Ratio

The largest difference when dividing the width by the depth of the notch.

Max Notch Depth

The field is used to define the maximum depth for a notch.

Spline Angle

The smallest angle for curved lines.

Max Grade Angle

The maximum angle for a graded nest.

Ignore CR / LF

Mainly for CNC files which come in one long line, or use a CR/LF after eachpoint. When enabled, the Carriage Return/Line Feed in the import file is

ignored.




Ignore Frame

SGS software ignores the outer frame (boundary) which is usually created for

Plot files.

Separate Layers

SGS software remembers the layer of each element. If the new file is ever

exported, the elements keep their original layers.

This option is used only for DXF and AAMA files. Because SGS softwarerecognizes elements and text on different layers, a circle inside a shape may

make a noticeable difference in the imported file. If the circle is imported

while the Separate Layers option is disabled, the circle becomes a simpleinternal element. If the circle is to be recognized as a hole, it must be on the

same layer as the outer perimeter line, or the DXF file can be imported with

the Separate Layers option in the OFF position.

Units

This area displays the Working Unit Values that are defined in the Options

Menu. If working units are set up incorrectly, the file is imported as the wrongsize and will need to be imported again.




Layers Table Dialog Box:

This dialog box is only available when importing AAMA files.

Format

The import format that was defined in the Import to CAD file Dialog Box.

Only AAMA files support Layers.

Boundary Lines

The layer name/number to place piece boundary lines on.

Turn (Grade) Points

The layer name/number on which to place turn (grade) points.




Curve Points

The layer name/number on which to place curve points.

Notches

The layer name/number on which to place notches.

Grain (Base) Lines

The layer name/number that define the grain (base) line.

Internal Lines (draw)

The layer name/number on which to place internal lines. If internal lines areused and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on the

same layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal

elements with Draw attributes.

Internal Cut

The layer name/number on which to place internal cuts. If internal lines are

used and they are to be cut with an Automatic cutter, they should appear on thesame layer as the outer perimeter. Otherwise, they will become internal

elements with Draw attributes.

Drill Holes

The layer name/number that define the drill holes.

Sew Lines

The layer name/number on which to place sew lines.




Quality Lines

The layer name/number that define the quality lines.

Restore Defaults

This button is used to restore the default layers for each item.

Dictionary Dialog Box:

The Dictionary dialog box enables SGS software to add attributes and data to

each imported piece and save this data with the Piece Info. SGS software looks

for the defined string and then uses the defined value or text that expresses thestring parameter.

Style Name

Defines how the import program searches for the style name.




Piece Name

Defines how the import program searches for the piece name. If a piece name

string is not defined; the longest line of text in the import file becomes thePiece Name.

Piece Code

Defines how the import program searches for the piece code.

Annotation

Defines how the import program searches for annotation.

Size Name

Defines how the import program searches for the size name.

Base Size Mark

Defines how the import program searches for the base size.

Material Code

Defines how the import program searches for the fined material group.

Quantity

Defines how the import program searches for the defined quantity.

Best Quality

Defines how the import program searches for the defined best quality.




Orientation

Defines how the import program searches for the defined orientation.

Restore Defaults

This button is used to restore the default dictionary names for each item.




SGS Modulate

About SGS Modulate

Modulate is a "Made to measure" program which is intended for production of

single or mass numbers of garments, each fitting specific sets of dimensions.These dimensions can belong to specific people or can represent specific

manufacturing requirements presented as a scheme of dimensions.

Modulate produces "Parametric Garments". A "Parametric garment" is a set of

patterns that construct a garment. Modulate adds to these patterns sets of

dimensions specified by the "Parametric Garment" designer , giving them anynames and relations required.

Once the "Parametric Garment" has been fully defined by a set of dimensions,

it can be used over and over for any number of dimension sets. Dimension sets

are all the dimensions required to fully define a "Parametric Garment". Forexample a parametric shirt may be defined using dimensions named "Back

Waist" , "ArmoHole" , "Chest" & "Side" . Given these four dimensions

Modulate will reshape the garment to fit these dimensions.

A difficult problem in creating parametric patterns has been the unexpected

behavior of the parametric model. This means that after assigning differentdimension sets to a parametric model it produced wrong point movements

which resulted in a wrong garment.

To avoid this Modulate has taken a unique approach. During the process of

defining the Parametric model the user can visually simulate its operation. For

example after adding a "Leg Length" dimension the user can simply drag thisdimension causing the entire garment to recalculate accordingly and view its

effect. If the model performs incorrectly the dimension can be assigned

differently by adding or removing other constraints and then rechecked untilthe parametric model perform correctly.




Export to SGS Modulate

This command will export the style file to custom fit file, in order to edit it in

the Modulate software.

Modulate File Name

Browse to locate the place to store the custom fit file.

Select Size

Select the desire size to be saved.

Import from SGS Modulate

Modulate maintains a database of Parametric Patterns.

This command display the Modulate Server window, from which you canselect one or more patterns that have been assigned specific dimension values.

To Import CUS file:

• Browse the database to locate the desire Modulate file.

• Change the dimension value if necessary.

• From the FILE menu select LOAD FILE.




Plot

About Plotting

Use the Plot command to Plot or Cut the displayed pieces. Files can be plotted

at a plotting device connected directly to one of the serial ports on yourmachine, or plots can be plotted to a plotting device connected to a network.




The new Output Control Center (OCC) is a utility which manages plot files as

well as queues on local and networks computers.

Use the print manager of your choice. The OutMan (Output Manager) is aWindows utility supplied by SGS software, which manages files. Files can be

sent to up to eight different serial printers or plotters. The QMan works in co-

ordination with the OutMan and acts as a spooler for the different plot files.

The OutMan also works in a network situation. From different workstations,network files can be sent to different devices and OutMan plots them without

interfering with the regular workflow of SGS Applications.

If the OutMan is selected, enable the use of OutMan’s application in the Plot

dialog box. Also, refer to the Configuring SGS Software to Your Plotter

section in the Installation and setup chapter of the manual.

There is a difference between the Plot and Print commands. Plot is used when

using the OutMan print spooler to support your large pen plotters (Gerbers andIolines) and InkJet/Dot Matrix plotters (HP600, EnCad, AlgoTex, and the

CalComp InkJet). A4/Letter paper size is referred to as small, and all paper

sizes larger than this are referred to as large.

Print is used when using the Windows print spooler and windows to supportyour small InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.).




! Note: If you use only one plotter, you will not have to select and configure

a plotter each time. The configuration will be saved in the

OUTMAN.INI. If you have more than 1 plotter, once they are

configured you will only have to specify the PLTR#.

Plotter Installation

! Note: Make sure that your plotter is installed and turned on.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must a piece in the working area.

Plotter (Output Manager) Setup

In order to use the plot command to send a job to an existing plotter, SGS

software must be configured properly. The Plotter Setup command defines the

communication parameters for the plotters in use. Up to 8 different plotters

can be defined in a network.

! Note: Select between the OutMan and the OCC as the output manager in

the Plot dialog box. The "Use Output Manger" must be checked.

! Note: The communication parameters in the computer output port should

have been previously set to match the same parameters in the output

device. A print manager for a Local or Network Plotter should have

also been installed. For more information, refer to the Configuring

SGS software To Your Plotter section in the end of this book.

Setting the OutMan as Output Manager

• From the Plot dialog box select the OutMan as output manager.

• From the File Menu choose Plotter (Output Manager) Setup. ThePlotter Setup Dialog box is displayed

• Enable the Output Manager by clicking the box. A small V is




placed in the box.

! Note: In most cases the Output Manager must be enabled in order to plot.

• Next, specify where the settings you select are to be saved; to dothis you will need to locate your Output Manager INI file. Click

Browse to view your directories. The Output Manager INI Filedialog box will be displayed.

• Select the OptiTex directory. (The file Outman.ini automaticallydisplays in the File Name field.)

• Click OK. The Plotter Setup dialog box is displayed with theselected Outman.ini path shown.

! Note: The SGS PDS, Grading, and Marking software all use the same

OutMan and Plotter Setup dialog boxes. Some options only apply to

PDS and are not accessible in the Marking software, and vise-versa.

• Select the plotter by clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the current plotter and select the appropriate PLTR#.

! Note: The number of plotters in the list depends on how many plotters

were specified during the Marking program Installation procedure.

• Click OK.

To Output Using the OutMan Print Manager:

• From the File menu choose Open. The Open dialog box willdisplay.

• Select the desired Design file.




! Tip: To open a file quickly, double click the file name.

• Click OK to open the file. Select a piece.

• From the File menu select Plot. The Plot dialog box is displayed.Verify that the correct file is displayed in the file name box. If

not, click Browse and select the correct file.

• Select the desired options.

! Tip: Verify that the correct Set up, paper size and plotter width, have been

selected prior to clicking OK.

• Click OK to save changes and exits the Plot Setting Dialog Box.The pieces will be plotted or cut.

! Tip: Once a file has been sent to the OutMan, you can continue to work at

your computer.




SGS software uses the WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) system

while printing and plotting. This means that what you see (on the screen) iswhat you get from the output device.

Setting the Output Control Center (OCC) as Output Manager

The Output Control Center (OCC) is used to communicate with your ploter orcutter as well as manage all your plotting jobs.

The OCC supports plotter in local computer or on any other computer on your

network.




To setup plotter to work with the OCC Manger

Use this command to install a new plotter on your computer, to connect to a

network plotter installed on another computer, or change the configuration of

an existing plotter.

• Click the ADD button to add a plotter.

• Select between "My Computer" and "Network Computer"depends where the plotter is connected.

Plotter connected to network computer

You can type the name of the remote

Computer (computer with the plotter) and click Connect, or double click on

Entire Network to browse and find your computer. Once you find your

computer, click on the + sign to see the plotters shared on this computer.

Select the desired plotter, then Finish.

You can now ready to plot to a remote plotter across your network.

Adding Plotter on Local Computer

Select the Port (COME, LP, etc) your plotter is connected to, then Next.

give the plotter queue a name For each plotter a Queue is created to hold,

process and store files for your plotter. The default location will be displayedin the Plotters Queue Folder. To change the Queue location, click on the

Browse button then select the desired location for the Queue.

Check the Shared Plotter box to make this plotter is available to other

computers.




Once you have the desired settings, click Finish to add the selected device.

Plot Dialog Box:




File Name

The File Name field contains the destination and name of the plot or cut file

that you are creating. To select a different file name or directory click onBrowse.

Use Output Manager

This option must be enabled to use the OutMan. The OutMan allowsautomatic plotter, if the OutMan is not enabled, the plot file is created and

stored in the displayed directory. Then, the plot file has to be copied to the

appropriate port.

Network Plotting

Enable this command when plotting through the network.

Output Manager Service

Choose between the OCC (Output Control Center) or the OutMan.

Alert on Start

When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job is about

to start plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computer

attached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.

Alert on End

When this option is enabled, a message will alert the user that the job hasfinished plotting. This message is displayed on the screen of the computerattached to the plotter. Click OK to proceed.




Remove on End

When this option is enabled, the plot file is deleted after it is plotted.

Copies

This option allows specification of he number of copies to be plotted.

Plot to Ftp

This option enables you to upload the plot file to ftp server.

How To Use The FTP Plot Utility Feature:

There are three basic things that OptiTex user should have in Order to use thenew FTP plot utility feature:

• IP address (Internet protocol) of the destination computer.

• Password in case that the destination computer is passwordprotected.

• User Name in case other users share the destination computer.

Now, you can contact your computer using standard network cable to the

destination computer network.

After you connect to your network follow the following steps:

• Go to “Plot Dialog” box.

• Use “Setup” button in “FTP Plot” section in order to open ftp

dialog box:

• Insert the destination Computer IP addresses to “Address”




windows and if there is a need, insert User name and Password .

• Now press on “Browse” button to access your destinationcomputer network (the access process can take some time).

• From the “Select Working directory” windows select the workingdirectory which will be a target directory for the plot will.? On the“Path” windows the selected directory path will be displayed (you

can’t edit the path on the “Path” windows).

• Confirm your selection with Ok button.

• On the Plot dialog check “Use FTP plot” option.

• Send the plot file to this destination using “Ok” on plot dialog box.

Log File Reports - Use

This option writes plot information to a log file that contains information about

the marker, number of pieces placed and material usage. The log file can thenbe used for tracking plotted files. To view the log file, use a text editor or

select Solutions Reports from the Nesting Menu.

Change Log

Click on Change Log to change the text file to which the plot information is

written.

Note (Custom Header)

This option allows the user to type in notes or instructions and plot them at the

end of the marker in the header. Note that if Marker Header is disabled, the

notes do not plot.




Plotter/Cutter Setting

This option displays the plotter type in use and how it is configured. It also

displays the plotter page size. Plotters and plotter settings can be changed inthe Plotter Setting dialog box. To open the Plotter Settings dialog box click on

Setup.

Plot Setting Dialog Box:

The Plot Setting dialog box can be accessed through the Plot dialog box.




Device Name

Name is the assigned name of the plotter. Up to 8 plotters can be defined.

They are listed as PLTR1, PLTR2, etc. The name can be changed in the Plotter

Setup command.

Driver Format

This option displays the Language the plotter is using. Consult yourplotter/cutter manual for language information for specific information related

to your plotter or cutter. Plotter Size. Each output device, whether it is a plotter

or a cutter, is treated as a plotter. Each kind of an X Y machine has its own

type of command file or language. The following plotter types are supported:

DM-PL (*.DMP)

HP-GL (*.HPG)

HP-GL PlotTec (*.HPT)

HP-GL Generic(*.HPG)

HP-GL /2 (*.HP2)

Design Partner (*.DP)

IOLS (*.IOL)

EIA (*.EIA)

Cybrid Plotter

Cybrid Cutter/Plotter

Mutoh Plotter




APGL Gerber Plotter (*.GGT)

AP700 Plotter

Gerber Cutter (*.GBR)

Eastman Cutter (*CMD)

Cutting Edge Cutter (*NC)

Wild Plotter/Cutter

Wild Plotter (*.WIL)

Microjet (*STD)

External Format

Device Options:

0,0 Page in Center

This option keeps jobs aligned when using more than one page. Most plotters

have their 0/0 point located at the Bottom Left point of the paper, althoughsome may have their 0/0 point set at the center of the page. If using a plotter,

which has a 0/0 point at the center, enable this option. This orientation setting

is used primarily for flat bed plotters.

Manual Frame Advance

This option is used primarily on flat bed plotters and plotters that do not feed

paper automatically. The plot stops at the end of each page to allow for paperreplacement. If this option is enabled, the Enter key must be pressed after each

page.




Use CR/LF in Code

Certain Gerber Cut Formats only use this option. Some Gerber cutters require

a new line after each command and some do not. The best way to check if your cutter needs to have a new line is to look at one of its example files. If the

file is one long paragraph, this command is not necessary. If the file starts each

command on a new line, this option must be enabled.

Use Initialization in File Header [<M70>/<IN>/…]

Some Gerber Cut Formats use this option. When enabled, it instructs the cutter

to stop and wait for the user permission to continue/start the job. Not allGerber plotters support this command. Consult the Gerber User’s Manual for

information on plotter/cutter support.

Use Bite Offset

This option is only supported by the Gerber Cut format. When enabled, itinstructs the plotter to put a small alignment mark on the fabric at the end of

each frame. The small mark is placed outside the Marker area so as notinterfere with the actual marker.

Use Plotter’s Built in Fonts

When this option is enabled, the plotter substitutes the fonts used on the

computer with its own built in fonts. Not all plotters have built in fonts.

Consult the plotter’s manual for font information. Using the plotters built in

fonts speeds up plotting.

Plotter Font File

Click Browse to select a font file. The Open Font File dialog box displaysallowing a font to be selected from a specific drive or directory. If Use Plotters

Built in Fonts is disabled, you must use the PLOT-ENG.FNT file.




Default Font Size (Inches)

This is the font size, which the plotter automatically uses if no other size is

specified. The default is .315

Plotter Page Size

Determines the working area of the plotter. The program will “remember” the

last setting even if it was for a different plotter. X is the length of the frame orthe endless length of the paper roll. Y is the width of the paper.

Gap after Plotting

This is the space the plotter puts at the end of the plot job. The default is 0.

Minimal Plot/Cut line

This option is only used for some Gerber plotters. It specifies the minimumdistance at which a line is still being cut. It saves plotting/cutting time to not

cut two points that are too close to one another.

Tools Setup Tab

The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line type

according to tool number or tool type.

There are several different plotter formats, which are support different lines

type:

HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter etc'

In order to plot a different line type follow the next steps:




• How defined a special tool to a selected element:

• For defining a special tool number to a selected piece use "ToolNumber/Layer Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "Cut

Order" dialog on Piece menu.

• For defining a special tool number to an internal element use"Tool Number/Layer Name" section on internal element attributedialog. Select the desirable internal and use double click function

to open the attribute dialog box (you select the internal and then

open the internal attribute dialog box from "Edit" menu). You canalso add a special tool number for internal on "Cut Order" dialog

box.

! Tip: You can use OptiTex new feature to select a tool name, just click with

mouse right button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a

dialog box will be open:

• Now, after you defended new special tools for a selected elementinternal or external, the news tool name will be display on the"Tools" column with the rest of OptiTex standard tools. Now,

defined a line type on "Plot setup" dialog box:




• Insert the tool number in to the "Head Number" column on thecorrect rows according the desirable tool or command type.Remember you can give only numeric names on "Head Number"

column!

• Select the desirable line type from the list. Don't forget to fill inthe tool number into the "Number of Heads" windows!

• Confirm your selection with "OK" button.




To change line type:

• Find the tool that you want to change his line type z

• Click on the field, a drop down menu appears.

• Select the desire line type from the menu.

How to work with "Tool setup" tab on "Plot setup" dialog box:

The new tools setup feature enables OptiTex users to plot different line types

according to tool numbers or tool types.

There are several different plotter formats, which are support different linestype:

HG-PL, DM-PL, HG-PL/2, Wild Plotter, AP 700 Plotter, Muto Plotter, etc.'

In order to plot a different line type follow these next steps:

How to define a special tool to for a selected element:

• To define a special tool number for a selected piece use "ToolNumber/Layer Name" section on "Piece Info" dialog or "CutOrder" dialog on Piece menu.

• To define a special tool number for an internal element use "ToolNumber/Layer Name" section on internal element attribute dialog

box.. Select the desired internal element and use the double click

function to open the attribute dialog box (you select the internaland then open the internal attribute dialog box from "Edit" menu).

You can also add a special tool number for internal on "Cut

Order" dialog box.

! Tip :You can use the new OptiTex feature to select a tool name:, just click with




right mouse button on "Tool Number/Layer Name" section and a dialog box will open:

• Now, after you define new special tools for a selected element,internal or external, the news tool name will be displayed on the

"Tools" column with the rest of OptiTex standard tools. To definea line type on "Plot setup" dialog box:




• Insert the tool number in the "Head Number" column on thecorresponding rows according the desired tool or command type.Remember you can only use numeric names in the"Head

Number" column!

• Select the desired line type from the list. Don't forget to fill in thetool number into the "Number of Heads" windows




Page Format:

Single

This option scales the marker to fit on one page. The page size is specified in

the Plot Settings dialog box (see below).

Multiple

Select this option when plotting to a smaller plotter that limits the width of the

marker. This option will plot the marker so that the marker width (Y) is scaled

to fit on the plotter paper. The marker length (X) is then scaled to match thescaling of the width.

Fixed Scale

Allows the user to specify scale (i.e. 4 to 1.) The default scale is 1 to 1, full

scale.

! Note: If the output device is smaller than the marker, SGS software creates

a file, which is already divided into the required number of pages.

Each page is marked at a specific location with joining marks to

help overlap (tile) the pages to complete the whole picture.




Options

Plot Continuous

Select this option to plot continuously. Plotters with roll paper generally plot

continuously. Plotters with manual page feed do not plot continuously.

! Note: If the actual marker is wider than the plotter, the selected option is

Scale equal to 1 X 1 and Continuous Plot is enabled, then special

marks are plotted to join two or more sections of the plot.

Marker Header

When this option is enabled, general maker information such as size, plies, and

number of pieces placed, notes, etc. is plotted at the end of the marker.

Plot Header Above the Marker

When this option is enabled, the header of the Marker will plot above it.

Marker Boundary

When this option is enabled, the marker boundary or frame is plotted aroundthe marker edge.

One Frame Only

This option scales the selection to fit on one plotter page and works in

conjunction with Plot Continuous.

Frame Advance after the Last Frame

This option when using a pen plotter that plots in defined frames. For example,

the Ioline 600 plots in 46” frames. It is necessary to check this option so that

the plotter will advance after plotting the first frame.




Plot/Cut Piece in One Frame

This option is using with flat bead plotters/cutters. When this option is

enabled any piece that is not within the frame in whole will not be plotted orcut.

Order According Tools

This option is used when more than one pen or knife is used to cut or draw themarker. When enabled, all sections assigned to one tool can be sent at the

same time: all the notches are cut or plotted first, then drills, then punches, and

then the cut sequence. This allows for a changing of tools between sections.

Pens (Tools) According to Sizes

When using a multiple pen plotter, it is possible to assign each size a different

pen. Select this option to enable plotting with pens according to size.

Bulge (Chord Error) Inches

The Bulge (Chord Error) setting is the smallest size at which an arc can appearand still be plotted as an arc. When plotting arcs with very small bulge chords

(practically straight lines) it is faster to plot them as straight lines. This saves

plotting time. If the Bulge (Chord Error) is set to 0, the curve is plotted, nomatter how slight.

Min. Plot Spline Segment

The minimum plot spline segment setting is the setting that determines the

smallest spline or arc to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not importantfor setup but may be adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.




Plotting Options for Graded Pieces

In PDS select Grading Options to choose how graded piece will plot. This

option is used to select which sizes will and will not plot and if a graded nestwill plot as a nest or if each size will grade as a separate piece.

Separate Grading Options dialog box:

Plot each size separately

Select this option to plot each size as a separate piece, rather than a gradednest.

Sizes

Select the sizes to be plotted by enabling or checking the box beside the size

name. If the box next to the size name is not checked, that size will not beplotted.




Plotter Setup

! Note: the plotter setup dialog box is different between the OutMan and the

OCC.

Plotter Setup Dialog (OutMan manager)

Use Output Manager

Select this option to use the Output Manager provided by SGS. When this

option is disabled, the plot file is created but is not sent to the output device.

Output Manager INI File:

The default INI file is C:\OPTITEX\OUTMAN.INI. If a different INI file is

desired, select Browse to display the Output Manager INI-File dialog box andselect the appropriate file.

Current Plotter

Select the plotter to be used in the Current Plotter drop down box. Up to 8different plotters can be configured in a server setting.




Plotter Setup Dialog (OCC)

• Select the plotter to be used in the plot command.

• The plotter can be set as default by clicking the SET DEFAULTbutton

• Click "Close"




Print

Use the Print command to output pieces to a printer. The Printer drivers are

part of Microsoft Windows, so SGS software displays the printer driver(s) thatwas (were) selected when Microsoft Windows was installed.

The Print command uses Windows printer drivers and spoolers; therefore, the

output device must be installed through the Windows Setup before printing

takes place.

Print is used when using the Windows print spooler to support small

InkJet/Laser/Dot Matrix printer (such as HP, Canon etc.). A4/Letter paper sizeis referred to as small, and all paper sizes larger than this are referred to as

large. Text sent to printer can be different from the text seen on screen. Use

the Fonts Command in the Options Menu to change the font type and size

To Print a File:

• From the File Menu select Print or click the Print icon on the toolbar. The Print dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired printing options.

• Click OK.




Print Dialog Box:

Actual Size

Select Actual Size to print the contents of the file in full scale regardless of the

paper size. This may require multiple pieces of paper.

Fit to Page

Select Fit to Page to print the contents of the file on one page. The defaultsetting for printing is Fit to Page.

Scale

Scale allows the contents of the file to be printed in a specified scale. For

example, a scale of 1 is 100%, and .50 is 50%.

Width

Width allows the user to specify a width for the print out. When a width is

specified, notice that the scale changes accordingly.




Height

Height allows the user to specify a height for the print out. When a height is

specified, notice that the scale changes accordingly.

Print selected piece only

When this option is selected only the selected piece prints when this option is

checked.

Print to file

This option generates a separate print file when checked.

Setup

Setup defines format for printer. Refer to the Printer Setup section for more

information.

Printer Setup

Select Printer Setup to display the Print Setup dialog box. This dialog boxshows the default printer where SGS files are sent as well as displaying

printing options.

To Set up Your Printer:

• From the File Menu choose Printer Setup to display the PrinterSetup dialog box.

• Select the desired printing options (paper, orientation, and size).

• Click OK.




! Note: Make sure to select printing parameters carefully. Some printer

drivers may not support different text sizes and fonts. Consult the

printer manual for exact specifications.

Default Printer:

The Default Printer will be displayed. The Default printer is configuredthrough the Windows Control Panel. To select a different printer, click the

drop down arrow to the right of the Specific Printer and select the desiredprinter.

Orientation and Paper Size:

The orientation determines whether the file will print in portrait or landscape.Clicking the drop down arrow to the right of Paper Size can change the paper

size.

Report to Excel and E-Mail utilities

Generates a report in Excel’s native format from OptiTex PDS and

E-Mails the report and the file directly from OptiTex PDS.

The style file can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reported by

using this dialog box.




Report contains

Using that option you control what will be add to the report.

By default the report contains the style files as they look on the working arae.

Piece information – when this box checked the report will contain the pieceinformation

Internal information - – when this box checked the report will contain all the

internals information.




Excel File

By clicking on the “…“ button you can browse the files on yours hard drive

and define the name of the excel file to be created.

You can set excel file visible and the after saving the file it will be opened

automatically.

Other option is to appended report to existing file and then the report will beadded at the end of the Excel file that has been chosen at the upper field.

MetaFile

To create a MetaFile you must check the box .

The scale X and scale Y fields gave the option to increases or decrees the sizeof the MetaFile.

"…" – by clicking this button you can browse your drive to locate the place

that the file will be saved

Mail

OptiTex can mail the style files to any mail recipient. You can attendee to the

massage 3 different files.

DSN file – mail the style file as he saved by optitex .

Excel report – mail the excel file.

MetaFile – mail a picture witch can insert to any office document or can be

opened with acrobat reader.




To mail a file:

• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

• Enter the e-mail address that you want to sand the massage to.

• You have the option to attach more files and to add the massagename and subject.

• Click O.K.

The massage with the attached files will be sand to the desire address

Send to:

Enter the mail recipient e-mail address. E-mail massages can be mail to

unlimited number of recipients.




Attachments:

To add files to the e-mail massage check the “Add current file” box and the

“Add Files” button to locate the files to sand.

Exit (Alt+F4)

Select the Exit command to close the Style File and exit the program.

To Exit the Program:

From the File menu chooses Exit or press ALT+F4.



Chapter 4: Edit Menu 255

Chapter 4: Edit Menu

The Edit Menu contains commands for editing selected pieces. To select oneof the Edit menu commands, highlight the command in the menu and press the

left mouse button, or use the shortcut keys which are listed in parentheses next

to the command in the pull down menu. Using the corresponding tool icondisplayed on the tool bar also accesses edit commands.

! Tip: Display toolbars by choosing Toolbar from the Display menu and

then selecting the appropriate toolbar to display (covered in the

Tools chapter).

Undo (Ctrl+Z)

Use the Undo command to reverse the most recent action performed in the

Style File. The Undo command may be chosen to undo the 20 most recent

operations, back to adding a piece to the working area. Undo does not work toundo the loading of the file.

! Tip: Press the Control key and the Z key to undo.

Redo (Ctrl+Y)

Use the Redo command to reverse any operation changed by the Undo

command. Continue to choose the Redo command until all of the “undone”

operations have been reversed.

! Tip: Press the Control key and the Y key to redo.

Cut Current Piece (Ctrl+X)

Use the Cut Piece command to remove the selected piece from the open Style() file and copy it to the clipboard. Then use the Paste Piece command to paste

the copied pattern piece into the same DSN file, a different DSN file, or




marker file. The cut selection can continue to be pasted until something else is

placed onto the clipboard.

! Note: Cut Piece functions the same as the Copy Piece except Cut Piece

removes the original piece and Copy Piece leaves the original piece.

! Note: When cutting and pasting pattern pieces from one DSN file to

another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current

file, even when the base size and size names are different.

! Tip: Press the Control key and the X key to cut.

To Cut a Pattern Piece:

• Select the piece to cut.

• From the Edit Menu select Cut Piece, click on the Cut to

Clipboard icon, or use Ctrl + X.

• Open the file where the object is to be pasted.

• From the Edit Menu select Paste Piece. The selected object isplaced into the file and displayed in the working area.

Copy Pieces

This command has four options:

• Copy Current Piece (CTRL + C)

• Copy Working Area

• Copy Highlighted Pieces

• Copy All Pieces




Use the Copy Piece command to copy selected pattern pieces to the clipboard.

Then use the Paste Piece command to paste the copied pattern piece(s) into thesame DSN file, a different DSN file, Modulate document or marker file. The

copied selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placed onto

the clipboard.


another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current

file, even when the base size and size names are different

! Tip: Press the Control key and the C key to copy.

To Copy a Pattern Piece(s):

• Select the piece(s) to copy.

• From the Edit Menu select Copy Piece, click on the Copy to

Clipboard icon, or use Ctrl + C.



Paste Piece (Ctrl+V)

Use the Paste command to paste the last pattern cut or copied onto theclipboard into the current DSN file or into a different DSN file. The cut/copied

selection can continue to be pasted until something else is placed onto theclipboard.


another, the pasted pieces acquire the sizes defined in the current file,

even when the base size and size names are different




! Tip: Press the Control key and the V key to paste.

To Paste a Pattern Piece into a DSN file:

• Cut or copy the selected piece by choosing the appropriatecommand from the Edit menu.



Copy/Paste Internals

Use Copy/Paste Internals command to copy internal elements from one piece

to another as well as within one piece.

• Select Internals to be copied using the Rectangle Tool in theEdit Tools Toolbar.

• From the Edit Menu select Copy / Paste Internals > CopyInternals.

• Select the piece to paste internals and from the Edit Menu selectCopy / Paste Internals >Paste Internals

Clear Selected Pieces

Removes only selected pieces from the working area.

• Select the pieces to be removed from the working area. Afterthe first piece is selected, highlight the others using the Shift +Left Mouse Click.




• From the Edit Menu select Clear Selected Pieces

• Replace Old – replaces the pieces in the piece bar with thecurrent pieces in the working area

• Remove Current - removes pieces in the working area withoutupdating the original pieces in the piece bar.

• Make New – removes pieces from the working area andsimultaneously creates duplicates of pieces that were previously

in the working area.

Clear Selected Piece

Use Clear Selected Pieces to remove all pattern pieces from the working areaat one time. When using Clear Pieces, three different options are available,

Replace Old, Remove Current, and Make New.

Replace Old:

Replace Old replaces the pieces in the piece bar with the current pieces on the

screen. Use this option to clear the working area while updating the originalpieces with the newly edited pieces.

To Clear Pieces and Replace Old:

• Select Clear Pieces from the Edit Menu.

•Select Replace Old and all pieces on the working area of thescreen replace existing pieces in the Piece Bar.




Remove Current

Remove Current removes pieces in the working area without updating theoriginal pieces. Use this option to clear the working area of all pieces without

keeping any edits.

To Remove Current Pieces from the Working Area:


• Choose Remove Current and all pieces on the working area of the screen are removed while the original pieces in the Piece Barremain.

Make New

Make New removes pieces from the working area and simultaneously creates

duplicates of pieces that were previously in the working area. Use this optionto clear the working area and create duplicates of each piece.

! Tip: To bring back pieces that have been cleared, use the Undo command

from the Edit menu.

To Clear the Screen and Make New Pieces:


• Select Make New to return all pieces on the working area of the

screen to the piece bar, and to make duplicates of each piece.Duplicates also appear in the Piece Bar.




Move Base Line

The Move command moves a selected object according to values entered in

the dialog box. The Move command in the Edit Menu switches between, MoveBaseline, Move Point, Move Notch, and Move Internal Element depending on

what object is selected on the selected piece. For example, if a point isselected, the Move commands changes to, “Move Point.” If an internalelement (drill hole, internal line, text, etc.) is selected, the Move command

changes to “Move Internal.” If a notch is selected, the Move command

changes to, “Move Notch.” If nothing is selected or a base line is selected, theMove command changes to, “Move Base Line.”

When selecting the Move command, more than one internal element, notch, orpoint may be selected. To select more than one point, click and drag the cursor

clockwise along the piece contour or press the Shift key to add additional

points. To select more than one internal element, press and hold the Shift key

and click on the desired elements. To select multiple notches not directly nextto one another, press and hold the Shift key and click on the individual

notches.

! Note: The following Example illustrates how to move a Point using the

Move command in the Edit Menu.

To Move a Point:

• Select the point.

• From the Edit Menu select Move Point. The Move Point dialogbox is displayed.




! Note: If the Move Point option is not visible, check to see that a point is

selected on the piece. Only when a point(s) is selected, is the Move

Point option available.

• Enter the desired distance or X and Y values to move the point.

• OPTIONAL: Enable Move Along Contour to move the point adistance along the original contour. When Move Along Contour

is selected, 2 choices are available: absolute and proportional.

These options are detailed in the section below.

• Click OK.

Move Point Dialog Box:

The X increment and Y increment fields correspond to movement along the X

and Y axis. To move the point 1” to the right and 2” up, enter 1 in the Delta Xbox and 2 in the Delta Y box. Use negative numbers to move points down and

to the left. Measurements may be defined for both X and Y values.

The Distance and Angle refer to the total movement of the point or notch.

Notice that when values are entered into one of the Delta X or Y boxes, the




distance displayed is changed to reflect the value that was entered. When a

value is entered in both the Delta X and Y boxes, the total distance and anglesthe point moves is calculated and displayed automatically. If the angle and the

distance to move a point are known, those values may also be entered into

correspond boxes and the Delta X and Delta Y boxes are automatically

calculated.

Enabling the Move along Contour box allows movement of the point a specific

distances from the previous or next point along the original contour. The next

point is always determined in a clockwise direction. The previous point isalways determined in a counter clockwise direction. When this option is

selected, two methods of determining the distance to move the point are

available, absolute and proportional.

Absolute refers to the actual distance from the previous or next point.

Proportional refers to the percent amount from the previous or next point.

Either method may be used to move a point along a contour.

Delete Piece (Del)

Use the Delete command to delete a piece, internal element, point, or notch.

Delete in the Edit menu switches between, Delete Piece, Delete Point, Delete

Notch, and Delete Internal Element depending on what object is selected onthe working screen. For example, if a point is selected, the Delete commands

changes to, “Delete Point.” If an internal element (drill hole, internal line, etc.)

is selected, the Delete command changes to “Delete Internal.” If nothing is

selected or a base line is selected, the Delete commands changes to, “DeletePiece.”

When choosing the Delete command, more than one internal element, notch,

or point may be selected. To select more than one point, click and drag thecursor clockwise along the piece contour or press the Shift key to add




additional points. To select more than one internal element, press and hold the

shift key and click on the desired elements. To select multiple notches notdirectly next to one another, press and hold the shift key and click on the

individual notches.

! Note: The following example illustrates how to delete a point using the

Delete command in the Edit menu.

To Delete a Point:


! Tip: To select more than one point, click and drag the cursor in a

clockwise direction or press and hold the Shift key to select

individual points.

• From the Edit Menu select Delete Point or press the Delete key to

delete all selected elements.




Attributes (Enter)

Use the Attributes command to display and/or change the attributes of a

selected element of a piece. The Attributes command in the Edit Menuswitches between, Point Attributes, Inner Elements Attributes, and Notch

Attributes depending on what element is selected on the working area. Forexample, if a point is selected, the Attributes command changes to, “PointAttributes.” If an internal element (drill hole, internal line, etc.) is selected, the

Attributes command changes to “Inner Elements Attributes.” If nothing is

selected or a base line is selected, the Attributes command is grayed out.

! Tip: Another way to access attributes of an object is to select the object

and press the Enter key.

! Note: The following example illustrates how to change the attributes of a

point using the Point Attributes command in the Edit menu.

To Display/Change Point Attributes:


• From the Edit Menu select Point Attributes, or press Enter. ThePoint Attributes dialog box is displayed.

• Verify or change the desired options.

• Click Apply to accept the changed values, or click Close to

close the dialog box without changing any of the selected

attributes.

The following dialog boxes change according to the object that is selectedprior to choosing the attributes command. If an internal element is selected,one of the following boxes displays Line Attributes, Text Attributes, Button




Attributes, or Edit Circle. If a Notch is selected, the Edit Notch dialogs

displays. If a point is selected, the Point Attribute dialog box displays.

Point Attributes Dialog Box:

Curve Points

Curve points create a curved line without sharp breaks. A curve point can be

either grading or non-grading. A Non Curve point creates straight lines

without curves. To make a point a curve point, check the box next to Curve

Point. To make a point a non-curve point, uncheck the box next to Curvepoint. Click on OK when the appropriate point selection is made.




Grading Points

Grading points are used to establish a specific point where grading is applied

on a piece (mostly used for apparel). A grading point is represented by a small

black square on the piece perimeter or line segment. A Grading point may be

on a straight line or a curved line. To make a point a grading point, check thebox next to Grade Point.

Non grading points are represented by a small black circle, Non grading points

are used to help shape the piece boundary. A non-grading point will blend withthe previous and next grading points, and is therefore sometimes called a

blending grade. Non grading points may not be assigned values in the grade

table. To make a point a non-grading point, uncheck the box next to Gradepoint. Click on OK when the appropriate point selection is made.

Angle

The point angle is displayed in the Point Attribute dialog.

Name

The point can be named for reference with the Bubble Info (see View menu)

and with Grading (see Grading menu “Apply Rule with Name”).

Seam

The Seam field indicates if seam allowance has been applied to a point. Thefield also shows the amount of seam allowance applied as well as the corner

type if the point is on a corner. The main purpose of this box is simply forverification. To change seam allowance values, see the Seam section in the

Piece chapter, or see the Seam Allowance tool in the Tools chapter.




Add Relative

Use the Add Relative command to add a Point or Notch or button (drill)

relative to a selected point. This command is used for adding points, notches,and buttons to the base size. When a point, notch, or button is added to the

base size, it is also added to all other sizes.

To Add a Relative Point or Notch:

• Select the point or notch on the base size from which to add therelative point or notch.

• From the Edit Menu select Add Relative and then select Point orNotch. The Add Relative dialog box is displayed.

• Select either a point or a notch by checking the appropriate box.

Two methods of adding relative are available: Specify Distancealong the Contour or Specify Absolute Distance. Select SpecifyDistance Along Contour to a point onto the contour from the

selected point. A positive value places the point in the clockwise

direction from the selected point and a negative value places the

point in the counterclockwise direction from the selected point.Delta X and Delta Y place the point based on a delta grid where

the selected point is the zero point

• Click OK.




Add Relative Dialog Box (Point or Notch):

To Add a Relative Button

• Select a point, button or notch.

• From the Edit Menu select Add Relative. Select Button.

• When the Add Button Relative to Current Point dialog boxdisplays, enter the desired values to define the location of thenew button.

• Click OK.

• Enter the desired attributes for the new button.




! Note: The Button Attributes dialog box is described in detail with the

Button tool in the Tools chapter.

• OPTIONAL: Create Duplicate buttons by selecting Duplicate (onthe lower right of the dialog box). When the Duplicate ButtonDialog box displays, enter the desired number of buttons and

values to determine the spacing of the buttons.

• Click OK.

Add Button Relative to Current Point Dialog Box:

Add a button a specific distance from a selected point. Multiple buttons,

evenly spaced from the first button placement, may also be created.

When a positive number is entered, the button is added in the direction of the

red arrow. When a negative number is entered, the button is added in theopposite direction of the red arrow.

! Note: Buttons are also used to define match points for stripe/plaid

matching on the marker.




Button Attributes Dialog Box:

The Button Attributes dialog box is described in detail with the Button tool in

the Tools chapter.

Add Slit Lines/Points

Use the Add Slit Lines/Points command to add one or more internals over an

internal or external segment. Notches, buttons, lines or points may be selectedfrom the Add Slit Lines dialog box. Since it is not possible to add notches

over internal segments, us small lines with a Cut attribute instead.




Add Slit Lines Dialog Box:

The Add Slit Lines dialog box is divided to several sections:

Type of Slit lines

Use this field to define the type of slit line. Choose from I-notch, Line, Buttonand Point. These internal can be added according to the type of segment

(Internal or External contour).






Mode

This field refers to the attribute attached to the internal, concerning the output

device.

Add Points for Notches

From the Edit menu, select Add Points for Notches, and Grading points are

added to existing notches on All Pieces in File, All Pieces in Working Area,All Highlighted Pieces (select + Shift in Piece Bar), or Current Piece Only.

Align Points

The Align Points command aligns a selected group of points horizontally,

vertically, or by a specified angle.

When choosing the Align Points command, more than one point must be

selected.

To select points, click and drag the cursor clockwise along the piece contour

until the appropriate points are selected (select points in a clockwise direction).

To Align Points:

• Click and drag to select the points to be aligned.

• From the Edit Menu choose Align Points. The Align Pointsdialog box is displayed.

• Click on the alignment mode: Horizontal, Vertical, or enter avalue in the angle filed and click on Angle to.

• The points are aligned.




! Note: The Points will move to match the first point selected.

! Tip: To select points in a counter clockwise direction hold down the Shift

key while selecting each point.

Round Corner

The Round command is used to create a curved intersection where two linesintersect on a boundary line.

To Create a Rounded Corner:

• Select the intersection point on which to create a roundedcorner.

• Select Round Corner from the Edit Menu.

• Enter a value for the radius of the rounded corner in the dialogbox.

• Click OK.

! Note: This command supports multiple point selection.

! Tip: To undo the rounded corner, select Undo from the Edit menu.




Extend Internal

This command extends a selected internal line in any direction by a specified

value or up to a selected point on the piece’s boundary. The small red “x”displayed on the end of the line indicates the direction the line is to be

extended in. The position of the x depends on which end of the line is selectedwith the cursor.

To Extend an Internal Line:

• Select the internal line.

• From the Edit Menu select Extend Internal. The Extend InternalSegment dialog box is displayed.

• Click on the Up to the Contour or enter the desired value and

click on Extension Amount for an extension of exact length.

• Click Close.

Extend Internal Segment Dialog Box:




Size

Select All Sizes to extend the line for all sizes, or select an individual size by

clicking the drop down arrow to the right of the All Sizes option.

Up to the Contour

Click on this button to extend the selected inner line to the perimeter of the

piece. The side extended will be the selected end of the element.

Extension Amount

Click on this button to extend the selected inner line by a specific amount.Enter the amount in the field next to Extension Amount. The side extended

will be the selected end of the element.

Segment

Use the Segment command to mark a selected shape or segment of a piece,

copy it, and paste it to another location. The Paste tools can be used on the

same or a different piece in the current style file or in a different style file. Thecommands, Copy, Show, Paste Proportional, Paste Notches, Paste Grading,

Paste Between Two Points, and Paste Internal are available within Segment in

the Edit menu.

! Note: An external segment can by copied and paste as an internal to any

piece, also with its grading.




Copy:

Use Copy to copy a shape or segment to the clipboard.

To Copy a Segment:

• Select the segments that will be copied by dragging the cursorfrom the first point of the area to the last point.




• From the Edit Menu select Segment and then select Copy. Thesegment is now copied onto the clipboard and will remain thereuntil something else is copied to the clipboard.

Show Segment

Use Show Segment to show the segment currently on the Clipboard. TheShow Segment command allows changing the start point of the selection to be

pasted or changing the direction of the shape by using the mirror button.

The Inverse option flips the start point of the segment, marked with an “X” to

the opposite side. The Mirror option mirrors the selected segment, verticallyflipping it around the Y-axis. Both options may be used.

To Show the Segment

• From the Edit Menu select Segment and then select Show. The

Segment Editor dialog box displays and the red “x” marks thestarting paste point of the segment

! Note: The sections are always displayed and pasted in a clockwise

manner.

• Mirror or Invert the selected object as desired.

• Enable Use Notches to paste notches with the segment.

• Click OK.




Use Grading

Check this option if want to copy the segment grading.

Use Darts

Check this option if you want to copy the segment dart.

Use Notches

Check this option if want to copy the segment notches.




Paste Segment Proportional

Use the Paste Segment Proportional command to paste the copied segment

between two selected points. The copied segment can be placed between any

two points, or between any number of points. The copied segment will be

inserted between the points in a clockwise direction, keeping its shaperegardless of the original size and scale.

To change the direction or start point of the piece, select the Show Segment

command. The image displays in a dialog box where desired changes can bemade.

To Paste Segment Proportional:

• Copy the desired segment (See steps above).

• Determine the place to paste the copied segment by dragging thecursor from the first point to the last point where the segment isto be copied. The first point selected will match with the one

marked by an “x” in the Segment Editor dialog box (see section

above).

• From the Edit Menu select Segment and Paste Proportional.

The segment is placed proportionally between the two end points regardless of

the size.

! Note: When using Paste Proportional, the pasted segment becomes part of

the piece’s boundary, not an internal line.

Paste Notches

Use this option if you want to copy only the segment notches with the segment

contour.




Paste Darts

Use this option if you want to copy only the segment darts with the segment

contour.

Paste between Two Points

Paste Between Two Points inserts or pastes a segment that is copied to the

clipboard using Copy Segment command in the Edit menu. The Paste betweenTwo Points command allows copying a segment to two internal points or

between one internal point and one perimeter point.

! Note: This command differs from the Paste Proportional command in the

Edit menu. The differences that Paste Between Two Points allows

copying a segment as an internal line on the piece. Paste

Proportional only allows copying a segment to the boundary of the

piece.

To Paste between Two Points


• From the Edit Menu, select Paste Between Two Points. Aspecial cursor will display.

• Use the cursor to select the two points between which thesegment will be pasted. Click the first point, move the cursor to

the second point (even if it is an internal point), and click again.

• The chosen segment is copied and pasted between the twoselected points.




Paste As an Internal Contour

Paste As an Internal Contour inserts or pastes a segment that is copied to the

clipboard using Copy Segment command in the Edit menu. The Paste As an

Internal Contour command allows copying a segment as an internal from

either an internal point or a perimeter point.

To Paste As an Internal Contour:


• Determine the place to paste the copied segment by dragging thecursor from the first point to the last point where the segment isto be copied. The first point selected will match with the one

marked by an “x” in the Segment Editor dialog box (see section

above).

• From the Edit Menu select Segment and Paste As an InternalContour.

Make Pieces

Select the Make Pieces command to create Rectangles, Polygons or Circles.This is extremely useful when drafting new pieces.

To Make Pieces:

• From the Edit Menu select Make Piece.

• Choose the type of piece to be made: Rectangle, Polygon orCircle. A dialog box displays for the appropriate selection.

• Enter the desired values.




• Click OK.

The Rectangle, Polygon or Circle display in the Piece Display Bar after it is

created.

Make Rectangle Dialog Box:

Enter the desired values for the Length and Width of the new piece. The new

piece displays in the Piece Display Bar.

Make Polygon Dialog Box:

Enter the desired values for the Number of Points for the Polygon, the Radiusand the Angle. The new piece displays in the Piece Display Bar.




Make Circle Dialog Box:

Enter the desired values for the Number of Points that will be displayed on the

Circle, the Radius and the Angle. The new piece will be displays in the PieceDisplay Bar.

Video

It is possible to attach an *.AVI Video file to points, buttons, seaming, darts,etc. It can be used for training purposes or to pass specific instructions per a

point.

Click a point and choose the Video option. Look for the right *.AVI file to

attach to the point.

To play the video file, just choose the point again and play the video.



Chapter 5: Piece Menu 287

Chapter 5: Piece Menu

The Piece menu is used for editing and changing the attributes of pattern

pieces. To choose one of the Pieces menus commands, click Piece and drag

the mouse to the desired command.

Info (Ctrl + I)

Use the Info command to display or modify information for the selected piece.

Information such as the piece name, size, description, orientation and folding

attributes are defined and changed using the Piece, Information command.

! Note: Each DSN file represents one style with all the pieces and sizes

necessary to make one complete item.

! Tip: Access the Piece Info dialog box quickly by double clicking on the

piece or click on the Ctrl key + I.

! Tip: Use Global Info to set up the defaults or most commonly used

parameters on all pieces and then use Info to individually change

each piece.

To Define the Pattern Piece Info:

• Select the piece.

• From the Piece menu choose Info or double click the piece.

• When the Pattern Information dialog box is displayed, enter thedesired information.

• Click Apply.




• OPTIONAL: Select a different piece from the Piece DisplayBar, return to Step 3 and continue.

• Click Close.




! Tip: For changes to be applied, be sure to use the Apply button after piece

info has been entered for each piece.

Piece Info Dialog Box:

Name

Name defines the name of the selected pattern piece. If no name is defined, a

numeric name such as 1, 2, 3, etc. is assigned If Close is selected beforeclicking Apply or Enter, the name change is not made. The name of the piece

displays in the Piece Display Bar along the top of the screen.

Code

The code field is used to define a piece code. Some companies use this field to

define a serial number or code number for identifying the piece type. When the

piece is placed in a marker, it is optional to plot or not plot the code on the

piece.

Description

Description allows a description or other important information about the

selected piece to be entered. The description is shown in the printed

information report. When the piece is placed in a marker, it is optional toinclude the description on the piece. This is a helpful feature for relaying

information to a manual cutter.

Quantity/Set

Copies define how many of the selected piece is needed to make one completeitem (style).

Typically, one of each dimensionally like piece is drafted or digitized into a

design file. For example, a man’s dress shirt style is constructed using one

back piece, two front pieces, and two sleeve pieces. However, only one front




and one sleeve piece are drafted or digitized. To create the second piece of the

front piece and the sleeve piece, enter a 2 in the Copies field. When the file isloaded in the marking program for marking layout, each size ordered will

contain 2 sleeves and two fronts.

! Note: If the value in the Quantity field is zero (0), this piece does not

appear in the marker file.

Material

Material defines the type of fabric for the selected piece (lining, self, contrast,

etc.). It is best to use general terms for material such as “base,” “lining”, “A,”etc., because if a garment or another product is made in linen one year and in

fleece another year, the user can still use “base” or whatever the main

fabrication was termed the first time.

The Best Quality

This feature is currently being developed. Best Quality relates to defining

areas of best quality for leather cutting.

Buffer Size

Buffer defines a buffer around the entire piece at marker making time. Thisfeature is often used when die cutting. When a buffer is defined on a piece, a

<B> is displayed in the Size List Box in the Marking program for easily

identifying which pieces are using a buffer.

! Note: Buffers can also be added at marker making time.

If a buffer value is specified, the size of the piece is increased around its

contour. However, when nesting has been completed in marker making,

the buffering may be removed. The piece returns to its true dimensions within

the marker, but an invisible buffer remains around the piece.




! Note: Before changing the buffering of a piece, check the working units to

ensure consistent use of one type of working unit (inches,

centimeters, etc.). Be careful not to mix working units .

Max Tilt

Max Tilt establishes how much a piece may be tilted on the marker in order toconserve material. For example, a value of .5” allows the piece to be tilted up

to .5” on the marker.

Size Info

Size Info displays the net area and perimeter for each piece and all sizes of the

piece. To view piece areas and perimeters for other sizes, scroll down in thesize box to the desired size and click the mouse button. The area for this size

displays in the corresponding box.

Rotate Allowance

Rotate Direction controls the ability to rotate the piece on the marker.

• One-way: Always the same direction (0ø), no Rotation.

• Two-way: Rotate any direction in 180ø angles.

• Four-way: Rotate any direction in 90ø angles.

• Any-way: Rotate any direction.

Orientation

Select from Left, Right Both or leave the Orientation as undefined. The Bothoptions are important when there are two copies of the same piece (for

example, a front) and one of them is the mirror of the other. To define the

current piece with both parts, select Both and the second piece is automatically




mirrored. The software verifies that the correct number and orientation of

these pieces is entered. Use Left or Right if only a left or right oriented piece isrequired.

Buffer Type

Buffer Type can be indicated here: Around, Up, Down, Left & Right of thepiece.

Opposite Piece

OptiTex Version 8 "Opposite Piece" filed is enhancement of previous OptiTex

versions "Orientation" filed.

Opposite Piece filed is used only when the selected piece quantity is more then

one. You can use Opposite Piece utility for three purposes:

•For marker making.

• Arrange for plot command.

• Scatter Piece command.

Use the opposite piece option when the selected piece have left and right side

while the piece and the "Flip Allowance" is none or when the selected piecequantity is more then one.

This option gives the piece the ability to be flipped on the marker table.




Both command uses in the marker making arrange to plot command and

scatter piece command.

Both commands maintain the "Orientation" filed left and right order.

The difference is on the flipped direction as shown bellow.

Flip Allowance

Enabling the Flip option allows the piece to be flipped in the up, down, left,

and right directions. If the piece fits better into the marker flipped, the

software automatically flips the piece to conserve material for higher

efficiency. Use the U\R icon to flip pieces in the marker area. When piece isdefined with Flip Allowed, a <M> is displayed in the Size List Box in the

marker making program.

Description Text

Here you can set the font size as well as an angle of the description text of the

piece.




Disable Auto Reseam

This box can be checked in order to disable auto reseam option on this piece

only.

Disable Auto Update Notches

This box can be checked in order to disable auto update notches option on this

piece only.

Folding Allowed

Folding Allowed Defines if a piece may be folded in the up/down or left/rightdirections in the marker. When the box is checked, the piece is defined as

foldable in the marker. Folding is commonly used for Tubular Marking (see

Marker Definitions in the Marker Chapter).

When the piece is defined with Up/Down Folding allowed, a <U> is displayedin the Size List Box next to the piece in the Marking program.

When a piece is defined with Left/Right Folding allowed, <S> is displayed inthe Size List Box next to the piece in the Marking program.

Print Report

This command prints a summary report of the information defined in the PieceInformation dialog box. To change the fonts, use the Fonts option in the

Options Menu.

Apply

This option must be selected in order to apply changes for each piece. If Apply

is not selected, none of the specified changes are made.




Global Info

While Piece Info (above) modifies attributes only for each currently selectedpiece, Global Info modifies attributes for all pieces in the open design file.

Use this command to define commonly used information. Global Info setsdefault settings for Piece Info.

To Define the Global Info:

• From the Piece menu choose Global Info.

• When the Global Pattern Information dialog box displays, enterthe desired information.

• Click SET for each option that is changed.

• Click Close.

Global Piece Information Dialog Box:

Most of the options listed in the Global Info dialog box are the same as those

in the Piece Info dialog box. Refer to the preceding section for more

information about the different options.




Style Name

The Style Name is different from the piece description (in Piece Info). TheStyle Name is used to define a name for the style. The style name can be

plotted on every piece in the marker, while the DSN file name cannot beplotted on pieces in the marker.




Style Area and Dimension

The Style Area and Dimension command displays all area and perimeter

values for each piece in the open design file. Area and perimeter values aredisplayed according to material type and size.

! Note: This option is the first step of data transfer between SGS grading

software, SGS marking software, and Dennison’s Optiplan 8.

(Dennison’s Optiplan 8 is a complete Pre Calculations and

Optimization program for the advanced cutting room).

Style Area and Perimeter Values Dialog Box

The information in this dialog box can be viewed and printed according toeach individual size and material type. This information can not be changed

through this dialog box; it reflects information that has been entered in both

the Piece Info dialog box and the Global Info dialog box. To make changes,

use the Piece Info and the Global Info dialog boxes.




Material

Click the drop down arrow in the material box to select the material group for

which to view the area and perimeter information.

Size

Click the drop down arrow in the size box to select the size for which to view

the area and perimeter information.

This material only

Use this option to print report according to material type that is selected on the“Material” windows.

Print Report

Use this command to print a report of all the sizes and material groups in theopen design file. Change fonts in the Options menu under Fonts.




Global Change Internals

The global changes for internal option is similar to the Global Change Internal

Parameters option in the Marking program. This dialog box allows changingthe parameters on any type of internal element including notches, darts, texts,

drills, etc. The Left side of the box is for selecting the type of internal that is tobe changed for all pieces (or selected pieces) within the DSN file.

The Right side of the box is for selecting how the elements indicated on theleft should be modified. For example, on the left, Notches and All may be

selected. On the right, V may be selected. This would change all notches in the

DSN file to V notches at one time.




Use the Piece section at the center top of the box to select which pieces the

changes should effect. To change all pieces, use the All option. To changeonly the pieces in the working area, use On the Working Area. To change

only the selected piece, use the Current Only option.

Global Notch GradingThis command gives you the option to change the notch grading on all the

pieces or selected piece only.

In order to apply new values on the notches select the parameters in dialogbox.




Order of Internals

Select the Holes and Internal Contours command to define or change the cut

order cut direction of internal cutouts.

Modify

This command has 5 options to modify selected piece: Rotate, Rotate to Initial

Baseline, Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical and Mirror.

Rotate

Select the Rotate command to rotate a piece, internal element or baseline by a

specified number of degrees to the left or right.




To Rotate a Pattern Piece:

• Select the piece to rotate.

• From the Piece menu choose Rotate.

• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box displays,check the Piece box.



! Note: The selected piece rotates each time the Left or Right button is

selected.

• Click OK.

! Note: The piece and the base line rotate as if they are locked together

unless the Piece Over Base option is selected.

To Rotate a Selected Element:

• Select an internal element (internal line, text, circle, etc.).


• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box is displayed,check the Selected Element box.

• Enter the desired rotation angle.





! Note: The selected element rotates each time the Left button or Right

button is selected.

• Click OK.

To Rotate the Baseline:

• Select the baseline or the piece.

! Note: The outcome of Rotate when using the Baseline Only option is the

same regardless of whether the baseline or the entire piece is

selected.


• When the Rotate Piece or Inner Element dialog box is displayed,check the Baseline box.



! Note: The piece rotates and the baseline remains in its original position

each times the Left or Right button is selected.

• Click OK.




Rotate Piece or Inner Elements Dialog Box:

Angle

The Angle determines how far to rotate the piece by degrees. Any rotation

value can be entered.

Piece

Enable this option to rotate the entire piece.

Selected Element

Enable this option to rotate only the selected internal element. The selected

element can be an internal line, text, or circle.

Baseline Only

Select this option to rotate the pattern piece around the base line. The base line

will remain anchored in its original position.

Rotate Left and Rotate Right

Left or right determines the direction the selected element or piece will rotate.The selected element rotates each time one of these options is selected.




Rotate to Initial Base Line

The Rotate to Initial Base line command be used to rotate the piece back to its

original positioning. The base line, or grain line, is a line (usually horizontal)which ensures the placement of the piece is in the correct direction on the

screen and on the marker.

To Rotate to Initial Base line:

• Select the piece to re-orient.

• From the Piece menu choose Rotate to Initial Base Line.

• From the Piece menu choose Rotate to Initial Base Line.

The pattern piece is returned to its original position, and all internal elements

are rotated along with the piece. This command also sets the current base line

to a horizontal position. The ratio between the base line and the contourremains constant.

Flip Horizontal

This command flips the current pattern piece 180ø along the Y-axis (Back and

Forth).

Flip Vertical

This command flips the current pattern 180ø along the X-axis (Up and Down).




Mirror

This command creates a new piece exactly the same as the selected pieceexcept the new piece has two symmetrical halves made from the original

piece. Note that this command creates an exact symmetric duplicate, which is

the same on both sides.

To Mirror a Pattern Piece:

• Select two consecutive points by clicking on the first point, thendragging (clockwise) to the next point.

• From the PIECE menu choose MIRROR.

A new piece is created which is symmetrically placed according to the selected

points. The new piece displays in the furthermost right-hand box in the Piece

Display Bar. See the diagram below.

Drag the courser from theright point to the left point

to select the mirror line




! Note: The symmetric line will be shared by all sizes. If the original piece is

graded, the grading values are also duplicated.

! Tip: The Mirror command may only be used when 2 points are selected, as

mirroring a piece must occur along a straight line. All straight lines

require only two points. If a piece has three or more points along the

mirror line, it may be necessary to delete these extra points.

! Note: A symmetric line in a mirrored piece means that this piece has an

“equal group” in the“Equal Segment Groups” dialog box under

Design menu.

The new mirror piece




! Note: You can find more detailed information on “Equal Segment” feature

in chapter 9 Design menu.

Scale and Shrink

The Scale and Shrink command enlarges or reduces the actual piece size in the

X or Y direction by a specified percentage. If the piece is graded first, thenscaled, the graded sizes are scaled along with the base size. If the piece is

scaled first and then graded, the graded sizes are not scaled.

The Scale & Shrink command is mainly used when working with materialsthat have a shrink or stretch factor. This command is also used when digitizing

a miniature pattern from another source (i.e. a magazine or book). The Scale

command is used to enlarge the pattern to its actual size.

To Scale or Shrink:

• Select the desired pattern piece. & from the Piece menu chooseScale And Shrink.

• When the Scale and Shrink Options dialog displays enter thevalues to scale the piece.




! Note: Enter a -50% value to shrink the piece to half of the original size.

Enter 50% to scale the piece double its original size.

• Select the correct option of scaling either the selected piece, allpieces in the file, or only pieces on the working area.

! Tip: Use the Scale All command to scale all the pattern pieces in the Piece

Display Bar.

• Click OK to scale the pieces.




! Tip: Use the Measure Tool to verify the changes in size between the

original size and the scaled size.

! Tip: “Selected Piece/Contour Segment” option will scale up/down the

selected piece perimeter.

! Tip: “Selected Specials Only” option will scale up/down the selected

internal segment.




Optimize Cutter Ordering

This command was previously only available in the Marking program. Version

7 includes this option in the PDS and GRADE programs. This option is usedto optimize the direction and number of cuts per piece for a numerically

controlled (NC) cutter. Plotters can plot portions of pieces and then advancethe paper. Cutters must cut the entire piece and then advance the fabric orpaper.




Current Trace

Indicates the number of separate cuts an automatic cutter will make on a piece.

In the example above there is only one cut that starts and ends at the samelocation.

Start

Start is used to set the start point at the default point (point #1 of a pieceusually located at the lower left corner). Use the Any Point option if the piece

can be cut starting at any point on the piece.

Start Point/End Point

Start Point/End Point are used to arrow the beginning or the end of the cut to

different locations. To back up the start point, or to extend the end point of the

cut to another point, use these arrows.

Cutting Direction

Cutting Direction is used to make the cut either clockwise or counterclockwisein direction.

Tool

Tool is used to set the type of tool to be used on the piece. For example, if thepiece is to be cut, the tool is set as cut. If the piece is only to draw using a pen,

set as draw.

Points Cleanup

Points Cleanup is used to remove unnecessary/extra points on a pattern piece.

Use this command when importing pattern pieces or when the pattern pieceboundary is digitized with too many points.




To Delete Duplicate Points:

• Select the desired pattern piece.

• From the Piece menu choose Del. Duplicate Points.

• When the Tolerance dialog box displays, enter the desiredtolerance value. The tolerance setting refers to how much a

piece is allowed to change dimensionally. For example, if the

piece can tolerate a change of .125”, enter .125 in the tolerancebox.

• Select the appropriate option for which to apply the tolerancevalue (All Pieces in the File, All Pieces in the Working Area, or

Current Piece Only).




All extra points are deleted maintaining that the piece not change dimensional

beyond the tolerance setting.

! Tip: If the Tolerance value was entered incorrectly, select Undo from the

Edit menu and retry the command.

Set (0,0) Point

Select the Set (0,0) Point command to change the start measuring point for the

selected pattern piece in the working area. This command is used in

conjunction with the Coordinates command in the Display menu. Thiscommand is particularly useful during the freehand pattern editing or drafting

because it shows the position of the cursor relative to the 0,0 point in any delta

X/Y direction.

To Set (0,0) Point:

• Select the point to use as the new start point.

• From the Piece menu choose Set (0,0) Point.

! Note: Changing the 0,0 point causes the grid to align itself to the 0,0 point.

(To view the grid, check the Grid and Stripes option in the Options

and pull down menu).

Start Point

Select this command to define which grading point will become the first point.

The first grading point and the order of all other grading points is especiallyimportant when using All Point (Global) Grading rules. To display point

numbers, select Point Numbers from the Display pull down menu.




! Note: While using the All Point Grading (Global) rules, or the Graded

Nest command, point numbers play an important role.

! Note: The first point of a pattern piece defaults to the first digitized point.

If patterns are always digitized starting from the lower left corner

point, than this point will always be the first point

To Set the Start Point:

• Select the point to set as the first piece point.

• From the Grading Menu choose Start Point.

Base Parallel to Segment

Use Base Parallel to Segment to realign the base line to another internal line orto a line segment on the piece’s boundary.




To Make the Base Line Parallel to a Segment:

• Select the two point internal line or line segment to which thebase line will be aligned. Using the example above, select from

point #2 to point #1.

• From the PIECE menu, select BASE PARALLEL TOSEGMENT.

! Note: If you select point 1 and 2 the base line direction will be rotated

180° .

base line

center fornt line

! Note that the base line is now parallel to the center front line.

• Now the base line is parallel with the center front line. It may benecessary to use he Rotate to Initial Base Line command to

rotate the piece back on the straight of grain. The Rotate toInitial Base Line command is also available in the Piece Menu.

The diagram below shows the newly aligned pattern piece.




12

3 4

5

6

! Note: When using a line segment from the piece’s boundary, the direction and

sequence of choosing the two points affects the direction of the base line.

! Tip: If the base line is placed outside the piece after using this command,

use the Make New Base line command to move it inside the piece

(See the following section).

Make New Base Line

This command is used to edit base lines that run off a piece. Sometimes base

lines move to the outside of the piece while working with the Cut tool or using

the Base Parallel to Segment command.

This command centers the base line inside the piece.

! Note: The length of the base line may change during this process.

To Make a New Base line:

From the Piece Menu choose Make New Base Line.

The Base line is centered inside the pattern piece.




Guideline Parallel

This command gives the option to add a guideline as parallel to selectsegment.

To create a parallel guideline:

• Select a segment between two points.

• From PIECE pull down menu choose GUIDELINE PARALELLcommand.

• The guideline wills appears on the working area.

Seam

The Seam command contains five different options: Reseam, Update Notches,

Work on Seam, Switch all Pieces to Cut, Switch all Pieces to Sew, Unseam.Use Seam when seam allowance has been applied to a piece or pieces within

the current design file.

! Note: Creating Seam Allowance is described in detail with the Seam

Allowance tool in the Tools chapter.

! Note: To view or not to view seam allowances, select Seamed Piece from

the Display pull down menu.

! Tip: It is most effective to add seam allowances to pieces after the piece

has been designed, edited, and graded.




Reseam (F6)

When edits are made to a pattern piece after seam allowance has been applied,

and the Auto Reseam option in the Options Menu is turned off, the Reseam(F6) command can be used to update the seam allowance so that it follows the

new perimeter line. See the diagram below.




Update Notches

This command allows you to update the changes automatically with seam

contour only on notches (without changing piece contour while seam contouris changing

Work on Seam (F5)

This command switches between boundary lines (sew or cut). The solid line

indicates which line is currently selected. It is important to make sure that the

outer most lines (the cut lines) are solid before the design file gets sent intomarker making.

This command tells the computer to either make sew lines solid, or make thecut lines solid. The solid line is the line that the computer recognizes as the

active line. Edits can only be made to the active (solid) line.




Depending on which line is solid on the selected piece, this option reads either,“Switch to Cut,” or “Switch to Sew.”

! Tip: To see both lines, select Seamed Piece from the Display menu.

The diagram shows an additional example of Cut Lines and Sew Lines.




Switch all Pieces to Cut (F5 + Ctrl)

This command tells the computer to make all cut lines (outermost lines) on all

pieces in the current file solid lines. This command is used to eliminate havingto change each piece to cut lines one at a time.

Switch all Pieces to Sew (F5 + Shift)

This command tells the computer to make all sew lines (innermost lines) on all

pieces in the current file solid lines. This command is used to eliminate having

to change each piece to sew lines one at a time.

Unseam

The Unseam command removes seams from all the selected pattern pieces inthe file, all pieces in the working area, or from the current piece only. BE

CAREFUL using this command. If the solid lines are the inside lines, usingthis command results in pieces with dimensions of the inner line. If the solid

lines are on the outside, using this command results in pieces with dimensionsof the outer line. Seam allowance value is lost after using this command.

An example of when TO use this command follows:

Example:

Problem: A clothing style normally sent to contractor A to be sewn has astandard seam allowance of ½”. The same clothing style will be sent to

contractor B to sew. Contractor B uses 3/8” standard seam allowance.

Solution: Use SWITCH ALL TO SEW to make sew line solid. Now use the

UNSEAM command to get rid of all seam allowances in the selected style.Now all pieces will be their actual finished dimensions. Now add the 3/8”

seam allowance to all pieces.




To Unseam a Piece:

• Select the pattern piece that includes the seam to be removed.

• From the Piece Menu choose Unseam.)

• When the Unseam dialog box displays, select the desired option.

! Note: To replace the seam, the seam allowance must be redefined or use

the Undo command in the Edit menu.

The selected piece(s) will be unseamed.

Walk

Walk is used to verify that seams to be sewn together are the correct lengths.

Most often, seams to be sewn together are identical in length. In cases where

there are pleats, darts, or shirring fullness, sew able seam lengths are still thesame after the dart, pleat, or fullness amount is subtracted. Walking seams

manually is often tedious and inaccurate. The Walk command eliminatestedious seam verification.

There are six functions within the Walk command: Walk Options, Switch

Direction. Walk Mode, Notch Both, Notch Stationary, and Notch Moving.




To Walk Seams:

• Lock both piece together be using the Hand tool (The Hand Toolis described in detail in the Tools chapter). Select the grading

point (with the move tool) of the moving piece and, put it on thetop of the grading point of stationary piece (see the picture).

! Note: If the two grading points (on both moving & stationary pieces) are

not positioned exactly one on top of the other, the walk tool will be

disabled!

! Note: The moving piece is the piece that is moved with the Hand tool.

• From the PIECE menu, select WALK and then WALK again.The cursor arrow changes to the walk icon (two little feet).

• Touch on one of the seams (either the moving or the stationary)in the walk direction. The pieces rotate according to the

positioning of the cursor on the seam.

• Continue step three until the end of one of the segments isreached.




• From the PIECE menu, select WALK SETUP to view thedistance walked.

Walk Options

Use Walk Setup to set parameters for walking pieces. Also, use Walk Setup

for checking final seam distances of both the moving and the stationary pieces.

Walk Setup Dialog Box:

Ratio

Use Ratio in order for the computer to automatically account for fullness in

one of the seam lengths to be walked. A ratio value is entered for the movingpiece. The piece that has fullness applied should be established as the moving

piece. The pattern maker can accurately walk the seams while accounting for

the fullness by entering a percent amount to be applied to the piece withfullness (the moving piece). If 30% is entered, the moving piece walks 30%

faster than the piece without fullness (the stationary piece).




Step

Use Step to set up the distance to be walked for each step. This option is used

when the left and right arrow keys are used for walking the piece instead of the

walk cursor.

Direction

Check the appropriate box to set up the direction of the walk, clockwise orcounter clockwise.

Skip Darts

Check the Skip Darts box, in order to automatically account for a dart in oneof the seams to be walked.

Distance Moving

The Distance Moving Box displays the total distance of the moving seam.

Distance Stationary

The Distance Moving Box displays the total distance of the stationary seam.

Switch Direction (F11)

The Switch Direction command changes the direction of the walk from inside

to outside.

! Tip: To back up one step, use the Undo command in the Edit menu or use

Ctrl+Z.




Notch Both (F12)

Use Notch Both to place a notch on both the moving and the stationary seams.When this option is selected, the default notch type is applied to both the

stationary and the moving seams.

Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl)

Use Notch Stationary to place a notch on the stationary seam. When this

option is selected, the default notch type is applied to the stationary seam.

Notch Moving (F12 + Shift)

Use Notch Moving to place a notch on the stationary seam. When this option

is selected, the default notch type is applied to the stationary seam.

Fabric and Stripes

The fabric and Stripes feature is used to display fabric patterns on the screenso that the pattern maker can develop the pattern in concordance with the

actual fabric pattern to be used in manufacturing the end product. The SGS

software works with any .BMP file. Actual fabric can be scanned into thecomputer (provided there is access to scanning equipment) and then be pulled

up into the SGS design software.

The overall sequence of procedures necessary to display a fabric patterns on

screen and to relate pieces to the fabric follows:

First, select the fabric pattern. Second, create stripe lines on the screen thatcoincide with the fabric pattern. This step is done using the Grid and Stripescommand in the Options menu. The third step is to relate pieces to the fabric

using the stripe lines.




Fabric Pattern

Use this command to select a fabric pattern & attach a bitmap to materialtype.

The first step is to crate a material file:

• From the PIECE menu, select FABRIC AND STRIPES.

• When the dialog box displays, click on the ADD.

• Enter the material type name or choose from the list.

• Click OK

The new materiel added to metrical list in the fabric pattern dialog box.

The Next step is to attach pattern to the new material:

•Click on the bitmap file filed

• A small arrow will appears

• Click on this arrow to bring the browse box in order to select thedesire fabric pattern.




• select the type of the graphic file ( choose between:BMP,JPG,PSD and more)

• Click on the desire file.

• The preview of the pattern now showing on the dialog box.

• Click OK

• The material files save box will appears

• Enter file name in the file name field.

• Click SAVE

• Last : Change the piece material type.

• Open the PIECE INFO dialog box from the piece menu.

• Chose the new material type from the material field.

• Click apply




• The piece now will have the pattern that belong to this materialtype

! Note: To apply the fabric selection to the entire screen or to individual

pieces, use the four fabric tools located on the Advance Toolbar

(these tools are covered below).

• The same change can be made in the Global Piece dialog boxfrom the piece menu in order to apply the pattern to the entire

pieces on the working area.




Hide Fabric Pattern

Hide Fabric Pattern hides a selected fabric pattern from display on the screen.

Show Fabric Pattern

Show Fabric Pattern shows a selected fabric pattern on the screen. The fabric

displays on the entire working area of the screen.

Clip Fabric Pattern

Clip Fabric Pattern shows the selected fabric only on the pieces that aredisplayed in the working area of the screen.

Show Control Points

This tool toggles between displaying the control points of a piece and not

displaying the control points of a piece. Fabric appearance is cleaner when the

control points are hidden from view.




Relate Piece to Stripes

The Relate Piece to Stripes is used to help align pieces on the fabric.

Remember to create stripe lines using the Grid and Stripes command in theOptions menu before attempting this step.

To Relate a Piece to Stripes:

• Select the piece to be related.

• Select a point, a notch or an internal button on the piece to useas a reference point. This point is used to align the piece withthe stripe line on the fabric pattern.

• From the PIECE pull down menu, select FABRIC ANDSTRIPES, then select RELATE PIECE TO STRIPES. The

following dialog box displays:

• Enter the distance to place the piece from the stripe line. The

piece is placed according to the selected point. This point

appears as a dark dot in the dialog box. If a zero (0) is entered ineither the X or Y box (depending on which box is not grayed

out), the piece aligns exactly onto the stripe line at the selected

point.

• Click OK when the piece is aligned correctly.

! Note: The piece stays aligned with the stripe lines until the stripes are

removed.







Set Group

Set group is used to group pieces on the screen in relation to stripe lines.

To Set Group:

• Simply place each piece on the screen as desired in relation tostripe lines (use the instructions in the section above).

• Select SET GROUP from the FABRIC menu in the PIECE pullsdown menu.

Pieces are now set within a group related to the stripe lines. This group can be

carried over into the marker-making program.

Ungroup

Use this command to ungroup any previously set groups.



Chapter 6: Grading Menu 335

Chapter 6: Grading Menu

The grading procedure is a necessary stage in the apparel and garment making

industry. Basic grading procedures are the same using the computer as they are

manually on the table. However, manual grading is largely based on theexperience of the designer, pattern maker, and grader. Keep in mind that all

companies grade differently. The grading program designed by SGS providesall the basic grading principles and allows the user to apply them as needed by

their company.

Grading on this system is based on the delta X, Y system. Each grade point is

assigned X and Y values which are displayed in the Grading Table. All

grading commands also are available by Icon for your convenience. Thecommands perform the same function whether they are chosen from the menu,

or by icon.

There are two easy ways to identify icons. The first is to look up the icon inthe Grading pull down menu. Each icon is displayed to the left of itscorresponding command. The second way to identify grading icons is to point

the cursor at the icon. A shadow box with the name of the command will

appear.

! Tip: If you do not use grading, or you are not currently using the grading

package, turn off the display of the Grading Table to enlarge your

working space. This is turned on and off in the View menu under

Grading Table

Values are displayed in the Grading Table whenever a point is selected. Thegrading values are also used to grade internals, like buttons and lines.

! Tip: Copy and paste the grading value of a point and use it on an internal

element.




Stack Point

The Stack Point command aligns all graded pieces to a reference point in

either the X or Y direction. This reference point is also called the Nest Point.This command can also be used on an internal point or button.

The Grading software calculates the relative distance for each point and moves

all pattern pieces accordingly. Patterns may be left as they are in their new

position, and grading procedures may be continued.

To return to the initial position, determine a point at which all of the grading

points are positioned in the same location prior to using the Stack command.Re-stack the nest at this predetermined point to return to the initial position. If

no common point is available, simply add a button mark (without grading) to

the piece and use that point as the initial point. The extra button mark may bedeleted later.

To Use a Stack Point:

• Select the point on which to stack the nest.

• From the Grade Menu select Stack Point. The Stack Pointdialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired display mode. Select both the X and the Yfield to stack the nest on exactly one point.

• Click OK.

Stack Along Line

Allows you to stack grading according to a selected line as opposed to onlyone point.




Load Sizes

This command functions to load the existing size list from an opened rulelibrary file. This command would typically be used in instances such as the

one in the following example:

Example: A base pattern is digitized. The base pattern is to be graded on the

computer and a library of existing rules is to be used.

When loading sizes from a Rule Library to a file that already has a different

size list established, a message box for Load Sizes appears in order to matchthe two different size lists.

First size correspond to First size:

Select this option in order for the sizes in the Existing sizes column tocorrespond to the sizes in the New size column. Therefore, starting with the

First size, the sizes in the Existing sizes list will take on the sizes of the Newsizes, including the designated Base size (marked by the asterisk * in the Newsizes list). If there are more sizes in the Existing sizes list than in the New size

list, they will be deleted after the Load Sizes function is complete.




Base size correspond to Selected size:

Select this option in order to specify which of the New sizes is going to be the

base size when loaded.

To Load Sizes:

• Open the rule file to use by selecting Rules from the GradingMenu and then selecting Open Rule Library.

• Select Load Sizes and the sizes from the rule file will display inthe Grading Table size list.

! Note: Make sure that the rules and the base size displayed in the rule

library are compatible to those, which you are going to use.

! Tip: This command can be used to define sizes before starting to digitize a

new style. In this case, create a new style with a dummy piece, i.e. arectangle, complete the steps above, and then digitize the pattern.

Reshape Variation Grading

This command combines both grading fields (size variation) when there are

two different grading sets in the same file.

Select Reshape Variation Grading from the Grading Menu to merge both sets

to a single grading set (the sizes in this new set, will be the result of multiplying the merged sizes one by one).




Grading Table with Variation Grading:

Copy Grading (Ctrl + G, C)

Use Copy Grading to copy the grading values for both X and Y on a selected

point. The grading will be copied to the clipboard and remains on the

clipboard until another point of grading is copied.

Typically, another point is selected, and the copied rule is pasted onto thenewly selected point.

Relative (Ctrl + G, R)

Relative is used to automatically apply opposite grading on a piece when usingthe Paste command. A check mark next to relative in the Grading menu

indicates that the relative option is turned on.




Paste Grading (Ctrl + G, P)

Use Paste Grading to paste both the X and Y grade that was copied onto the

clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.

Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G, X)

Use Paste X grading to paste only the X grade that was copied onto the

clipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.

Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Y)

Use Paste Y grading to paste only the Y grade that was copied onto theclipboard. This command is used after the Copy Grading command.

Paste Around (Ctrl + G, A)

Pastes the “dd” (the diagonal grading that results from the combined “dx” and

“dy” grading) value of one grading point to another.

• Select the grading point to copy the “dd” value.

• Select Copy Grading.




• Select the grading point to paste the “dd” value.

• Select Paste Around. The “dx” and “dy” values areautomatically assigned values that achieve the “dd” grading.

Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G, F)Flip X Grading reverses the direction of X grading values. If the X value for a

grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip X reverses the X so that it is -1/2” for each larger size.

Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G, L)

Flip Y Grading reverses the direction of Y grading values. If the Y value for a

grade point is +1/2” for each larger size, Flip Y reverses the Y so that it is -

1/2” for each size larger.

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G, E)

Use Equal X Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire sizerange on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious and repetitive

typing.


• Type in the X growth amount for the next larger size from thebase size.



• Select Equal X Grading from the Grading Menu or use the




Equal X icon.


Equal Y Grading (Ctrl + G, Q)

Use Equal Y Grading so that only one value must be entered for an entire size

range on an even grade. This command eliminates tedious and repetitive

typing.


• Type in the Y growth amount for the next larger size from thebase size.


• Click the cursor with the left button one time to highlight theentire Y column in black.

• Select Equal Y Grading from the Grading Menu or use theEqual Y icon.


Zero Grade (Ctrl + G, Z)

Zero Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the X and Y

column. This command is commonly used to remove grading from a particularpoint.




Zero X Grade (Ctrl + G, N)

Zero X Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes, zero in the Xcolumn. This command is commonly used to remove grading from a particular

point.

To Use Zero X Grade:

• Change the X grading value in the size box for the next largersize to zero.



• Select ZERO X GRADES from the GRADING menu or use the

Zero X icons.

• All sizes are now grading zero in the X direction.

Zero Y Grade (Ctrl + G, O)

Zero Y Grade quickly makes all grade values for all sizes zero in the Ycolumn. This command is commonly used to remove grading from a particular

point.

To Use Zero Y Grade:

• Change the Y grading value in the size box for the next largersize to zero.





• Click the cursor with the left button one time to highlight theentire Y column in black.

• Select Zero Y Grade from the Grading Menu or use the Zero Yicons.

• All sizes are now grading zero in the Y direction

Sizes (Ctrl + G, S)

This dialog enables size name definition, adding, deleting & selecting base

size.

Append

Use this command to add a size after existing size (current selected size).

To Append a Size:

• Click in the box above where the new size will be placed.




• Select Append.

• Type the size name in the newly created box.

! Note: Some existing grading values may change when inserting sizes.




Insert

Use Insert to add a size before an existing size (current selected size).

To Insert a Size:

• Click in the box above where the new size will be placed.

• Select Insert.

• Type the size name in the newly created box.

! Note: Some existing grading values may change when inserting sizes.

Delete

Use this command to delete a size from the current size list.

To Delete a Size:

• Select the size to be deleted.

• Click Delete Size. The dialog box displays asking if you want to

resize the remaining sizes.

• Click Yes to readjust the sizing.

The selected size is deleted and all other sizes are resized accordingly.




Change Size Order

This command changes the order of the size list without having to retype overa size name.

•

Select the size you would like to move.

• The Change Size Order arrows are now accessible.

• Select the appropriate arrow to switch the selected size with theprevious or following size.

Base Size

Select the Base Size command to redefine the current base size. The base size

is user-defined, and therefore is not always the first size in the list. The basesize is not graded, meaning that the values of its X and Y grade points are

zero.

! Note: The new base size is the actual physical size of the new size name.

For example, if sizes for a design file are S, M, and L, and the base

size is changed from an M to S, the dimensions of the new base size

are the true dimensions of the S.




! Note: If the desired outcome is to change the physical size of the base and

maintain the size name, the size names must be changed to reflect

the desired outcome. A common example of this type of change is

when a company decides to make their base size (sample size)

larger, but they also want to keep the name of the size as its

original size name. In ladies apparel a company with sizes 2, 4, 6,8, 10, and 12 uses the 10 as their base (sample) size. They decide to

make their base size (sample size) larger in its dimensions, so the

10 are a physical 12. However, they still call the sample size a 10.

To Select a New Base Size:

• Under the Base column in the Sizes Dialog box, check the sizethat is to be the base size.

• The selected size is now the new base size.

Sizes Variation:

The Sizes Variation option allows the user to define two separated grading

systems. Each set has its own sizes (length sizes and width sizes). The usercan view both grading sets on the garment together by using the Reshape

Variation Grading option. (See Above)




To define two sets of grading:

• From the Grading menu select the Sizes option.

• Load Sizes. Use the Insert button to have smaller sizes or theAppend button to have the bigger sizes and name them. For

Example, Small, Medium, and Large.

• Click in each color box to define different colors to each size.




• Select the Sizes Variation tab. Enable the Variation Gradingoption.

• The sizes you have already defined are the first enabled activegrading set- name it in the empty field.

• Enable the second active grading set and name it differently.

• Select the Sizes tab again and define the sizes (names and

colors) for the second Grading set. For Example, Short, Regularand Long.




• To view the combination of both grading select ReshapeVariation Grading from the Grading Menu.

The two dimension grading sets appear on the piece (see the example below).

In addition, in the Grading table, you can see the size names in two dimensions

linked together and you can change or fill in the table new values.




Graded Nest

Allows building a graded nest using pieces that came from another CAD

application via a DXF, AAMA or any other file format where grading valueinformation and relationships between pieces is lost. For example, if a marker

is imported that contains a men’s shirt style including sizes S, M, and L, all thepieces are imported into SGS OptiTex software as separate pieces. No

relationships between sizes are imported with the data. The Graded Nest tool

provides the ability to stack all same pieces of different sizes into a graded nestand relates the pieces as the same piece but different sizes.

To Use the Graded Nest Tool:

• First, sizes must be defined using the Size command under theGrading Menu. Define the Base size and size range to be used.(See the Grading Chapter.)

• Display the point numbers for each pattern piece using the

display Piece Attributes dialog box in the View menu. Make

sure that the zero point to be used for each size is set to the samenumber. In the example below, all pocket pieces use point #1 as

the zero point. If the zero point for each size is not set to the






Grade Proportional

Grade Proportional is used to apply grading on curved pattern edges. For

example, proportional grading is commonly used on the hemline of a circle

skirt or on scalloped edges.

To Apply Proportional Grading:

• Select the Grade Proportional tool.

• Click on the first point from which the proportional grade

originates. In the example above, select point #3.

• Click on the last point from which the proportional gradeoriginates. In the example above, select point #1.

• Click on the point to receive the proportional grade. In the




example above, select point #4.

Rules (Ctrl + R)

The Rules command is used to create, save, and open rule libraries.

Create New Rule Library

Use this command to create a new rule library. When this command is

selected, the empty rule table displays on the upper left side of the screen. Thetable remains empty until new rules are added using the New Rule command

(detailed below).

! Note: A new rule library can be opened with at least one size defined in

addition to the base size. Once a library is opened, more sizes can

not be added to the pattern piece.

Open Rule Library

Use this command to open an existing rule library. When this command is

selected, the existing rule table displays on the upper left side of the screen.

! Note: Either Create New Library or Open New Library must be used in

order to access the rest of the commands available under the Rule

command.

! Tip: If all commands under the Rule command are in black print (not

gray), a rule library is currently open. To display the rule library if

it is not already displayed, select Grading Library from the View

menu.

Import AAMA Rule Table

This function imports a rule library from a different CAD system.




The rule library must be in the form of a simple .TXT file to enable the system

to understand the format of the rule.

Save Rule Library

Use this command to save a newly created rule library or to save new rules

added to an existing rule table

! Note: When saving rule libraries, the software will not save files with the

same file name in the same path. It will ask to overwrite the

selected file name, or save it with a different name.

Save Rule Library As

Use this command to save a rule library to another name. This command

creates a copy of an existing rule library under a new name while maintaining

the existing rule library under its original name.

! Note: When saving rule libraries, the software will not save files with the

same file name in the same path. It will ask to overwrite the

selected file name, or save it with a different name.

Close Rule Library

Use this command to close an open rule library. Anytime a rule library is

opened and left opened while a .DSN file is saved that rule table stays open

even when a new .DSN file is opened or when the grade program is exited andrestarted.

New Rule

Use New Rule to add a new rule to the opened rule library.




To Add a New Rule:

• Select the point where the grading to be made into a new ruleexists.

! Note: See the section on New Grading Rule Dialog Box for more options(below).

• From the Grading Menu select Rules, and then select New Rule.

• When the New Grading Rule dialog box displays, enter in a namefor the rule.

! Note: Rule names may be from 1 to 13 characters.

• Click OK.

The new rule is added to the opened Library.




! Tip: Remember to use the Save Rule Library command to save newly

added rules to the library.

New Grading Rule Dialog Box:




Selected Points

Use the Selected Points option to create a new rule from a single grading point

or from a range of grading points. A range of grading points may be saved to

one rule name. An example of when this type of grading is used follows:

Example: A company always uses the same grading on the rise of a pantpattern. The rise has several grading points. Instead of saving each grading

point as a separate rule, they save all the grading points on the rise under one

rule called, “Rise”. When they grade other pant patterns, they simply applythe “Rise” rule to the rise line without having to apply a different grade rule to

each grading point on the rise line.

To Create a Rule Using Selected Points with a Range of Points:

• Click and drag the cursor in the clockwise direction from to firstpoint to the last point of all the grading points to be included in

the new rule.

• Select New Rule from the Rules Menu.

• Assign the rule a name.

• Check the box Selected Points.

• Click OK.

! Note: Be sure to use the Save Rule Library command when finished adding

rules to the library. If this command is not applied, new rules will NOT be saved.

The dialog box defaults to this option as it is commonly used either with asingle point, or a range of points.




All Points

Use the All Points command to save all the grading on a single piece under

one name. To use this option successfully, be aware of the sequence of points

and the Start Point (covered earlier in this chapter). This selection was

formerly called Global Rule. This type of rule is used as in the followingexample:

Example: A Children’s wear manufacturer grades all top fronts and backs

with the exact same grading. All top patterns also have the same gradingpoints. This company creates global rules (using the All Points option) called

100TF and 200TB. When they create new top designs, they simply apply the

global rule to the entire piece, rather than repeatedly grading each individualgrade point.

To Create an All Points Rule:

• Click on the number one point.

! Tip: Use Point Numbers from the View menu to show point numbers.

• Select New Rule from the Rules Menu.

• Assign the rule a name.

• Check the box All Points.

• Click OK.

! Note: Be sure to use the Save Rule Library command when finished adding

rules to the library. If this command is not applied, new rule will

NOT be saved.




Fixed Rule

Use the Fixed Rule option to create a one-point grade rule for an even grade.

To Create a Fixed Rule:

• Open an existing grade rule table, or create a new grade ruletable.

• From the Grading Menu, select Rules, and then select NewRule.

• When the dialog box displays, enter a name for the new rule andcheck the Fixed box.

• After checking the fixed box, two boxes appear next to the fixedbox. Enter the X and Y growth values for the next largest size.

• Click OK. The values will be added for all the sizes creating an

even grade rule without having to type in each individual X and

Y value.

Delete Rule

Use Delete Rule to delete an existing rule.

To Delete an Existing Rule:

•Select the rule to be deleted from the Grade Library display box.

• From the Grade Menu, select Rules, and then select Delete Rule.

Rename Rule

This function enables changing the name of an existing rule.




Simply select the rule name you wish to change, then select Rename Rule

from the Rule Menu and change its name.

Apply Rule

Use Apply Rule to apply an existing grade rule to another point, range of points, or an entire piece.

To Apply a Rule:

• Select the point or points where the rule is to be applied.

• Select Apply Rule from the Rules Menu.

Apply Rule by Name

This command applies a grading rule to a grading point with corresponding

names without point selection.

Find and Apply Rule by Names

This command applies all the grading rules in the current grading rule library

to the grading points with the corresponding names.




Grading Library Dialog Box:

The dialog box displays the name and which points were originally included inthe All Points Rule.

Verify Rule Connection

Use this command to change the rule while verifying your rule connection to

the piece.

To Verify Rule Connection:

From the Grading Menu select Rules, and then from the Rules sub Menu select

Verify Rule Connection. The Apply Rule dialog box is displayed.




The Apply Rule dialog box:

There are four options:

• Apply All - this command will apply the changes to all theassociated points that was graded with the rule (the rule that waschanged).

• Apply point - this command will apply the changes only toselected point.

• Skip point - this command will skip the changes on the selectedpoint.

• Skip All - this command will skip the changes to all theassociated points graded with the rule (the rule that was

changed).

Export Rule Library

This function generates an independent rule library *.TXT files, which can be

processed separately, from the style file.




Sort Library:

Sort library by name

This sort function arranges rule library by name in increasing alphabetical

order.

Sort library by dx

This sort function arranges rule library by dx vales in increasing order.

Sort library by dy

This sort function arranges rule library by dy vales in increasing order.

Export Library to Excel

The rule library can be converted to excel file and can be mailed and reportedby using this dialog box.

Use the Excel file path to define or crate the report file.

The file can be set visible and it will be open after saving the file.

Check the “Append to existing file” box in order to save the rule library at the

end of existing file.

Mail Report - to mail the Excel file check the Mail Report box.

Import Library from Excel

To open a library rule from excel select the excel file from the disk by using

the; “browse” button to browse yours files.




Grade Rule Library

The existing libraries in PDS are to demonstrate the use of existing gradingrule libraries. They are only a suggestion for basic grading of pattern design.

The grading is based on standard grading methods. When using the existing

grade rule library, there are some important details to observe:

• The working units are inches.

• The rule names are per point and can be found in standardgrading books.

• When grading a pattern the baseline should always be parallel tothe horizontal direction.

• The start point is always the pattern’s bottom left corner and the

working direction is always in a clockwise manner.

• Position the piece with the center front or back line facing thebottom of the screen.

12

3

45

6

7

8

910

11 12

• When locating the grading rule named “crotch 1 & 2”, note therule is followed by a number. The number indicates that are two

rules existing for the Dart and the rule should be applied to the

points in a clockwise manner.




Grading using the rule library examples:

• Open a design file from C:\Texwrk\Examples.

• From the View menu check Grading Library. (Click the rightmouse button on the Grading Library and uncheck the

‘dockable’ option to allow the window to be moved).

• Click the right mouse button on the Grading Library and select

the Open Rule Library.

• When the Open Grading Rules Library Dialog is displayed, selectthe desired grading style. Click Open. The rule library sizes arenow available.




! Note: If the design file has defined sizes, these will be replaced by the sizes

in the rule library.

• From the Grading Menu, select Load Sizes.

• By using the drop down menu in the Grading Library, select thename of the rule to apply to the currently selected point. (Forexample: The lowest grading point in pants side seam is called

“hem+side seam” and the lowest grading point in pants inside

seam is called “hem+inseam”).

• Apply the grading rule to the point by clicking the Apply Ruleicon

Or from the Grading Menu select Apply Rule.




• Repeat step #6 and #7 until the whole pattern is graded.



Chapter 7: Pleats Menu 371

Chapter 7: Pleats Menu

The Pleats menu replaces the Axis sub-menu that was previously in the Editmenu (Add, Add by Angle, and Remove). Axis lines are now called Pleat

lines. The Pleat Attribute dialog box will display by double clicking on a

pleat line.

Add Pleat Lines

• Click and drag from the point where the pleat line will start tothe point where the pleat line will end.

• From the PLEAT menu choose ADD PLEAT LINE.

• A dotted line displays stretching from the first selected point tothe last selected point. The lines are displayed for all sizes.

Add Pleat By Angle

Use Add Pleat By Angle to insert a dashed line (a pleat, fold or a guideline)

between any two points as long as it is inside the piece’s perimeter. Thedirection of the angle is determined from a counter clockwise position starting

at zero (0) to the right side of the current point. It stretches from the selected

point to meet the piece’s perimeter at the angle defined in the dialog box. Anew point is created at that point. If multiple points are selected, multiple lines




are made, all defined by the same angle. These lines can be used as “Help

Lines” for final construction of the pattern.

Remove Pleat Lines

The Remove Pleat Lines command removes Pleat lines from a piece. PleatLines are created when a Pleat is made with the Pleat tool or by using the Add

Pleat Lines command.

To Remove Pleat Lines:

• In order o remove points from he Pleat Line, Select the pointsand drag them out of the working area.

• From the PLEAT menu choose REMOVE PLEAT LINES.

• All Pleat Lines between the selected points will be removed.

! Note: All Pleat Lines between the two selected points will be removed. To

remove just one of the Pleat Lines, select the first point, then press

and hold the Shift key while selecting the second point. Only those

two points will be grouped, and only that Pleat Line will be removed

Create Box or Knife

This command adds a box or a knife pleat from the Pleats menu.

• Click and drag from the point where the pleat will start to the

point where the pleat will end.

• From the Pleats Menu select Create Box or Knife. The PleatAttribute dialog box will display.

• Enter the desired pleat information.



Chapter 8: Darts Menu 373

Chapter 8: Darts Menu

A Darts menu is available with numerous new dart commands.

Open DartThe Open Dart command is a combination of two commands: Add Fullness

and Dart.

• Select the point where the fullness will start (the point where theslashing will begin).

• From the Darts menu, select Open Dart.

• The Values to Open dialog box now displays. Enter the amountof fullness to add.

• Click OK.

• The Dart Attributes dialog box now displays. The two pointsthat resulted from the added fullness are the two points marking

the dart legs.

• Enter the desired dart information.

• Click OK.

Open Multiple Darts

The Open Multiple Darts command creates several darts on a selected segment

at the same time.




• Click and drag to the points on a segment where the darts are tobe created.

• From the Darts menu select Open Multiple Darts.

• The Open MultiDart dialog box will display.

• Enter the desired multiple dart information and click OK.

• The darts will be created on the first and last selected points. If more than 2 darts are created, they will be equally distributed

between the points.

Create Dart

The Create Dart command creates a dart.




• Click and drag to select the first and last points of the dart legs(the points must already be on the line).

• From the Darts menu, select Create Dart.

• When the Darts Attributes dialog box appears, select the desiredinformation.

• Click OK.

Edit Dart

The Edit Dart command opens the Dart Attributes dialog box of a selected dart

by double clicking on the dart apex.

Close Darts

The Close Darts command closes the selected dart(s).

• Select the apex of the dart to close.

• From the Darts menu select Close Darts. The pattern will adjustas if the dart was physically closed.

• To reopen the dart, select the Undo tool.

Remove Darts

The Remove Darts command deletes the selected dart(s).

Copy Darts

The Copy Darts command copies an existing dart and pastes it in different

location.




• Select the dart by clicking on its apex.

• From the Darts menu select Copy Darts.

• Select the point, which will become the middle point (theoverlap extension), between the dart leg points.

• From the Darts menu select Paste Darts.

Paste Darts

The Paste Darts command pastes the copied darts to a select point.

Rotate Dart to Point

The Rotate Dart to Point command pivots the dart to a new location.

• Select the dart by clicking on its apex.

• From the Darts menu select Rotate Dart to Point. The cursorwill become the dart tool and will attach to the dart apex.

• Drag the cursor (dart tool) to the new location along theperimeter of the pattern piece where the dart is to be moved.

Click on the point.

• Select a point on the piece to pivot around the dart apex.

•Pivot to the desired location and click the mouse.

• A Move Dart dialog box will appear listing the percentage anddistance of the dart that has moved.

• Click OK or enter in the desired percentage/distance.




Rotate Around Center

The Rotate Around Center command is similar to the Rotate Dart to Pointcommand except the dart can be rotated on another point rather than the apex.

•

Select the dart by clicking on its apex.

• From the Darts menu select Rotate Around Center.

• Select the point of rotation (rather than the dart apex) along thedart line, the line through the dart center above or below the dart

apex.

• A dialog box will appear listing the distance from the dart apex

to the specified point of rotation. Click OK or enter in thedesired distance.

• Select a point on the piece to pivot around the point of rotation.

• Pivot to the desired location and click the mouse.

• A Move Dart dialog box will appear listing the percentage anddistance of the dart that has moved.

• Click OK or enter in the desired percentage/distance.




Fix Darts

The Fix Darts command fixes an existing dart by changing the direction of thedart apex. It is important to note the four options in this dialog box to turn the

dart triangle to and even sided triangle.

Make first and second edges average

Choose this option to move both dart points according to the dart edges’average.

! Note: The command location changed between versions, in version 7 the

Fix Dart command was located in the Design menu.




Reform Dart

The Reform Dart command sets dart overlap direction globally for all existing

darts in a style file.

• Select the type of darts to reform:

a. All Darts of Pieces in the File

b. All Darts of Pieces on Working Area

c. All Darts of Highlighted Piece

d. All Darts of Current Piece

• Selected Darts Only

• Select the type of Overlap:

a. No Change Overlap




b. Set Non-Overlap

c. Set CW-Overlap (Clockwise)

d. Set CCW-Overlap (Counter-Clockwise)

• Click OK.



Chapter 9: Design Menu 381

Chapter 9: Design Menu

The Design menu contains advanced design commands used to build and edit

patterns directly on the screen. Draft a closed perimeter piece on screen, edit

the existing piece, or use parts of other pieces to easily and efficiently createnew pattern pieces.

Create Parallel

Create Parallel is used to create a parallel segment from a selected section

along a piece’s perimeter. Create Parallel allows the user to define the widthor length of the segment as well as decide if the segment should extend to the

piece’s perimeter. When the end points touch the perimeter, the Internal Cut

tool may be used to split the piece along the new parallel line.

To Create a Parallel Segment from an Existing Section:

• Click and drag the arrow in a clockwise direction to select thedesired end points on segment to Parallel.

• From the DESIGN menu choose CREATE PARALLEL.

• Enter the values for the width or length of the parallel segmentin the Create Parallel To Segment dialog box. The system allows

the user to extend first and last point of new line by checkingthis option.




• Grades the new segment using the existing grading of theparallel segment.

! Tip: Enter a positive number to create an internal parallel line, enter a

negative number to create an external parallel line.

• Click OK




Cut Parallel

Cut Parallel is used to cut a parallel segment from a selected section along a

piece perimeter.

To Cut Parallel:

• Click and drag the arrow in a clockwise direction to select thedesired segment to create and cut a parallel line.

• From the Design menu, select Cut Parallel.

• Enter the values for cutting along the parallel line. Distance isthe width from the original line to the parallel cut line. Distance

on Contour is the length of the end segments created by the

parallel cut line. Once the Distance on Contour is entered, thesystem figures out what the Distance should be.

• If the cut parallel line needs to take on the grading of theoriginal line, check Grade New Segment.

• Click OK. The Seam Attributes dialog box appears in order to

add seam allowance if needed.




Segment Length

Segment length shows the length of any selected segment. This feature alsoallows for alteration of the segment’s length.




Copy/Paste

Choose copy/paste button to paste or copy length values from one segment to

anther segment.

Copy/paste button has three options:

• Copy - choose this option when you want to copy the lengthvalues from the segment length dialog box.

• Paste Length - choose this option when you want to paste thevalues of the copied segment to a required segment. You canpaste either value that was copied in the segment length dialog

or in the compare length dialog.

• Paste Delta - choose this option when you want to paste onlythe delta between the sizes from the origin segment to the

selected segment and not the segment value (you can use thisoption only when the “Base size only” box is enable and check).

Base size only box

This command gives you the option to control each size length separately andalso paste all the copied sizes length (from “Compare Length” table) to the

selected segment. The “Extend By” box in this table allows the user to decide

if copied line should be extended or not to meet existing lines of a patternpiece.

Refresh

Choose this option when you want to return to the original sizes.

Length

Length displays the length of the selected segment.




Extend by

Extend by provides the opportunity to change the segment’s length.

Curve

The curve option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting thecurve of the segment.

First Horizontal

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the first

point of the segment in the horizontal or X direction.

Last Horizontal

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the last point

of the segment in the horizontal or X direction.

First Vertical

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the first

point of the segment in the vertical or Y direction.

Last Vertical

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the last pointof the segment in the vertical or Y direction.

First Diagonal

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the firstpoint of the segment in the diagonal or X and Y direction.




Last Diagonal

This option extends or shortens the segment’s length by adjusting the last point

of the segment in the diagonal or X and Y direction.

Hole to Piece / Piece to Hole

This command creates a new pattern from internal/external lines (that can be

draw on a pattern or cut) on a separate piece. The new piece is displayed in thePiece Display bar.

! Note: Internal/external line needs to be selected before using this option

from the Design menu.

Convert Hole to Piece

Converting a Hole to a Piece:

• Select the internal/external line from which a new piece will becreated.

•From the Design menu choose Hole to Piece.

Convert Piece to Hole

The Piece to Hole command changes a pattern placed on a larger pattern to an

internal/external line (that can be draw or cut) in the larger pattern. Thesmaller piece becomes an internal/external line on the larger piece and is




removed for the piece bar. The smaller piece is removed from the Piece

Display Bar.

Converting a Piece to a Hole:

• Select the piece to transform into a hole and place it at thecorrect position on the larger piece.

• From the Design menu choose Piece to Hole.

Copy Hole to Piece

The Copy Hole to Piece command will create a new pattern from

internal/external lines (that can be draw on a pattern or cut) on a separate piece

and the hole will stay on the piece. The new piece ( a copy of the hole ) isdisplayed in the Piece Display bar.

Copy Piece to Hole

The Copy Piece to Hole command changes a pattern placed on a larger pattern

to an internal/external line (that can be draw or cut) in the larger pattern. The

smaller piece becomes an internal/external line on the larger piece and a copyof the new piece gets added to the piece bar.

Point Connection

Create Point Connection creates a connection between internal point andexternal contour.

! Note: You can choose that any drafted internal point will be connected by

default to the external contour if there is a snap between the point

and the external segment/contour. Use “Draft Setup” dialog box to

set default properties to a connected point under “Option” menu.




Delete Connection deletes existing connection between internal point and

external contour.

Point Connection Group creates and deletes a selected group connection

between internal point and external contours. Use “Point ConnectionGroup“command to load “Point Connection Group” dialog box.




! Note: Point Connection Group dialog box is a “modulous” dialog box!

This means that you can work on the working area while the dialog

is open.

Equal Segments

This command has three options: Definition, Options and Show with Color.

The Equal Segments command creates equal segment groups. After the user

identifies a group of segments, any change made on one of the group members

(adding notches, changing segment length etc.) will automatically update theother groups members according to the group’s relationship.

Equal segment groups modes: “Length only” and “Proportional”.

Definition




Group Names

The entire equal segments groups in the file listed below and the number of

segments in each group.

Set Color

Set the segments color here. All segments in the same group displayed on the

working area in the same color. Select the color and click the set button.

New Group

Use the name field to give the group name. Click the Create Group button to

create the group

Length Only

Check this box in order that the segment in the group will be equal only by thelength

Proportional

Check this box in order that the any length change on one of the segment willaffect the other member at the group by changing the length proportionally to

the original

segment.

Delete Group

Click on the button in order to delete the highlight group




Segment

Use the arrows to chose between the segment in the group in order to apply

changes to one of them.

Add New Segment

Click to add a new segment to a group. Select the segment and then highlight

the group to be adds to.

Options

These options will set the default for all the equal segment groups.

Create Equals by Cut:

Segments, Length only or None

Create equals by Mirror

Custom Fit

The Custom Fit system, should give the user the right tools to be able to take

almost any kind of garment, to create a set of parameters, that by definition, if

these parameters will be changed, the specific garment will fit any customermeasurements.




Horizontal Fit

Constrain a point to horizontal movement only.

After define the stable line, the pattern growth will occur from this axis and

beyond.

(For example: define the center front as a fixed line).

• Select with the cursor a require segment.

• From the Design menu choose Custom Fit >Horizontal Fitoption.

A colored Dash line will appear on the selected section.

Vertical fit

Constrain a point to Vertical movement only.

After define the stable line, the pattern growth will occur from this axis andbeyond.

(For example: define the center front as a fixed line).

• Select with the cursor a require segment.

• From the Design menu choose Custom Fit >Horizontal Fitoption.

A colored Dash line will appear on the selected section.




Fit to measures:

Adjusting the pattern

After the linkage is complete (all the pattern corners are signed in red crosses),

you have to adjust the patterns according to the customer measurements.

• Select the Custom Fit>Fit to Measure item from the Designmenu.

• You will get a dialog containing a list of all the bodymeasurements used in the measurements defining stage.

• Fill in your customer measurements and press OK. The patternswill be adjusted.

! Note: You can undo in order to cancel this operation as any other

operation.




Checking the results

Sometimes, in order to check that the Fit to Measure comes up with the

correct results, you want to see the old patterns and the adjusted one nested. Itcan be done using custom fit in the following way:

• After you finish the measurements defining stage (with theAdvanced tool), Open the Sizes dialog from the Grading menu.

Define two sizes, in your style file. Assign the names A and B.

• Open the Fit to Measure dialog. You will see two columns; onenamed A, the second named B. these are the two sizes. The

checkbox besides the names indicates if the Fit to Measure isgoing to be applied to the size.

Only for the checking, uncheck A (you do not want to adjust this size, it will

be used as a reference) and check B (this is the size you are going to Fit to

Measure).

• Fill in the B column the customer body measurements and pressOK.

• Now size A is the original pattern and size B is the adjusted onesand you see them as a nest

! Note: The stack point of the two sizes is point no.1 of the patterns. You

can change it using the Stack Point command from the Gradingmenu.

You can also define more than two sizes and use the 1st one as a reference and

the rest as body measurements of some customers.

Grading using custom fit




By defining a few sizes in the style file and using Fit to Measure on all of

them you can perform grading (by exact body measurements) of your patterns.

Standard measures

Use standard measures for getting the different values and sizes names for the

same body measures according to the different countries.

! Note: You can create your own tables for the countries or customer in

Measures setup table from Design menu.

Measures setup

In this table you are able to add your own parameters.

To change or add values:

•

Click on the Edit button.

• Choose the required group to change.

• Add or change the option in the opened dialog box.




Countries

Enter a required country (Table Title)

Sizes

Enter list of required sizes (separate from each other with comma) for the new

country you added or change an existing size.

Group

Type style groups for new country or add/ change in an existing group list.

(Shirt, pants etc.)

Edit Measure

Type the customer circumferences and measures (hip, bust etc.) or add/




Changes in existing edits measure list.

Measure Bitmap

Create .BMP file to add to a specific measure (The picture will show

In the box whenever a measure is selected).

Bitmap Directory

Create your own bitmap directories from the .BMP files.

Custom fit tools

The Advanced Toolbar consists of tools used for Advanced Features in PDS,

specifically, the Custom Fit Feature and the Fabric Feature.

With the advanced tools (vertical, horizontal, curve) you can teach the systemhow to Custom Fit a pattern.

Adding rules, which specify the wanted distances (vertical/horizontal) between

pair of points and the wanted length of the curves, can do it. This can be doneusing the 4

Customs Fit tools which appear in the advanced toolbar.

When you are done to define a segment, you will see that the two points havea small yellow balloon beside them with lines inside. The two lines have the

same color. This is an indication that the vertical or horizontal distance

between the two points is set. When the process continues you will see thatmore balloons are added to more points each of them contains line with a

color. The distance between pair of points, which has horizontal lines with the

same color, is set. The distance between pair of points, which has horizontallines with different colors, is not set. This means that the system cannot figure




this distance out of the rules specified and therefore more rules must be

specified before proceeding to the next stage.

The pattern is ready for set variables if all the corner balloons signed with redcrosses.

Otherwise, you have to define more vertical or horizontal rules between anyblue and red point.

Once you add such a rule all the blue and red points will get the same color

and you will know that the linkage is complete and the pattern is ready for

Fit to measures stage:

Vertical Measurement Tool

The vertical tool is used to fix the vertical measurement between pair of points

to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of

numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:BACK_SHOULDER/2+1 and means that the distance is a half of the shoulder

to shoulder body measurement plus one inch. The points must belong to the

same pattern and can only be points of the external

Contour (the current version supports custom fitting of external contour only,

future versions will support internals as well).

• Select the vertical tool, click on the 1st point, click on the 2ndpoint (one by one, the order is not important).

• Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in andclick again. An Edit Dimension dialog will open.




• In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the requiredExpression.

• After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rulewill appear on the screen.

• You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rulebetween points which sets the vertical distance between them to0.0 as they should align (pay attention that we set the vertical

distance to 0.0 and not the horizontal distance).

You can also take the vertical rule tool and add a new rule between points


attention that we set the vertical distance to 0.0 and not the horizontaldistance).

Expression

You can use any of the predefined measurements listed below by typing their

names or double clicking on any of them as part of your expression. The

predefined measurements are divided into groups. You can select

measurements from any of the groups. Use the bottom combo box in order toselect your required group.

! Note: If the body measurement you are looking for does not exist, you can

put in your own name, any name will do. You can also refer to the

Measurement Setup chapter to see how to add your own name with

your own pictures to the body Measurement list.




Edit Dimension Dialog




Taking a measurement

When you want to make sure that the distance between pair of points is the

same as the distance between another pair. The system fits one pattern to the

customer measurements and than takes a measurement from this pattern and

uses it for the fitting of another pattern. (A good example for this kind isArmhole and sleeve cap).

• Use the relevant (horizontal/vertical/curve) tool in order tospecify the distance or the curve length you would like to take

its measurement.

• When the Edit Dimension dialog is opened, specify in theExpression field the name you would like to give themeasurement (Any name).

•

Check the Take Measurement box. It will assure that thismeasurement is being taken and not given.

• Once you press OK you will see that the rule appears in <>brackets (<NAME>) which tell that the measurement is being

taken.

• Choose one of the Direction options to determine the

increase/decrease direction of the defined curve.

• By giving another segment the same Expression name andchecking the ‘Use Measurements’ box they will have the same

segment length.




Horizontal Measurement Tool

The Horizontal tool is used to fix the Horizontal measurement between pair of

points to a specific distance. The distance can be set to any expression made of

numbers and body measurements, for example, an expression can be:Side_Seam+1 and means that the distance is the side-seam body measurement

plus one inch. The points must belong to the same pattern and can only be

points of the external contour (the current version supports custom fitting of

external contour only, future versions will support internals as well).

• Select the Horizontal tool, click on the 1st point, click on the2nd point (one by one, the order is not important,).

• Drag the mouse to the place you want the rule to appear in and

click again. An Edit Dimension dialog will open.

• In the Expression field of this dialog, enter the requiredExpression.

• After you have added your expression, press OK. The new rulewill appear on the screen.

• You can also take the Horizontal rule tool and add a new rulebetween points which sets the vertical distance between them to

0.0 as they should align (pay attention that we set the Horizontal

distance to 0.0 and not the vertical distance).

Hide/Show measures

When too many measurement rules are created, and it becomes difficult to see

the patterns behind, use the measures item in the Display menu>Display

Piece Attributes in order to hide or show the measures.




! Note: when the measures are not shown, the 4 measurement tools are not

available.

Edit/Delete a measures

In order to edit a measurement

• Select the relevant pattern with the cursor.

• Click exactly on the middle of the measurement text.

• In the opened Edit Dimension dialog Alter the required valuesand press OK.

In order to delete a measurement, select it in the same way and either select

Delete from the Edit menu or press the DEL button on the keyboard.

The distance of an existing measurement can be edited with the Move Internaltool:

• Select the Move Internal tool.

• Click once on an existing measurement to move it.

• Click twice on an existing measurement to edit it with the EditDimension dialog box.

Curve length

Choose one of the Direction options to determine the increase/decreasedirection of the defined curve.

Use Measurements

After checking the Take Measurements box for a required




Segment, by giving the target segment the same Expression name and

checking the ‘Use Measurements’ box they will have the same segmentlength.

Measurements Names

Use the measurements names directory to define your measurements (usethe bitmap measurements to understand the meaning of a specific

measurements).

Pattern Group

Choose pattern group according to your pattern type! When you are taking

measurements from a shirt, choose the shirts group to reach specificmeasurements for shirts.

Industrial Fabrics

Create by Measure

Measure Tool General description

Pivot points: Two reference Pivot points. All measures are taken from thesepoints.

Pivot Line: A line that runs between the two pivot points. The two pivot points

are marked as AA and BB

Measure Point: A measure that is part of the (pool) measured contour

(Internal or External).

Measure Values: For each measure point you should input two values. One

from AA to the measured point and one from BB.




Curve indicator: Each Measure Point is Either a Line point or Curve Point.

Choose the right attribute for each point.

! !! ! Note: Since most pools have more curved edges then sharp edges, the

default of this field is curved.

Using the measure Tool

• Define a line with two-pivot point. The pivot points must be

outside the measured object area and both from the same side.

Ensure that the pivot line will not intersect the measured object.




Wrong pivot selection. Good pivot Selection

Enter the distance between the two Pivot points in the upper input fields.

• From each measure point measure the AA distance and the BBdistance and set on off the curved field as needed. Keep the

points input order in clockwise direction.

The Measure values must be positive and the Distance between the pivot pointcan’t be Zero.

The result of this measure will be the follow element:




(0,0) - The pivot Point and Pivot Line are part of the shape - (4,0)

After finishing to input the measure values press OK.

OptiTex Poll solution will calculate the contour.

The measured contour should always be above the Pivot line.

The pivot line will display as the base line, with an arrow.

Hole By measure

An Internal Hole (Contour)

If your pool is built of few elements specially an internal hole, You are able to

input the points of the hole, by using the option: ‘Hole by Measure’ which is

under the Design menu and the Industrial Fabric command. The internalcontour or contours, you can input few internal contours, one by one, can be

set only after you have calculated the external contour.

• Calculate the external contour.

• Click the external contour with the left mouse button.




• Choose the menu option ‘Hole by Measure’.

• The same input dialog box appears. Start to input the values of the internal contour.

! Note: You are using the same reference Pivot line for internal and

externals.

You can use external contours that were created by another CAD software. In

that case there is NO Pivot Points. You should click the external contour,

choose the ‘Hole by Measure’ and input the Pivot Points.

The pivot must be entered, but the internal contour might shift in relation to

the external contour. Any internal contour is related as hole inside themeasured element during the cutting process.




Create Parallel Cutting

The stripe cutting command is based on a user define information. The

information includes: The first cut, from the out most left point of the external

contour. Distance between each cut line.

Seam value, if any.

The cut lines are Vertical. If you wish to make them in another direction, you

can rotate the piece according the required angle.

• There is a minimum slice value that is very small, like 5 screenpixels.

• The details that was entered will be saved as defaults values for

the next time the parallel cut lines window will be opened.

• In the end of the cutting process the original element will besplit. Internal Contours will treat as hole.

The Cut elements will be divided to the followed element.




Scatter Pieces

The Scatter Piece command arranges pieces for plotting according to their

Quantities/Set and Orientation. It recognizes pieces with more than one

copy. There are four modes to the Scatter Pieces command:

• All Pieces

• Highlighted Pieces

• Working Area

• Current Piece

Unscatter Pieces

The Unscatter Pieces command cancels the plot arrangement according to the

pieces’ Quantities per Set and Orientation. Only one of the piece will appearin the working area. There are four modes to the Scatter Pieces command:

• All Pieces

• Highlighted Pieces

• Working Area

• Current Piece

Arrange For Plot

This command will place and spread all pieces, which are currently in thepiece, list on the Working area with a small distance is left between them. The

pieces will be placed as a nest and ready for plotting. Before placing the pieces

on the working area, a dialog box appears to define the width size of youpaper.




Scattered Pieces - Enable this option to scatter pieces according to their

Quantities per Set and Orientation while arranging them on the working area

for plotting.



Chapter 10: Template Menu 413

Chapter 10: Template Menu

The Template (TPL) files are drafting tools that are used during the design

process to help build and create new pieces and styles. Templates can be

made from pieces on the screen in the grading package or they can be digitizedinto the computer. For example, pattern-making tools used in manual pattern

making, such a French curve, can be digitized into the system.

Any piece can be chosen and saved as a template, or any template can be

chosen and used as a tool for creating a piece.

The Template Window is a special place reserved for templates. Any templatein use displays in this window which is located at the right hand side of the

screen. If the Template Window is not visible, select Template Window from

the View menu. The window will appear on the right.

Open Library

Select the Open Library command to open a previously saved Template (TPL)file.




To Open a Template Library:

• From the Template Menu select Open Library. The TemplateFile dialog box is displayed.

• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive or directory to select adifferent TPL file.

• Select the desired template library file from the File Name Listfield.

• Click OK. The Choose Template From Library dialog box isdisplayed.

• Select the desired template from the list displayed in the library.

! Note: The description of the selected template displays above the file list

box. This description was entered when the template library wasoriginally created.




• Click on Choose.

• Look for the selected template in the Template Window on theright of the screen.

Click on the template to display it in the working area and work with it.

! Tip: If the template is selected from the Piece Display Bar, copied, then

pasted as a new piece, it will then be treated as a regular pattern

piece and all commands can be used.

Add To Library

Select the Add To Library command to add additional template pieces to aTemplate Library.




To add pieces to a Library:

• Select the piece from the working area to be added to the library.

• From the Template Menu select Add to Library. The Save InTemplate File dialog box is displayed

• Select the desired option.

• Click OK. The selected piece(s) are added to the currenttemplate library.

! Tip: To view the new template pieces, select Choose from the Template

menu.

Save As

Select the Save As command to save the selected piece(s) as a new TemplateLibrary.

To Save a New Template Library:

• Open the selected style file that includes the pattern piece(s) tobe saved as a template library.

• OPTIONAL: To save individual patterns piece in the templatelibrary and display them on the working area.

•

From the Template Menu select Save As. The Save As dialogbox is displayed.

• Type a name for the new template library in the File Name field.

• OPTIONAL: Change to a different drive and directory if youwant to save the library in a location other than the default.




• Click OK. The Save In Template dialog box will be displayed.

• Select the desired options.

• Click OK. The selected piece(s) is saved as a new TemplateLibrary.

Choose

Select the Choose command to display the current template library. The

Choose command is used to delete a piece from the template library or to

choose a different template piece to display in the template window.

To Choose a Template:

• From the Template Menu select Choose. The Choose Template

from Library dialog box is displayed.




• Select the desired template piece from the library by clicking onit.

• Click Choose.

The chosen template piece displays in the Template window on the Piece

Display Bar. Refer to the Open Library command discussed earlier in thischapter for more information on working with template pieces.

Primitive Tools Bar:

This new Primitive Tools Bar feature allows the user to create tool bars fromtemplate pieces (any “*.tpl” file).

How to turn your template pieces into a tool bar:

• From Template menu create a template file or load an existing

template file (*.tpl).

• Now save your work and close OptiTex PDS and load again thesoftware.




• Now, go to “View” menu and open Toolbars dialog box:

• Select your Template tool bar from the toolbars list.

Once you created a template tool bar you can use this new tool bar to create

pieces from the template tool.

How to use template tool bar:

• Click on the desirable piece icon from the template tool bar:

• Now click one click with the mouse left button on the workingarea and the image you selected will be pasted on the working

area in 1:1 scale.




! Note: You can change the image scale by click and drag the mouse cursor

on the working area. To maintain the image proportions hole the

Shift key while you drag the mouse cursor.



Chapter 11: View menu 421

Chapter 11: View Menu

The View menu contains many on/off toggle commands that display pattern

pieces and the working area in many different ways. To select one of the View

menus commands, scroll down the menu list and click on the desiredcommand. If there is a check mark displayed to the left of the command, the

command is turned on, or enabled. If there is no check mark, the command isturned off, or disabled.

Template Window

Select the Template Window command to hide or display the view of the opentemplate window found to the right of the Piece Display Bar. If working with a

template library, this command must be turned on in order to view the

currently selected template.

Screen Coordinates

Select the Coordinates command to hide or display the coordinates display boxat the lower left corner of the working screen. The coordinates represent the

position of the cursor in relation to the 0, 0 point on the screen. The

Coordinates dialog box can be moved or repositioned anywhere on theworking area.

! Tip: Set the 0,0 reference point by selecting the Set 0,0 Point command in

the Piece menu.




Coordinates Dialog Box:

There are two columns in the Screen Coordinates dialog box. The left columnis the X coordinate and the right column is the Y coordinate. The first row

displays the absolute values of the X and Y coordinates from the (0,0) point.

The second row displays the absolute distance. The third row displays thelength of the line created from the first selected point to the second in the X

column while displaying the angle created in a clockwise direction from the

(0,0) point in the Y column.

Rulers

The Rulers option displays the rulers around the working area. You candisable/enable it from View menu by selecting Rulers.

You can also determine the 0,0 point for the ruler:

• Select a required point on a pattern with the cursor.

• From Piece menu select “Set 0,0 point”.

Pieces Bar

Use the Pieces Bar command to hide or display the Piece Display Bar. ThePiece Display Bar is where all pattern pieces contained in the open Style fileare displayed horizontally across the top of the screen. The currently selected

piece in the working area is also highlighted in the Piece Display Bar.




Piece in one scale

Use this feature to display the pieces proportional to their size in the display

piece bar

Piece List

Select the Piece List command to hide or display a vertical list of all of thepatterns that contained in the current file. When Piece list is enabled, a dialog

box with piece names, piece codes, piece materials and piece quantity is

displayed on the screen. The currently selected piece is highlighted in the list.

There is a dockable mode available for the Piece List dialog box that can beaccessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the dialog

box and selecting “Allow Docking”. When enabled, Allow Docking places

the dialog box at the top of the working area. When Allow Docking is not

enabled, the dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking onthe Piece List title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.

! Note: Click with the mouse right button on the columns heard to open

popup menu With three Options for your convenient: Sort Down,

Sort Up and Equal All.




Piece Attributes

Enables you to modify piece settings that affect their appearance on the screenas well as for printing/plotting. It has four tabs: Contours, Modes, Internals

and Global.

Contours Tab is divided in two sections: external and internal contour views.




Modes Tab is divided into two sections: display internals names and display

internals by mode:

Internals Tab is divided into two sections: internals (baseline, contour, circle,

button and text) and notches, darts, pleats section.




Global Tab is divided into two sections: piece description and piece view:




Bubble Info

The Bubble Info command displays useful information such as number, name,

mode, and angle in a “bubble shape” on Points, Notches, Buttons, and Dartswhen there is contact between the element and the mouse cursor. To turn off

the Bubble Info option, check “Don’t Show Bubble Info” at the bottom of thedialog box.

Colors by Mode

Click on Colors by Mode to display a specific color or line type according to

the element attribute. To change Colors by Modes select the Colors optionunder the Options Menu.

To Change Colors by Modes:

• From the Options Menu select Colors and Line Types dialog. TheColor and Line Types dialog box is displayed.




• Select Mode.

• Select the mode to change the color or line type.

• Select the new color/line type for the selected mode. The newlyselected color displays to the left of the selected mode.

• Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all modes have been assigned a color.

• Click OK.




Base Only (F4)

Select the Base Only command to display only the Base Size of the piece. Use

the F4 key to toggle between the base size and the graded sizes.

! Tip: To view only selected sizes, open the Grading Table and place acheck mark next to sizes to be displayed. Uncheck sizes to be

hidden.

Show Seam (Ctrl + F6)

Select this option to display or not display seam contour

Grading Table

Use the Grading Table command to hide or display the Grading Table. The

Grading Table contains grading information such as growth values for delta Xand delta Y on a selected grading points. Most grading operations arecompleted with the grading table displayed.

There is a dockable mode available for the Grading Table dialog box that can

be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the

dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable places thedialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled, the

dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the Piece List

title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.

! Tip: If you resized any of the grading table columns to minimum width and

it disappeared, restore it by resizing the grading table itself

Grading Rules Library

The Grading Library contains information about a new or existing gradinglibrary. This display is most commonly used when editing or creating grade




libraries. The table displays on the upper left side of the screen. It is

recommended to disable the grading library display when it is not in use inorder to maximize space in the working area.

There is a dockable mode available for the Grading Rules Library dialog box

that can be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area

of the dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable placesthe dialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled,

the dialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the

Piece List title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog

box.

Compare Length

Compare length is used to compare lengths between two or more line

segments. Length comparisons are made for all graded sizes. To display theCompare Length dialog box select Compare Length under the View menu.

There is a dockable mode available for the Compare Length dialog box thatcan be accessed by clicking with the right mouse button on the gray area of the

dialog box and selecting “Dockable”. When enabled, Dockable places the

dialog box at the top of the working area. When Dockable is not enabled, thedialog box can be moved freely around the screen by clicking on the Piece List

title bar on the box. Selecting “Hide” will close the dialog box.

To Compare Line Lengths between Two Line Segments:

• Select Compare Length from the View menu.

! Tip: When the Compare Length dialog box displays, it may be necessary to

hide toolbars that are not in use in order to maximizing the working

area. In order to hide toolbars, select Toolbars from the View menu

and uncheck toolbars to hide from view.




• Select the first segment for comparison, and press the plus sign at

the bottom left side of the dialog box. Notice that the segmentlength for each size displays in the first column in the table. This

column is highlighted in white.

• Select the segment to compare to the first segment. Press theminus sign at the bottom left of the dialog box. Notice that the

segment length for each size displays in the third column in thetable. This column is also highlighted in white.

• Scroll to the far right of the dialog box using the small black arrow at the bottom right of the box. Look for a column called

“delta.” The Delta column, highlighted in green, shows the

difference in length between the two segments.

• Click on the Clear button to clear all line lengths from the table.

• To turn the Compare Length Table off, uncheck Compare Length

in the View menu.

Comparison of multiple line segments may also be done using the Compare

Length feature.






column is highlighted in white.

• Select the second segment to be added to the first segment. Pressthe plus sign at the bottom left side of the dialog box. Notice that

the segment length for each size displays in a second additionalcolumn. This column is also highlighted in white.

• Notice that the sum of the two lines segments appears in the thirdcolumn from the left. This column is highlighted in gray.

• Select the segment to compare to the combined first twosegments. Press the minus sign at the bottom left of the dialog

box. Notice that the segment length for each size displays in the

fourth column in the table. This column is also highlighted inwhite.

• Scroll to the far right of the dialog box using the small black

arrow at the bottom right of the box. Look for a column called“delta.” The Delta column, highlighted in green, shows the

difference in length between the first two combined segments andthe third segment.

• Click on the Clear button to clear all line lengths from the table.

• To turn the Compare Length Table off, uncheck Compare Lengthin the View menu.

! Note: The three Dialogs: Grading Table, Grading Library and Compare

Length can be dockable. To change a dialog to dockable dialog,click on the mouse right button when the mouse cursor is located on

the top of the dialog (under the dialog header). A right “pop menu”

will be open, check the “Dockable” option.




Segment Length

Click on this button to use the Segment Length Option. For more information

on Segment Length see the Design Chapter.

Copy

Choose this option to select values to copy and paste. Select columns by bring

the cursor to the top of the column. The cursor will turn to a black arrow, andthen click on the mouse left button (the selected column will turn to black).

After you selected a column, use the copy button to copy values from one

column to another.

Update Measurement

Choose this option when you want to update the compare length table after

you made changes on the compare segments.

Clear

Choose this option to delete all the previous values from the compare length

table to start a new measure.

Calculator

This command will display a calculator on the screen and can be used while

working.




Tool Bars

The Tool Bars option in the View Menu controls the tool bars that aredisplayed on the screen. Each toolbar consists of a row of icons (small

pictures) that symbolize the function of each tool. Many of the tools are also

available in pull down menus. When all toolbars are displayed, the workingarea is smaller. Not all toolbars have to be visible at all times. To turn a tool

bar on or off select the tool bar. A check will appear next to the tool bars that

are turned on or displayed.

There are eight toolbars by default:

• System Tools

• General Tools

• Accessories Tools

• Edit Tools

• Insert Tools




• Grading Tools

• Dimension Tools

• Advanced Tools

• Dart Tools

• Template Basic Shapes (example of Template toolbar)

To Customize a Toolbar:


• Click on Customize.

• Click on New. Name the new toolbar.

• Click OK. The toolbar will display under the Toolbars tab and onthe working screen.

• Select the Tools tab. On the right, the buttons are displayed forthe highlighted toolbar on the left.

• Select the button to be placed in the new toolbar. A description of

that button will display at the bottom of the dialog box.

• Click and drag the button from the dialog box to the new toolbar

on the working screen.

• Lift the mouse button to drop the button into the toolbar. Repeatthis until all desired buttons are placed in the toolbar.

• Click OK.




! Note: The buttons from the Template Basic Shapes toolbar cannot be

transferred to a customized toolbar.

To Reset a Toolbar:

Resetting a toolbar replaces any buttons that were taken out of a default

toolbar.


• Highlight the desired toolbar.

• Click Reset.

• Click Close.

! Note: The Reset command changes to the Delete command when a

customized toolbar or a Template toolbar is highlighted.

To Create a Template Toolbar:

A Template Toolbar is a toolbar in which the buttons are pattern pieces, whichcan be stretched to a desired length and width.

• Save your file as a Template (From the Template menu, selectSave As.)

• Exit PDS.

• Open PDS.

• From the View menu, select Tool Bars. The Template will beadded to the bottom of the Toolbar list.




Status Bar

Select the Status Bar command to hide or display the Status Bar displayedbelow the working area of the screen. The Status Bar displays information

about the type of tool currently in use. Turning off the display of the StatusBar enlarges the working area.



Chapter 12: Options Menu 439

Chapter 12: Options Menu

The Options menu contains many on/off toggle commands that display pattern

pieces in many different ways. To choose one of the commands, from the

Options Menu select the desired command. If there is a check mark displayedto the left of the command, the command is turned on, or enabled. If there is

no check mark, the command is turned off, or disabled.

! Note: Be aware that by choosing certain Option menu commands, other

commands in different menus may become disabled.

Snap and Selection

Use Snap and Selection to determine what element to snap to on a patternpiece.




Snap:

Use snap to setup the distance in which the cursor selection will snap onto a

line or a point.

A common setting for this option is 5 pixels. When the computer is set at 5

pixels, the cursor selection will snap to the nearest line or intersection within 5pixels of space.

Element to select:

Sometimes when elements are close to each other on the screen, it is difficult

to select the appropriate element. This command tells the computer to only

select one type of element on the next mouse click.

For example, if there are several points near a notch, and the notch is the

element that the user is trying to select, but the user has difficulty selecting the

notch (due to all the points in the way), the Elements to Select command maybe used in order to establish that the computer only select a notch on the next

mouse click.

The default setting for the Elements to Select command is All; If the Elementsare changed, the change is only applicable on the next mouse click. After the

next mouse click is completed, the options default back to All.

Draft Setup

The Draft Setup option determines if the draft tool will default to internal or

external to your selected piece.

The Draft Setup dialog box has two commands in order to enable you to

choose the draft properties.




Next Draft Counter

This option enables you to choose if your contour to draft will be internal or

external to your selected piece.

External - choose this option for drafting External contour to your selected

piece (when you choose this option your contour draft will become an External

disregarding first draft location).

Internal - choose this option for drafting Internal contour to your selectedpiece (when you choose this option your contour draft will become an Internal

disregarding first draft location).

External or Internal - this option is the default, when this option is checked,

your contour draft will turn to an Internal or External according to the draft

location with regard to the selected piece.

If your draft will be drafted on your selected piece, the contour draft will beinternal to your selected piece. If your draft will be drafted near to your

selected piece, the contour draft will be external to your selected piece.

Point Connection:

This option enables you to choose if a point connection will be created every

time there is a share point on the draft line and the external counter.




The Crate Point Connection Draft message box will be displayed as a default

option when the draft line connect to external contour. Point on a counter canbe connected to other piece or internal line. Two or one piece that shearing the

same connected point will move together.

To create a point connection:

• Chose the desired sheered point.

• Choose the CREATE POINT CONNACTION command fromthe DESIGN menu.

• A hard connection creates and it can be checked in the POINT

ATTRIBUTES dialog box.

Create Point Connection in Draft Message box will be displayed during the working on draft line that

connects to existing point. Use it to create a point connection.




Grid and Stripes

Use Grid and Stripes option to set up a grid on the screen or to set stripes onthe screen. The Grid is useful when performing interactive editing commands.

Stripes are useful to view how a pattern will work on a striped material. Both

grid and stripe dimensions can be set up using the Grid and Stripes DialogBox.

Grid and Stripes Dialog Box:

! Tip: Use the F-7 key to snap the cursor to the closest grid point.




Colors and Line Types

The Color and Line Types command is used to determine a specific color for

each size within a design file.

To Change Color for General:

(Line type does not apply to General objects):

• From the Options menu, select Color & Line Types.

• Under Object Types, select General.

• Click on the desired object on the left.

• Click on the desired color on the right.

• Click Apply to view.

• Click OK or Close to accept.

Background – the working screen

Custom Fit – the old version of made-to-measure

Highlight Color – the color of an element such as point, notch, or button

when the cursor is on it

Template – the pieces in a template file

Grids – the grid when enabled under the Options menu

Stripes – the stripes when enabled under the Options menu




Digitizer Menu – If using a Digitizer Menu, will appear this color on the

Digitizer screen.

Digitizer Panel - If using a Digitizer Panel, will appear this color on theDigitizer screen.

Piece List Color – The color of the pieces in the Piece List

Piece List Background – The background of the Piece List

Selected Point Notch – The color of the notch when the corresponding pointis selected (the point connected to the notch).

Guide Line Color – The color of a Guide Line (created under the Piece menu

or pulled from the edge of the working screen).

Work Chain Color – The color of the line(s)/piece involved in a function

such as drafting, moving a point, rotating a piece, etc.

Mark Point Color – The color of the point marked when drafting, moving a

point, placing a button, etc.

Selected Piece Color – The color of the Selected Piece (the piece with the

dotted-line box around it).

To Change Colors for Sizes:

• From the Options Menu select Colors and Line Types. TheColor and Line Types dialog box is displayed.

• Select the size on which to change the color or the line type.

• Select the new color/line type for the selected size. The newlyselected color/line type displays to the left of the selected size.




• Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all sizes have been assigned acolor/line type.

• Click OK.

! Note: The color definitions are saved in the WIN.INI file. These same

colors are also used in the Marking and Nesting applications.

The Colors and Line Types option provides an Apply button in order to view

the color and line changes while the dialog is open.




To Change Color for Equals:

Equals define the color for Equal Segments created under the Design menu.

• From the Options menu, select Color & Line Types.

• Under Object Types, select Equals (can only be accessible if Equal Segments Group created).

• Click on the desired Segment Group on the left.

• Click on the desired color on the right.

• Click Apply to view.

• Click OK or Close to accept.

Fonts

Use Fonts to change the size and font of the text used by the text tool.

! Note: Not all fonts that available in the SGS software are, supported by all

plotters and or printers. If the printer or plotter does not support the

selected font, font changes will only be reflected on the screen, not in

the output files.

Working Units

Select the Working Units command to change the current working units toinches, millimeters, centimeters, fractions or decimals. All relevant

calculations and information displays will convert and display according to the

selected units.




When using the export to Cad-Cam function, it is important to set the working

units the same in both programs. This option affects the screen prompts anddisplays as well as determining whether or not the file is exported correctly.

Set Your Working Units:

• From the Options Menu select Working Units. The WorkingUnits dialog box is displayed.

• Select the desired working units.

! Note: If working units are in inches, the tolerance value can be set in

either decimal or fractional format by selecting the Decimal Inch

Format option at the bottom of the dialog box.

• Select the desired Tolerance value.

! Note: The tolerance value is used to define to how many decimal places to

round the values.

• Click OK.

• Attach Preview




You can attach a Preview Image to any Opened Style File. The purpose for

this option is; to add some more information about the loaded file and not torely only on the file name. The attached image can come from a scanner as a

Bitmap in a BMP format, or you can use any one of the graphic formats,

which appears in the Attach Preview ‘Open List’. The Default format to be

attached is always the last pieces, which were on the working area while thefile was saved. It is not possible to guarantee the following format from any

kind of graphic application. Therefore if you have any difficulties, please sendus a sample file with all relevant information and we will try to find a solution.




Grading Manually by Edit Tool

This command allows you to change grading points manually (without the

grading table) using the “Move Point” tool.

When this command is enabled, user will be able to move grading pointsmanually with the Move Point tool (only to a selected grading point). Grading

points of larger sizes than the selected size will be move when the Shift Key

and Move Point tool are using together for edited grading points manually.

Grading points of smallest sizes than the selected size will be move when the

Alt Key and Move Point tool are using together for edited grading pointsmanually. Any point on any size may be moved, interactively changing its

grading values. It is best used in conjunction with the Move Point tool.

Open Move Point Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the Move

Confirmation dialog box. The Move Confirmation dialog box is usuallydisplayed after moving a point or element of a pattern. The Move

Confirmation dialog box allows elements to be moved a specific distance.

When this dialog box is not displayed, elements are moved free hand, without

specifying a distance. When the command is disabled or unchecked, the MoveConfirmation dialog box does not display.




Open Move Piece Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the MoveConfirmation dialog box. The Move Confirmation dialog box is usually

displayed after moving a piece. The Move Confirmation dialog box allows a

piece to be moved a specific distance. When this dialog box is not displayed,pieces are moved free hand, without specifying a distance. When the

command is disabled or unchecked, the Move Confirmation dialog box does

not display.

Open Create Dialog

Select this command to enable or disable the display of the Edit dialog box.

This dialog box is displayed after using the Draw Internal Line, Draw InternalCircle, Button, or Notch tools. Disabling the Open Create Dialog box allows

manual editing without confirming the specific location or attributes.

Auto Reseam

Enable the Auto Reseam option in order to adjust the sew line to follow the cut

line when a change is made to the cut line. This option also allowsimplementation of a manual seam allowance. See the diagram below for

illustration.




Auto Update Notches

Enable the Auto Update Notches command to automatically update notchchanges on the seam contour (without changing the piece contour).

Lock Piece (F3)Select the Lock Piece command to lock the selected pattern piece on the

working area. Once this option is selected, changes to other pattern pieces on

working area can not be made. Only the pattern selected prior to choosing this

command is available for editing or outputting until the command is chosenagain or until exiting the program.

! Note: The F3 key can be used to toggle the Lock function on and off




Preferences

The Preferences option displays a dialog box that allows the user to set

multiple default option or preferences.

Preferences Dialog Box:

Snap Distance

Use snap to setup the distance in which the cursor selection will snap onto a

line or a point. A common setting for this option is 5 pixels. When the

computer is set at 5 pixels, the cursor selection will snap to the nearest line orintersection within 5 pixels of space




Minimum Screen Font Size

This option defines the minimum screen font size text viewed on the screen

such as Piece name, Size name, etc. It allows the user to size the view of thetest. It does not affect the size of text to printed or plotted.

! Note: To view Piece information on screen Display as Plot must be

enabled in the Display Piece Attributes option found under the

Display Menu. See the Display Menu chapter for more information.

Button Radius

Define the default size for all newly created buttons

Internal Text Size

Define the default size for internal text

Grading Rules Tables File Extension

Define the default file extension for grading rules tables.

Enable Auto Reseam

Enable the Auto Reseam option in order to adjust the sew line to follow the cutline when a change is made to the cut line. See Auto Reseam above for more

information.

Exclude Darts from Segments Length calculation

Enable this option to measure segments without including the dart.

Auto Update Notches

Enable this option to automatically update all notches.




AutoSave (Backup) file

Click the Browse button to direct the backup file (backup.dsn) to a specific

folder. Define the time interval for automatically saving the current openedfile under AutoSave Interval.

AutoSave Interval

Defines the time interval for automatically saving the currently opened file.This feature creates a backup file titled BACKUP.DSN.

The BACKUP.DSN file can be opened through the Open File dialog box. Use

the backup file if you forget to save a file before shutting the system down or

if the system is shut down incorrectly. After loading the backup and checkingits contents, the file can be saved again under the original file name.

The directory in which your BACKUP.DSN file is saved is determined in your

OPTIKAD.INI file. When installing the program for the first time, you will beasked where you want to place your \TEXWORK\EXAMPLES directory. This

is where the BACKUP.DSP is located.

The AutoSave command is not intended to make backup copies of all files. Itis designed to create a single backup copy of the file currently open in the

event that the system shuts down unexpectedly.

To Set the AutoSave Interval:

• From the OPTIONS menu choose AutoSave.

• When the AutoSave dialog box is displayed, enter the desiredtime. The file is saved every time the determined amount of time

passes.

• Click OK.




Working Units

Click on this button to change the Working Units and setup the default

working units for your file.

Colors

Click on the Colors button to make changes to the Colors options.

Fonts

Click on this button to change the Font options. See the Fonts section above.

Notch Parameters

The Default Notch command determines the default notch size and notch type

for all newly created notches.

To Set the Default Notch Type/Size:

• From the Options Menu select Preferences. The Preferencesdialog box is displayed.

• Click on Notch Parameters. The Default Notch Settings dialogbox will display.

• Select the type of notch from the drop down arrow to the right of the box.

• Enter the desired dimensions in the Length and Width fields.

• Enter an angle if the notch should be placed on an angle. (Forexample an outside V notch will have a 180-degree angle.)

• Click OK.




All newly created notches are created as the default notch type.

! Note: A single pattern piece may have more than one type of notch.

Change an existing notch size or type by selecting the notch and

pressing enter, or by using the Notch Attributes command in the Edit

menu.

Import Setup

Click on this button to make changes to the Import settings.

Export Setup

Click on this button to make changes to the Export settings .

Post Saving Action /Export to ASCII Application

The program Exp2asci.exe is a small application that will enable the user toread the header information of OptiTex DSN and DSP files. The Exp2asci will

convert the header information to an ASCII format, which will enable it to be

read by electronic spreadsheet (Excel, Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro etc.). The programworks in Win95 environment and can be run from DOS prompt and from

Windows Run or Explore. By changing the Properties parameter you can run

this program every time you send a file. The main screen looks like this:




The user should fill two fields (if they are empty) and press Start. The program

keeps the name of your previous output file and uses it next time by default. Ituses the name of current DSP or DSN file. The program reads the input file

and appends the information to the output file. It is possible to convert many

files in one session. In order to end a work session press End. The program

will not start if one of two fields is empty.

Error messages:

Please check that the input file does exist and full path is correct.

The file exists but it is currently used by another application. The Exp2asci

program can’t work with it. Please close the file or select other name foroutput file.

To Disable the Post Saving Action uncheck Run this Application after Save.



Chapter 13: Help Menu 459

Chapter 13: Help Menu

The Help menu provides general information and help regarding SGSsoftware.

Index (F1)

The Index command opens on-line help services provided by SGS. This is a

comprehensive guide to product information including a full glossary. This

command works like other on-line Help files; click on the desired topic to

view related information. Information may be viewed on screen or printed outfor future reference.

To access on-line Help:

• From the Help Menu select Index or press F1.

The Command Summary screen will be displayed which offers a completelisting of all the topics in the program. This on-line help program also includes

a Search command, which will search by topic, and a History command,

which will show a log of the recently viewed topics.

Keyboard Map

The Keyboard Map command opens a table of shortcuts that can be veryuseful to you. A new user can print this table and use it as a reference for allavailable keyboard shortcuts.




Scenario (Ctrl + F1)

This option will play a short self-running scenario of how to use a specific

Tool.

To use Scenario:

• Select the desired tool.

• Under the Help Menu select Scenario.

• A dialog box with a list of scenarios is displayed.

• Click on one of the options and a self-running demo will start to

play.

Using HelpSelect Using Help to learn the basics of using the on line help program.

Check Plug Protection

The Check Plug Protection option is used to view the plug (key) number. Itmay be necessary to look up this number when calling for technical support.

Check Plug Protection also shows the SGS modules that you are entitled to

use. Furthermore, when purchasing a new SGS module, the Check PlugProtection box is used to enter the codes that activate the new module. In order

to activate a new module, click on the SET button to the right of the new

module listed in the Check Plug Protection dialog, and then enter the twocodes and click OK.




SGS on Line

Enables the user to connect to an Internet browser for access to:

SGS Home Page – Directly links from PDS to SGS Home Page.

SGS Support page – Directly links from PDS to SGS Support Page.

Send File – Sends a DSN file to user’s mailbox without having to attach the

DSN file.

Tip of the Day

Provides you with useful tips on features of PDS.

About OptiTex PDS

Choose the About OptiTex PDS command to find the version of software you

are currently using. This information is necessary when contacting TechnicalSupport for help with your SGS software.




Send File

This function enables you to sand a file to any e-mail adders. You can sand it

to mailboxes in your company or around the world. An Internet accessrequired.

To send a file:

• Choose the SEND FILE command from the HELP menu.

• The E-MAIL dialog box appears.

• Enter the e-mail address that you want to send the message to.

• You have the option to attach more files and to add the messagename and subject.




• Click O.K.

• The message with the attached files will be send to the desiredaddress




How to Contact SGS

SGS Israel for international sales marketing and technical support:Scanvec Garment Systems (SGS)

Ravnitzky 6

Sgula Industrial Park Petach-Tikva 49221, Israel

Tel.: 972-3-904-9979

Fax: 972-3-904-2710

SGS USA for inside the US sales and marketing:

ScanVec Garment Systems (SGS)

International Plaza Two, Suite 625Philadelphia, PA 19113-1518, USA

Tel.: 610-521-5970 Toll free: (US & Canada) 877 RING OPTI

Fax: 610-521-1564

E-Mail: E-Mail Technical Support: [email protected]

E-Mail Sales & Marketing: [email protected]

Web Site: http://www.optitex.com



Chapter 14: Using the Mouse 465

Chapter 14: Using the Mouse

The mouse is the main pointing device and tool and is used for the majority of

all pattern design, grading, and marking operations. How well the mouse is

handled affects user productivity. Therefore, it is important to understand howto operate the mouse efficiently.

The standard type of mouse used with Microsoft applications has two buttons,

but there are many other compatible mouse devices with three buttons. SGS

software uses only two of the available buttons:

The left button functions as the pointing device and executes most of thecommands. The right mouse button provides quick and easy access to many of

the commands and features in the SGS software.

Right Mouse Button

The right mouse button provides easy access to many SGS commands and

features without having to move the mouse up to the toolbar or up to the pulldown menus. The Right Mouse Button reduces time spent on moving the

cursor around the screen. When used properly, the Right Mouse Button allows

for faster work on a design file.

Anytime while working on a design file, click on the right mouse button to

display a floating pop up menu near the cursor. To activate commands in thepop up menu, click on the command using the left mouse button.




Select Tool

Use Select Tool to change the cursor back to the normal arrow pointer. Thiscommand reverts back to the normal arrow pointer when another tool is in use.




Edit

Use Edit to quickly access commonly used commands in the Edit pull down

menu such as Undo and Redo.

! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter for more information on Edit commands.




Insert

Use the Insert command to insert components such as notches, points, darts,

fullness, pleats, and lines.

! Note: Refer to the Tools chapter for more information on the commands

within the Insert command.




Tools




Use the Tools command to access many of the tools located on the toolbars

such as Delete, Move, Walk, Circle, Button, and Text.


within the Tools command.

Zoom

Use the Zoom command to access the scaling tools used to scale all pieces in

the working area and to enlarge part of the screen.


within the Zoom command.




Transform

Use the transform command to easily access commands that manipulate

pieces, such as Rotate, Flip, Shrink and Scale.

! Note: Refer to the Piece chapter for more information on the commands

within the Transform command.




Piece

Use the Piece command to remove pieces from the working area either by

Removing Current, Replacing Old, or Making New.

! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter under Clear Pieces.




Move Base Line

Use Move Base Line command to move the base line without having to use

the Edit pull down menu.

! Note: Refer to the Edit chapter under Move Base Line for moreinformation on this command.

Delete

Use Delete command to delete a piece without having to use delete button on

your keyboard.

Attribute

Use Attribute command to open “piece info” dialog without having to use

Enter Key on your keyboard.




Segment

Use the Segment command to access the entire Segment pull down menuwithout having to physically go up to the segment pull down menu.




Grading

Use the Grading command to access the entire Grading pull down menuwithout having to physically go up to the Grading pull down menu.




! Note: Refer to the Grading chapter for more information on the commands

within the Grade command.



Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands 477

Chapter 15: Keyboard Commands

The keyboard topics below are shortcut commands. Some are specific to SGSsoftware, while others are general Windows shortcut commands that can be

used while working in programs.

SGS Keys commands

The following keys are shortcut keys within the SGS software.

Key(s) Function

Ctrl+N New File

Ctrl+O Open File

Ctrl+I or Tab Piece Information

Enter Information

Spacebar Activates the move tool (the hand icon)

Spacebar + Ctrl Activates the move internal tool

(the yellow hand icon)

End Select Tool

Tab Change Piece Selection

Keyboard Arrows Change External Point selection

Right Mouse Disengages tool

Shift + Enter Edit line attributes




This is the list of accelerators that are activated with F keys:

F2:

This key opens the Angle window used with several tools: Cut, Rotate, and

Split.

• Choose Cut icon.

• Click the first point.

• Drag the mouse, moving the cursor toward the opposite contourline facing the next cut point.

• To define an angle for the cut, click the F2 key. Otherwise, holdthe Ctrl key down and click the left mouse button on the

contour.

F3:

Locks the working tools on to the current piece. A second click on F3 unlocks

the cursor from the current piece. The word “Lock” appears at the bottom right

corner of the screen.

F4:

Switches the display of pieces on the working area between Base only and All

Sizes.

F5:

Flips the current active contour (indicated by a solid line) between the innerseam line and the outer perimeter.




F6:

Recalculates the seam if a seam exists. F6 is mainly used after moving points

with seam value.

F7:

Forces the cursor to snap to the nearest grid point regardless the tool type.

F8:

Use this key to display external segment length (contour between two grading

points) and use the Shift key (F8 + Shift) to display internal segment length.

F9:

Use this key as a shortcut to ‘Separate’ Tool

F10:

Use this key to display “Piece Attribute” dialog (from View menu).

F11:

Use this key to change “Walk Direction” when you use the “Walk Tool”.

F12:

Use this key to add notches to pieces (moving and stationary) when you work

with “Walk Tool”. Use Ctrl key and F12 key to add notch only to stationarypiece and Shift key and F12 key to add notch to moving piece.




Cursor Movement Keys

Key(s) Function

Direction key Move the cursor left, right, up, or down in

a field.

End, Ctrl+Right Arrow Move to the end of a field.

Home, Ctrl+Left Arrow Move to the beginning of a field.

Page Up, Page Down Move up or down in a field, one

screen at a time.

Tab Move from piece to piece along

the piece bar.

Shift + Tab Move from piece to piece in reverse alongthe piece bar.

Dialog Box Keys

Key(s) Function

Tab Move from field to field within a dialog box.

Shift+Tab Move from field to field in reverse order.

Alt+Letter Move to the selected option or group.

Enter Execute a command button.

Esc Close a dialog box without completing the

command.




Alt+Down Arrow Open a drop-down list box.

Spacebar Cancel a selection in a list box.

Ctrl+ Slash Select all the items in a list box.

Ctrl+Backslash Cancel all selections except the current selection.

Shift+ Home Extend selection to first character in a text box.

Shift+ End Extend selection to last character in a text box.

Editing Keys

Key(s) Function

Backspace Delete the character to the left of the cursor.

Delete Delete the character to the right of the cursor.

Help Keys

Key(s) Function

F1 Open the on-line help program.

F1 + Ctrl Open to Scenario program.

F1 + Shift Create accelerator to the “Context Help Tool”.




System Keys

The following keys can be used from any window, regardless of the

application you are using.

Key(s) Function

Ctrl + Esc Switch to the Task List.

Alt + Esc Switch between all open, full screen applications.

Alt + Tab Toggle between all open applications.

Alt + Space Open the Control menu for an application

window.

Alt + Hyphen Open the Control menu for a document window.

Alt + F4 Close a window or open application.

F1 Open the on-line help program.

Text Selection Keys

Key(s) Function

Shift + Arrow Select one character at a time from left to right.

Shift + End Select text to the end of the line.

Shift + Home Select text to the beginning of the line.

Shift + Pg Dn Select text down one full window.

Shift + Pg Up Select text up one full window.




keyboard shortcuts

Key(s) Function

Shift + S (or I) allows snap to Piece internals only.

Ctrl will ignore Snap to any Point objects.

Zoom

Ctrl with Zoom All tool sets Selected Piece on whole screen.

Ctrl with Zoom Real tool sets real scale when current screen center

remains (without the second click)

Shift with Zoom Out increase zoom (Zoom Out counteraction).

Ctrl with Zoom Rectangle works as Zoom Real with center of the rectangle.

Pieces List / Pieces Bar Click

Shift pressed Marks Piece.

Ctrl pressed will Scatter Piece

Ctrl + Shift pressed will remove Scatter copies. From theboard.

Alt pressed will place Piece on its previous on-boardposition anyway.

Digitizer

Ctrl key pressed in Point mode creates non-grade curve Point.




Alt + Left-mouse-button provides Undo.

Shift + Left-mouse-button closes Contour.

Drag and Move Tool

Shift + V allows Vertical moving only.

Shift + H allows Horizontal moving only.

Shift + U any moving available.

Grading Manually

Shift during Point Moving will move also all Sizes Greater then current.

Alt during Point Moving will move also all Sizes Less then current.

Round Corner

Shift will solve self-intersection

Shift + Ctrl lets the old (version 7) algorithm to work.

Mirror

Shift sets Notches on mirror line.

Ctrl deletes original Piece after Mirror.

Darts

Alt with Create Dart tool works as Open Dart.

Alt with Move Dart tool allows center rotation do not be center of Dart.




Edit Panel

Tab moves selection to the next Panel field.

Shift + Tab moves selection to the previous Panel field.

Primitive Tool

Shift key pressed will ensure Proportional Scale.

Ctrl key pressed will show Segments Length.

Other

Alt key pressed will ensure appearance of Move Point, MovePiece and Open Create (for Internals) dialogs

even Preference attribute to view such dialogs is

off.

Shift + Z accelerator to Save CUS-file (for Modulate).

Shift key pressed with Text tool allows changing of Piece

Description position.

Shift key pressed during Build Piece exclude area fromPiece.

Shift key pressed will prevent new element creation in

Button, Circle and Notch tools.

Shift key pressed with Add Point tool will add Grade

Point.

Shift key pressed with Cut Piece tool will add Curve and

Non-Grade Point.




Shift key pressed with Draft tool will add Curve and

Non-Grade Point.

Shift key pressed in Rotate dialog will choose Piecesgroup (not current only) to Rotate.

Shift key pressed with Adjust Piece Description inGlobal Info dialog will recalculate Description

Center and Angle for all Pieces (regular – forPieces without Descriptions only).

Ctrl key pressed creates the new Guideline (instead of move current).

Ctrl key pressed into in Rules Library and in Sizes

dialog will let to add more then one Size during

Insert / Append command.

Ctrl key pressed allows to Move / Copy more then one

Selected Internals.

Other (alternate actions)

Alt key pressed during Fold In sets Point to Point modefor folding axe selection

Alt key pressed during Move Internal will Join Internalcontours.

Shift key pressed chooses alternate Paste GradingRelative algorithm.

Shift key pressed chooses alternate Move Proportional

algorithm.




Shift key pressed changes Move Internals tool to

work as Copy Internals.

Ctrl key pressed changes Delete Points tool to work as

Close Fullness

PDS ShortCut Keys

KeySpecialkeys

Menucommand

Description

A Alt Zooming Shortcut to ‘Zoom In’ Tool

A Ctrl Draft Tool

dialog

When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"

dialog is disabled, A + Ctrl will open "Angle From

Segment" dialog.

C Ctrl Edit / Copy

Piece

Copy piece to Windows clipboard.

D Ctrl Measure Tool Accelerator

<Insert> Ctrl Edit / Copy

Piece

Copy piece to Windows clipboard.

G Letter on

keyboard

Use for hiding guide lines

G Ctrl Grading / &ldots;

Popup Menu.

HShift Draft Tool Locks the tool for dragging in horizontal direction

M Ctrl Draft Tool

dialog

When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"

dialog is disabled, M + Ctrl will open "PointPosition on Segment " dialog.

I Ctrl Piece /

Info&ldots;

Information & restrictions of selected piece.

N Shift Snaps only to Notches

N Ctrl File / New Close the current Style and create a new.




O Ctrl File /

Open&ldots;

Open an existing Style.

R Ctrl Grading / Rules

/ &ldots;

Popup Menu.

P Shift Snaps only to Points

P Ctrl File / Print&ldots;

Print the pieces in the working area.

Space

Key

Ctrl Move Internal Shortcut to ‘Move Internal’ Tool

S Ctrl File / Save Save the current Style.

T Ctrl Draft Tooldialog

When using the draft tool and the "Move Point"dialog is disabled, T + Ctrl will open "Angle To

Segment" dialog.

V Shift Draft Tool

dialog

Locks the tool for dragging in vertical direction

V Ctrl Edit / Paste

Piece

Paste piece from clipboard.

U Shift Draft Tool Cancel Shift+H and Shift+V commands

<Insert> Shift Edit / Paste

Piece

Paste piece from clipboard.

X Alt Zooming Zoom Out

X Ctrl Edit / Cut Piece Remove pieces and put it to Windows clipboard.

<Delete> Shift Edit / Cut Piece Remove pieces and put it to Windows clipboard.

Y Ctrl Edit / Redo Redo.

<backsp

ace>

Shift + Alt Edit / Redo Redo.

Z Alt Zooming Zoom In

Z Ctrl Edit / Undo Undo.

Alt Ctrl Zooming Shortcut to Zoom In on a selected piece

<backsp

ace>

Alt Edit / Undo Undo.

<Delete> Edit / Delete Delete the selected point or internal element.




<Enter> Edit / Edit Edit the attributes of the selected point or internal

element.

<Left

arrow>

Ctrl Go to the previous point

<Right

arrow>

Ctrl Go to the next point

<F1> Ctrl Help / Scenario Show the selected tool Scenario.

<F1> Shift Context Help.

<F2> Cutting Line

direction dialog

Use the F2 key when you are working with one of

the following tools: cut, axis, draft, pleat and addfullness to create a shortcut to "Cutting Line

direction" dialog.

<F3> Options / Lock

Piece

Enables only the selected piece to be edited.

<F4> Display / BaseOnly

Show base size only on / off.

<F4> Ctrl Grading table Shortcut keys to open Grading table<F5> Piece / Seam /

Switch Cut/Sew

Switch between sewing and cutting contours of

the current piece.

<F5> Ctrl Piece / Seam /

Switch AllPieces to Cut

Switch all pieces to work on Cut contours.

<F5> Shift Piece / Seam /

Switch All

Pieces to Sew

Switch all pieces to work on Sew contours.

<F6> Piece / Seam / Reseam

Reseam the selected piece.

< F6> Ctrl An Accelerator to changing Seam display mode.<F6> Shift An Accelerator to Auto update for notch

command.

<F7> Snap to Grid

point

When you are in the Grid mode, use the F7 key to

snap to Grid point.

<F8> Show Segment Click on F8 key to display Segment Length.




length

<F8> Shift Show Internal

Segment length

Click on F8 with Shift key to display Internal

Segment Length.

<F9> Separate Tool Shortcut Key to the "Separate Tool".

<F10> Display /

Display PieceAttributes&ldots

Display Piece Attributes dialog.

<F11> Piece / Walk /

Switch Direction

Change the walk direction.

<F12> Piece / Walk / Notch Both

Add notches to stationary and moving pieces.

<F12> Ctrl Piece / Walk /

Notch Stationary

Add notches to stationary piece.

<F12> Shift Piece / Walk /

Notch Moving

Add notches to moving piece.



Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation 491

Chapter 16: Digitizer Installation

Installing the Numonics AccuGrid

There are 3 main steps to configuring any digitizer the Numonics AccuGrid

for use with the SGS software: 1) configuring the digitizing tablets, 2)Configuring the serial port, 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGS software.

! Note: Do not install the Numonics Software!

Configuring the Tablet

• Turn off the computer.

• Connect the digitizer to a serial port on the computer,preferably COM1 or COM2. Both the mouse and the digitizer

can be used if they are configured to separate ports.

• Turn on the digitizing tablet and the computer. Tape the SetupMenu Configuration paper that came with the digitizer on the

tablet. This menu can be found on page A11 in the digitizermanual or it may be a loose piece of paper shipped with the

digitizer tablet.

! Note: the next few steps require quiet in order to hear the digitizer sounds.

Do not attempt to proceed with these directions in a working

manufacturing environment.

• To activate the Numonics Softkey Setup Menu, press and holdbutton #1 in the box below MENU on the digitizer tablet. Youwill hear a steady tone, keep the button pressed until the tone

quits. The digitizer will then emit a series of “beeps.”

• Move the crosshair over the MENU ORIGIN mark and press




button #1. The MENU ORIGIN mark is a circle with a cross

located at the lower center of the paper menu that is taped to theboard. The digitizer will emit a confirmation chirp.

! Note: The Menu Origin can be found next to the Numonics phone number

on the Setup Menu Configuration sheet that came with the digitizer

tablet.

• Select each option by positioning the crosshair of the digitizerover the box next to the desired setting and press button #1. Youwill hear a series of confirmation chirps after each selection. The

following settings must be selected for use in the SGS Grade,

SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize Software:

Emulation/Output format

Numonics ASCII

ASCII Options

The following are selected: CR, LF, Sep, and Flag

Interface

Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Modes

Modes = Point




Increment size = 0 or OFF

Stream Rate = MAX

Resolution

Lines Per Inch = 1000

• Click “Application 1” in the SAVE CONFIGURATIONportion. You will hear the Confirmation Beeps.

• Click “Confirm Changes” in the EXIT portion to save changesand exit setup.

Configuring the Serial Port

Serial ports default (for 4 buttons cursor) to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits

and 1 stop bit. The ASCII setting for 16 buttons cursor on the Numonicsrequires these settings to be changed to 9600 baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and2 stop bits.

From File menu select “Digitizer Setup”:

• From “Digitizer Setup” dialog Choose the desired digitizer.

• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected.

• To set the digitizer communication parameters click on

“Communications Parameters…” button in “Digitizer Setup”

dialog.

• Choose the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:

• Bits per second = 9600




Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None

• Click OK to exit and save changes.

Configuring the Digitizer in SGS software

Once the Digitizer is configured and the serial port communications have beenadjusted, configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.

• Start the SGS GRADE, PDS, or DIGITIZE software.

•

From the File menu, choose Digitizer Setup. The “SelectDigitizer” Dialog Box will display.

• Choose the following settings:

Digitizer Type - Select Numonics

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel

included with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples

directory. Click Browse to locate the available panels. For moreinstructions on the Panel, refer to the Digitizing section of the SGS

User’s manual.

Communication Port - Select the port to which the digitizer is

connected.

Working Units - Select Inches or Millimeters.




Resolution - Set to 1000.00

16 Button Cursor - If using a 16 button digitizer, this option must

be enabled.

Tablet Size - Enable the Set option by clicking in the box next to

SET. An X will display in the box. Enter the actual working areaon the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width fields (for

example, 36 X 48). Values will be displayed in either inches ormillimeters depending on which unit was selected in the Working

Units section.

Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be set

to 0.

• Click OK to save the settings and exit.

Tips

If the digitizer will not work, check the possible IRQ conflict with the internalfax modem. When using a 4-button cursor, the digitizer works best in Binary

mode. When setting the digitizer to binary mode, the communication

parameters should be set to: 9600,8,n,1

Configuring the GTCO Calcomp Drawing Board 3 Digitizer

Call customer support at 480 948 5508

This digitizer does not support the Numonics ASCII format – it is one

coordinate short.

Customers can try to use the GT ASCII Format 9 or 10 (9 is preferred).




Installing the Altek Digitizer For Use With SGS Software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Altek Digitizer for use with the SGSsoftware: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring the serial port

communications through Windows, and 3) Configuring the digitizer in SGS

software.

! Note: Do not install the Altek Software.



• Connect the digitizer to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2. Both the mouse and the digitizer can be used

if they are configured to separate ports.

• Turn on the digitizing tablet and the computer. Tape theMovable Menu that came with the digitizer anywhere on thetablet. This menu can be found as a loose piece of laminated

paper shipped with the digitizer tablet.

• *Note: the next few steps require quiet in order to hear thedigitizer sounds. Do not attempt to proceed with these

directions in a working manufacturing environment.

• To activate the Setup Menu, press and hold button #0 or theenter bar on the cursor on the Setup Menu box located in the

fixed bar at the top of the digitizer. You will see flashing lights.

• Move the crosshair over the Moveable Menu and press button#0 on the dot in the lower left corner and then the dot in the

lower right corner. The digitizer will emit a Confirmation Chirp.




• Select each option by positioning the crosshair of the digitizerover the desired setting and press button #0. You will hear aseries of Confirmation Chirps after each selection. Some

settings are not used. The MEMORY STORE setting must be

the last function set. The following settings must be selected for

use in the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize Software:

SeriAl Speed

9600 BPS

SERIAL MISC.

Even parity

2 stop bits

7 data bits

FORMAT

F10

RATE

100 PST/SEC

RESOLUTION

.001 INCH

RUN TYPE

Type 2




SOFTWARE

C Numonics

MODE

Point

MISCELLANY

CR on

LF on

Tone on (your option: do you want to hear what you digitize?)

CTS off

MEMORY

Store 1

No confirmation chirp from the controller

• Reselect Setup Menu on the Fixed Bar to exit setup.




Configuring the Serial Port Communications Through Windows

Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. The

ASCII setting on the ALTEK requires these settings to be changed to 9600

baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. The changes must be made

through Windows 95 by completing the following steps.

• Click the Start button.

• Choose Settings, Control Panel. The Control Panel group isdisplayed.

• Click System. The System Properties dialog box is displayed.

• Click Device Manager to bring the Device Manager dialog boxto the front.

• Choose Ports. Look for available ports listed below the Ports

heading.

• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected. TheCommunications Port Properties dialog box is displayed.

• Click Port Settings. The Port Settings dialog box is displayed.Choose the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:

Bits per second = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2




Flow Control = None

• Click OK to exit and save changes. Continue exiting until youare back at the main Windows 95/98/NT screen.

• Restart the computer in order to initialize the port settingchanges made in the steps above. From the Start button, select“Shut Down”. Now select “Restart the Computer.”

Configuring the Digitizer in SGS software

Once the Digitizer is configured and the serial port communications have been

adjusted, configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.

• Start the SGS GRADE, PDS, or DIGITIZE software.

• From the File Menu, select Digitizer Setup. The Select DigitizerDialog Box is displayed.


Digitizer Type - Select Numonics

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panelincluded with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples

directory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels. For more

instructions on the Panel, refer to the Digitizing section of the SGS

User’s manual.

Communication Port - Select the port to which the digitizer isconnected.






16 Button Cursor - If using a 16 button digitizer, this option must

be enabled.


SET. An X will display in the box. Enter the Actual WorkingArea on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width boxes (for

example, 36 X 48). Values will display in either Inches orMillimeters depending on which was selected in the Working

Units section.


to 0.


• Exit the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.

Tips

If the digitizer will not work, try removing the internal fax modem.




Installing the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the GTCO Roll Up Digitizer for use

with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial portcommunications through Windows and the digitizer in SGS software.


• 1. Turn your computer off.

• Connect the digitizer to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2. Both the mouse and the digitizer can be usedif they are configured to separate ports.

• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for Bank A and Bank B. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.

Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BANK-1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0

BANK-2 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1

BANK-3 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1

• Turn the digitizing tablet and your computer on.






ASCII setting on the GTCO Roll Up requires these settings to be changed to

9600 baud, Even parity, 7 data bits and 2 stop bits. The changes must be made

through Windows by completing the following steps.

Windows 3.11

• From the MAIN group choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.The Control Panel group will be displayed.

• Click PORTS. The Ports dialog box will be displayed.

• Click the port you are using. The Port Setting dialog box will bedisplayed.

• Select the following settings by clicking the drop down arrow:

Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None


• Exit the Control Panel.




Windows 95\98

• Click the START button.

• Choose SETTINGS, CONTROL PANEL. The Control Panelgroup will be displayed.

• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will bedisplayed.

• Click DEVICE MANAGER to bring the Device Manager dialogbox to the front.

• Choose PORTS. The available ports will be listed below the

Ports heading.

• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected. The

Communications Port Properties dialog box will be displayed.

• Click PORT SETTINGS. The Port Settings dialog box will bedisplayed. Choose the following settings by clicking the drop

down arrow:


Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None

• Click OK to exit and save changes. Continue exiting until youare back at the main Windows 95 screen.




Configuring The Digitizer in SGS software


adjusted, you can configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.

• Start the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.

• From the OPTIONS menu choose DIGITIZER SETUP. TheSelect Digitizer Dialog Box will be displayed.


Digitizer Type - Select GTCO DIGI-PAD



directory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.

Communication Port - Select the port to which your digitizer isconnected.



16 Button Cursor - If you are using a 16 button digitizer you mustenable this option.

Tablet Size - Enable the Set option by clicking in the box next toSET. An X will be placed in the box. Enter the Actual Working

Area on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width boxes.

Values will be displayed in either Inches or Millimeters dependingon which was selected in the Working Units section.





to 0.


• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software..

The next time you enter the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software,

the digitizer will be enabled.




Installing the SummaSketch II For Use In the SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the SummaSketch II for use with theSGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port communications

through Windows and the digitizer in the SGS software.

! Note: It is not necessary to install the Summagraphics Software.






Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. TheASCII setting on the SummaSketch II requires these settings to be changed to

9600 baud, Odd parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and none for flow control. The

changes must be made through Windows by completing the following steps.

! Note: The SumaSketch II digitizer is supported in both Windows 3.11 and

Windows 95. Both configuration processes are explained, choose the

one that applies to your Windows version.

Windows 3.11








Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = Odd

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None



Windows 95/98








• Choose PORTS. The available ports will be listed below thePorts heading.

• Choose the COM port to which your digitizer is connected. TheCommunications Port Properties dialog box will be displayed.

• Click PORT SETTINGS. The Port Settings dialog box will bedisplayed. Choose the following settings by clicking the dropdown arrow:


Data Bits = 8

Parity = ODD

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None





• Start the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.

• From the FILE or OPTIONS menu choose DIGITIZER SETUP.The Select Digitizer Dialog Box will be displayed.





Digitizer Type - Select SummaSketch1212


included with the SGS software located in the Texwork\Examplesdirectory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.




Tablet Size - Enter the Actual Working Area on the tablet in the

appropriate Height and Width boxes. Values will be displayed in

either Inches or Millimeters depending on which was selected in

the Working Units section.



to 0.


• Exit the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software.

The next time you enter the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize software, the

digitizer will be enabled.




Installing the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer For Use In SGS

software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Summagraphic LCL Digitizer for

use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial portcommunications through Windows and the digitizer in SGS software.




•

Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for Set A,B, and C. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.

Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SET A 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

SET B 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

SET C 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0

! Note: The Summagraphics LCL can binary or as ASCII. The above

switches are for ASCII mode.







Summagraphics LCL digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2.

Windows 3.11





Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None

•

Click OK to exit and save changes.





Windows 95/98






Ports heading.




down arrow:


Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None











Digitizer Type - Select Summasketch Professional.




Communication Port - Select the port to which your digitizer is

connected.



16 Button Cursor - If you are using a 16 button digitizer you must

enable this option.


SET. An X will be placed in the box. Enter the Actual WorkingArea on the tablet in the appropriate Height and Width boxes.

Values will be displayed in either Inches or Millimeters depending

on which was selected in the Working Units section.




Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be

set to 0.








Installing the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the GTCO 5A DigiPad Digitizer for use

with the SGS software: 1) Configuring the digitizing tablet, 2) Configuring theserial port communications through Windows, 3) Configuring the digitizer in

SGS software.





! Note: Any serial port can be used. However, keep in mind that on many

computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices

you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports.

For detailed information on IRQ settings refer, to the DOS and

Windows manuals for your system.

• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for SW 1,2, and 3. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.

Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW-1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1

SW-2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0

SW-3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0




! Note: Bit number 5 in SW3 should be set to ON when using a 16-button

cursor and OFF when using 4 button.

• Turn on the computer and the digitizing tablet.


Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.

Windows 3.11

• From the MAIN group, choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.The Control Panel group will display.

• Click PORTS. The Ports dialog box will display.

• Click the port to which the digitizer is connected. The Port

Setting dialog box will display.


Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = No

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None






Windows 95/98


• Choose SETTINGS, CONTROL PANEL. The Control Panelgroup will display.

• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will display.



• Choose the COM port to which the digitizer is connected. TheCommunications Port Properties dialog box will display.

• Click PORT SETTINGS. The Port Settings dialog box willdisplay. Choose the following settings by clicking the drop

down arrow:


Data Bits = 8

Parity = No

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None







adjusted, the next step is to configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.

• Start the SGS Grade, PDS, or Digitize program.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose DIGITIZER SETUP. TheSelect Digitizer Dialog Box will be displayed.


Digitizer Type - Select GTCO DIGI-PAD




Communication Port - Select the port to which the digitizer is

connected.



16 Button Cursor - This button must be enabled EVEN if using a

4 button cursor.








to 0.


• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.






Installing the MicroGrid IV Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the MicroGrid IV Digitizer for use with

the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial portcommunications through Windows and the digitizer in SGS software.




• Choose the Config. button and change the parameters for SW 1,2, and 3. The 0 (zero) is OFF, and the 1 (one) is ON.

Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

SW 2 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

SW 3 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0



Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.

Windows 3.11

• From the MAIN group choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.




The Control Panel group will be displayed.




Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None



Windows 95/98


• Choose SETTINGS, CONTROL PANEL. The Control Panel

group will be displayed.


• Click DEVICE MANAGER to bring the Device Manager dialog




box to the front.





Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None














Digitizer Type -

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel included

with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples directory.

Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.









to 0.



The next time you enter the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software,the digitizer will be enabled.




Installing the MicroGrid II Digitizer For Use In SGS software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the MicroGrid II Digitizer for use withthe SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port

communications through Windows and the digitizer in SGS software.





! Note: The MicroGrid II should be set up to work in ASCII mode.



Summagrid Pro IV digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2.

Windows 3.11

• From the MAIN group choose the CONTROL PANEL icon.

The Control Panel group will be displayed.







Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None



Windows 95/98



• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will be

displayed.


•

Choose PORTS. The available ports will be listed below thePorts heading.







Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None








Digitizer Type - Numonics or Summagraphics MicroGrid II

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panelincluded with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples





Communication Port - Select the port to which your digitizer

is connected.




enable this option.





to 0.








Installing the Summagraphic 4 Button Digitizer For Use In SGS

software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Summagraphic 4 button Digitizer for

use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port









Summagraphics 4 button digitizer requires 9600, O, 8, 1.

Windows 3.11








Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = Odd

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None



Windows 95/98



• Click SYSTEM. The System Properties dialog box will be

displayed.








down arrow:


Data Bits = 8

Parity = Odd

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None



Once the Digitizer is configured and the serial port communications have beenadjusted, you can configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.




Digitizer Type -

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panel includedwith SGS software located in the Texwork\Examples directory.Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.








enable this option.





Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be setto 0.


• Exit the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Digitize software.






Installing the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer For Use In SGS

software

There are 3 main steps to configuring the SummaSketch Professional Digitizer

for use with the SGS software: configuring the digitizing tablet, the serial port







! Note: The SummaSketch Professional 16 Button Digitizer runs in UIOF

mode. The SummaSketch Professional 4 Button Digitizer runs in

Binary mode.


Serial ports default to 9600 baud, No parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. TheSummaSketch Professional 16 button digitizer requires 9600, E, 7, 2. The

SummaSketch Professional 4 button digitizer requires 9600, o, 8, 1.

Windows 3.11






• Click the port you are using. The Port Setting dialog box willbe displayed.


16 Button Cursor settings:

Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None


Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = Odd or None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None






Windows 95/98






Ports heading.




down arrow:


Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 7

Parity = Even

Stop Bits = 2

Flow Control = None





Baud = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = Odd or None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = None



Once the Digitizer is configured and the serial port communications have beenadjusted, you can configure the SGS software to use the digitizer.




Digitizer Type - Select Summasketch Professional.

Panel - This setting is optional. There is an example panelincluded with SGS software located in the Texwork\Examplesdirectory. Click BROWSE to locate the available panels.








enable this option.





Shift Digitizer 0/0 Point - Both the X: and Y: values should be setto 0.








Digitizer Manufacturers

The following manufacturers offer digitizing devices that are commonly used

and compatible with OptiTex software. SGS recommends that you confirmOptiTex compatibility of specific digitizer models and manufacturers before

making your purchase.

Calcomp

2411 West La Palma Avenue

P.O. Box 3250

Anaheim, CA 92801

Phone: 800-458-5888, 714-821-2000

Fax: 714-821-2045

GTCO Corporation

7125 Riverwood Drive

Columbia, Maryland 21046

Phone: 800-344-4723, 410-381-6688

Fax: 410-290-9065




Numonics Corporation

101 Commerce Drive

Box 1005

Montgomeryville, PA 18936

Phone: 800-523-6716, 215-362-2766

Fax: 215-361-0167

Summagraphics Corporation

8500 Cameron Road

Austin, Texas 78754-3999

Phone: 800-444-3425, 512-835-0900

Fax: 512-835-1916



Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation 541

Chapter 17: Output Devices Installation

This chapter will guide how to install and configure a width range of plotters

and cutters types that supported by OptiTex.

Installing Algotex Plotters with SGS Software

Installing the Algotex Software


• Connect the plotter cable to the parallel port (LPT2) on thecomputer.

• Turn on the computer and the plotter.

•Create a directory called C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA

• Copy all the files on the Algotex diskette into the C:\TEXOPLOTdirectory.

The Algotex diskette contains the following files:

AUTO_DOT.EXEAUTO_DOT.CNF

AUTO_DOT.HLP

AUTO_DOT.TXT

RASTEX.EXETEXOPLOT.ICO

README.DOC

README.TXT

• Copy the ALGOTEXP.CFG file into the C:\TEXOPLOT directory.




! Note: The ALGOTEXP.CFG file can be found on the diskette attached to

the plotter.

• Create a directory called C:\OPTITEX\HPGL

• Select START, SETTINGS, TASKBAR, START MENUPROGRAMS, ADD.

• BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.C:\TEXOPLOT\RASTEX.EXE

• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type RASTER

as the program name and select FINISH.

• Select ADD, BROWSE for and OPEN the following file.C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.EXE

• Select NEXT. Select the OptiTex Program Group. Type PLOT asthe program name and select FINISH.

• Select ADVANCED, under Start Menu, select the plus (+) sign tothe left of the word “Programs.” Highlight the OptiTex Program

Group. Copy (hold down the shift key and drag) the RASTERprogram and PLOT program on the right side of the screen to the

STARTUP folder on the left side of the screen. You can now

CLOSE.

• Using a text editor, edit the following file.

C:\TEXOPLOT\AUTO_DOT.CNF

• Change the Recovery directory to C:\OPTITEX\HPGL and changethe Raster Data files directory to C:\TEXOPLOT\DATA




• Save the changes to the AUTO_DOT.CNF file and return to theWINDOWS desktop.

• Restart the computer. Select START, SHUTDOWN, RESTARTCOMPUTER.

Configuring the Alogotex Plotter in SGS software.

Once the Algotex software is installed, the SGS software can be configured to

work with the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK program.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOTTER SETUP. A Dialog Box is

displayed.

• Uncheck “Use Output Manager.”

• Select OK.

• If in working in PDS, display a piece on the screen. If working inMARK, display a marker on the screen.

• From the FILE menu select PLOT. Select SETUP from the lowerleft side of the dialog box.

• In the Plot Setting Dialog Box select HPGL as the format. InPlotter Page Size, the X must be _____ and the Y must be the width

of the paper (72 inches is the maximum).

• Select OK, the Plot Dialog Box is once again displayed. Make surethat the following settings are unchecked while testing: Output

Manager, Use, Alert on Start, Remove on End, Alert on End.

• Select OK.




Hewlett Packard 600 or 700 Ink Jet Plotter

Connecting the plotter


• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an

RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotter

distributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will notplot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from HP.

! Tip: Serial ports are usually referred to as COM ports and can be identified

as COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4.


computers COM ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ (Interrupt

Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you havemore than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting

for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed

information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows manuals

for your system.





Configuring the output manger

Using the Outman as output manger:

• From the START menu click OUTMAN from OptiTex sub-menu.

! Note: The OutMan will be named Outman-1 (or OutMan-2 if you specified

the plotter as pltr2.)

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.

• Choose the appropriate setting.

• Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. The

Communication dialog box will display. Set the following portoptions:

Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.

Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8

Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

Flow Control - XON/XOFF

Protocol - NONE

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will display.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper.

• Click OK.




! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of

the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close theOutman.

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon in the STARTmenu. Usually located in START>Optitex 8> Output control>

Qman

• From the FILE menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should match

the working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT SETUP. The OutMan Setupdialog box will display.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the listof available drive/directories on the right.

•

Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.




Using the OCC as output manger


• Follow the steps to put the plotter On-Line.

• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the STARTmenu.

• In the FILE menu select PLOTTRS SETUP

• In the plotters setup box click on ADD.

• Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.

• In the “Communication Setting” select the following:

Port - the port to which the plotter is connected


Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8

Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

Flow Control - XON/XOFF

Protocol - NONE

• Click NEXT.

Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue folder

must be located in the same partition as the OCC application. Click onthe BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.




! Note: Windows NT or 2000 will share the plotter to use to other users and

computers automatically. Using other operation system needs to

share the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.

• Click CLOSE to confirm the plotter installation.

• Close or minimize the OCC window.

Configuring the SGS programs

Plotter Setup

The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select

the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the working

area.

• Place a pattern on the working area.

• From the FILE menu, choose the PLOT command

• Check the Use Output Manager field.

• Select the output manger that you using.

• For Outman users: Put the correct Outman.ini Path and plotternumber in the OUTMAN MANAGER field. Select OK.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.





area.

Use Output Manager - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the

plotter.

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting

chapter of the user’s manual, or the plotting tutorial.

Page Format - Set to Fixed Scale.

Options - Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.

Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language and the Frame or Page size.

• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter numberdepends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software

installation process.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled

(unchecked).




Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If nofont file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the header

of the plot.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completed

plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - .008

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the lengthof your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted for

unusually long markers.

Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)




! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of

paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 35.5 inches. There is

no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this

setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not

plot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box. The pieces on theworking area will be sent to print on the plotter.

Hewlett Packard 750C Ink Jet Plotter



• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer. If your HP Ink

Jet only came with a parallel cable, it will be necessary to order an

RS232 serial cable from Hewlett Packard or from your plotterdistributor. A generic cable will not work. Your plot files will notplot on the HP Ink Jet unless you are using a cable from Hewlett

Packard.





Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have

more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed


for your system.





• Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to InkedArea. Please see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick

Reference Guide.

Using the Outman as output manger:

• From the START menu click on the OUTMAN in the OptiTex 8folder.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.


• Click OK.


Communication dialog box will display.

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.

Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = XON/XOFF

Protocol = NONE

Paper Size






• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact length of the paper is unknown, estimate. The length of

the paper needs to be longer than the plot file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close theOutman.

Configuring Qman

• From the START menu click on the QMAN in the OptiTexdirectory.


• Select the appropriate working units. The selection should matchthe working units that were set in the SGS Plot setup dialog box.

• From the FILE menu, choose OPTIONS. The OutMan Setup dialogbox will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same asspecified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:


• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close the Qman.












Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1


Protocol = NONE

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue

folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.









Configuring the SGS programs

Configuring the plotter through the SGS programs involves selecting a plotter,

configuring the plotter, and configuring the OutMan and the QMan. This

document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for HP 750plotters. For a detailed description of the plotting options, refer to the Plotting

section of the SGS Grade, Mark, or PDS manual. Also, refer to the plotting

tutorial located at the front of each manual.

Plotter Setup

The Plotter Setup command in SGS Grade, PDS, and Mark is used to select

the location of the OutMan.ini file and the plotter to be used.


area.

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT command.

• Check the “USE OUTPUT MANGER” options.

• Select the Output manger to use.

• For OutMan users: browse to locate the outman.ini file. And enterthe plotter number.




Plot


! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager

Use - This option must be enabled to send a plot to the plotter.





Scale Factor - Set to X=1, Y=1.



Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The plotter numberdepends on how many plotters were identified during the SGS software

installation process.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL/2.




Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center and Manual Page Replace – both are disabled

(unchecked).

Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no

font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.


of the plot.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.


Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arc

to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value is the marker length. It should be set to larger than the length

of your longest expected marker. However, this setting may be adjusted forunusually long markers.

Y - The Y value should always be set to 35.5 inches (maximum plot width.)






no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this


plot at all.

• Click OK to exit the Plotter Setup dialog box.

• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not been

setup.

Troubleshooting for the HP Ink Jet 750C

Make sure the I/O settings on the plotter have been setup. For instructions,

refer to the HP user manual. Settings should correspond with the port options

used in SGS software when configuring the OutMan. (See section,

“Configuring Outman” under “Communication.”)

Be sure that the Page format in the HP750C Menu is set to Inked Area. Please

see attached diagram from the HP 750C Quick Reference Guide.




From the HP750C Quick Reference Guide

Front-Panel Menu (On Plotter) Structure

Page Format -> Size -> Oversize -> Inked Area




Configuring the Hewlett Packard Draftmaster II Plotter

The HP Draftmaster II (model #7596A) plotter will not plot more than one

frame. A frame is 46 inches long.



• Connect the plotter to a serial port on the computer.



! Note: Any serial port can be used however, keep in mind that on many


Request), and COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have

more than 3 serial devices you may need to change the IRQ setting

for one of the COM ports to avoid an IRQ conflict. For detailed


for your system.

• Turn the computer on.

• Turn the plotter on.




Configuring SGS Programs

Plotter Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the working

area.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT command. The plot dialog boxwill be displayed.

• Enable the USE OUTPUT MANGER by clicking the box next tothe Use Output Manager option. A small “x” should appear in the

box.

• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

file.

• Select the Plotter number you want to assign to the HP plotter (i.e.

Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager





Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings are

optional. For detailed information on each of these options refer to the Plotting


Page Format - Page format should be set to Fixed Scale.

Options -

Plot Continuous - enabled

Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1, Y=1.


• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of Pltr

listing depends on how many plotters you specified during your OptiTex

software installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to HPGL

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - enabled

Manual Page Replace - disabled.

Number of Pens - set to 1.

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - disabled.




Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory. If no

font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the plot.

! Note: This setting overrides the plot font settings specified elsewhere in the

program.


plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enablecutting between the plots. (Commonly set to 4”)



to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be

adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. For now set at .008

Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should always be set to 46 inches. (Max frame size)

Y - The Y value should always be set to 34.5 inches. (Maximum plot width)

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of

paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time. There is no way to

adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is

set to anything else, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot

at all.



setup.





Using the Outman as output manger

• Open the OutMan from the START menu/OptiTex/output control.

• Working Units - From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKINGUNITS. The working units dialog box will be displayed.

• Choose the setting you wish to use.

• Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will be displayed.

Communication

Port Options

Port = Select the COM port you have the plotter connected to.

Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1


Protocol = NONE

Paper Size

• Click SET. The Paper on Roll dialog box will be displayed.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper you are using.

• Click OK.




! Note: If you are using a roll of paper and don’t know the exact length,

estimate. The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you

wish to send.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running.

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by double clicking on the icon at START manu/ OptiTex 8 / output manger.

Working Units

• From the FILE menu choose WORKING UNITS.

• Select the same setting you selected in the OptiTex plot setup.

OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTIONS menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will be displayed.



• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan, keeping it running.






• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferablyCOM1 or COM2.

! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the same

time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4

or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and

digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and

modem.



• Open the OCC program from START menu, OptiTex folder.






Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow Control = XON/XOFFProtocol = NONE

• Click NEXT.




• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.

Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.









Ioline 28 Plotter




! Tip: Serial ports are usually identified as COM ports and can be identified



computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and COM ports 2

and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3 serial devices you

may need to change the IRQ setting for one of the COM ports. For

detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the DOS and Windows

manuals for your system.


Install the Ioline software

• Put the Ioline diskette into the floppy drive.

• From the START menu, select RUN.

• Type SETUP: A.

• Select OK or press Enter on the keyboard.

• Follow the on-screen instructions for installation and setup.




! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to the

Installation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot

Once the Plotter and software have been installed and configured, send a test

plot to the plotter. The Ioline Control Center software includes a couple testplot files. The “Send Plot File” command is located in the FILE menu. For

instructions on sending a test file to the Ioline 28, refer to the Ioline user’s

manual.

Calibration Plot

Once a test plot has been successfully plotted indicating that the plotter has

been configured properly in the Ioline software, the plot may be calibrated.Calibrating the plot involves plotting a pre-determined size square, measuring

the actual plot and entering the values into the Ioline Calibration program. The

Ioline software makes the necessary corrections and sends the settings to theplotter. The CALIBRATE PLOTTER command is located in theCALIBRATE menu. For detailed instructions on running the calibration

program, refer to the Ioline user’s manual.

Configuring SGS Programs for the Ioline

Plot Setup




box.




• For OUTMAN users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

file.


Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box will

display.


area.

Output Manager


Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the

Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.



Scale Factor - Set to X=1 Y=1.

Frame Advance After Last Frame – Checked.

Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the

truer the curve. However, as this setting gets closer to 0, the pen also moves




slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches

as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.



Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of the

plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to either HPGL or DMPL.

Device Options

(0,0) in Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Manual Page Replace - Should be disabled (unchecked).

Number of Pens - Set to 1.

Font Options


Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located in

C:\OptiTex).

Default Font Size - This setting determines the size of the text on the headerof the marker.






Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Ioline plotters.


to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factorysetting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are

using.

X- The X value should always be set to 46 inches or 118 cm.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no

way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this


plot at all.



setup.

The SGS software has been configured. The next step is to configure the

OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a

plot file is sent to the plotter.





Use the Outman as output manger.


Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The working

units dialog box will display.


• Click OK.

Communication



Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGL

DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)

Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)




DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)

RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)

Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size



• Click OK.

! Note: If the exact paper length is unknown, estimate. The length of the

paper needs to be longer than the file that will be plotted.

• Minimize the OutMan, keeping it running. Do not close OutMan

Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility sub

folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units


• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match theworking units set in the SGS plot dialog box.




OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will display.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not: Select the

Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list of

available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.

• Minimize the QMan keeping it running. Do not close Qman.

Hints

If the plotter does not plot, check the file name length. It should be limited to

8 alphanumeric characters.






or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter and

modem.












Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and DMPL.

HPGLDTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)

RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)Xon/Xoff = Disabled (unchecked)

DMPL (recommended)DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)


Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.














Ioline 600 Plotter







computers COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ and COM ports 2









• Type SETUP: A.








Test Plot




manual.

Calibration Plot







Plot Setup




box.




• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by selecting theBrowse button. Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

file.


Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.)

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box will

display.


area.

Output Manager


Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies. - These settings areoptional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the






Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the





slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inches

as a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.



Plot Setting


plotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS software

installation.


Device Options




Font Options


Plotter Font File – The Plot-eng.fnt file and its directory should be displayed.

If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file (usually located inC:\OptiTex).


of the marker.








to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size


using.


! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter which means that the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no



plot at all.



setup.





Using the Outman as output manger.


Working Units




• Click OK.

Communication



Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1


HPGL



DMPL (recommended)







Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size



• Click OK.




Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the output utility subfolder in the START menu / OptiTex folder/ Output Control

Working Units



OutMan Path Setup











Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1


HPGL

DTR/DSR = Enabled (checked)





Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.














Ioline Studio Plotter
















• Type SETUP: A.








Test Plot




manual.

Calibration Plot







Plot Setup


• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in thebox.




• For OutMan users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini(usually C:\Optitex) by clicking the Browse. Select the Plotter

number to be assigned to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.


area.

Output Manager



optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to the






Bulge Cord Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the


slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.






Plot Setting



installation.


Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).



Font Options



C:\OptiTex).










adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y – The Y value should be 39.5 inches (the maximum plotting & cutting

width).

X – The X value should be 46 inches (the plotter frame size).


paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 46 inches. There is no



plot at all.


• 4. Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be savedbut the plot will not be sent because the OutMan and Qman were

not set.


Using the OutMan as output manger

• In the START menu, click on the OutMan icon at the OptiTex \ OUTPUT CONTROL folder.

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.





• Click OK.

Communication

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose COMMUNICATION. TheCommunication dialog box will display.

Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1




DMPL (recommended)

DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)


Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size






• Click OK.




Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units



OutMan Path Setup




• Click OK.

• Minimize the Qman keeping it running. Do not close Qman.






• Connect the plotter cable to a serial port on the computer, preferably

COM1 or COM2.





modem.








Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1






RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)


DMPL (recommended)

DTR/DSR = Disabled (unchecked)RTS/CTS = Disabled (unchecked)


Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queuefolder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.





Close or minimize the OCC window




Ioline Stylist Plotter














Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.ini

and the plotter.


• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will

display.

• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in thebox.




• Select the output manger that you using

• For OutMan users: locate the outman.ini file by clicking on thebrowse button and select the Plotter number to be assigned to the

Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot



area.

Output Manager



optional. For detailed information on each of these options, refer to thePlotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.









Plot Setting



installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to DMPL.

Device Options




Font Options





program.









adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the width of the paper. The factory setting is 72 inches.Adjust this setting according to the paper size you are using.

X- The X value should always be set to 36 inches.





plot at all.


• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.



• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will display.






Click OK.




Configuring Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder

Working Units


• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the

working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

Path Setup

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same as

specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:

• Select the Outman.ini path specified in the Plot Setup from the list

of available drive/directories on the right.

• Click OK.








COM1 or COM2.





modem.









Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1





DMPL

DTR/DSR = disabled (unchecked)

RTS/CTS = disabled (unchecked)Xon/Xoff = Enabled (checked)

Protocol= NONE.

• Click NEXT.










Configuring the Ioline Summit Plotter For Use With SGS Software
















• Type SETUP: A.






! Note: For detailed instructions on installing the Ioline software, refer to

the Installation chapter of the Ioline user’s manual.

Test Plot



instructions on sending a test file to the Summit, refer to the Ioline user’s

manual.

Calibration Plot







Plot Setup


• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.

• Select the Output manger to use.

• Enable the Use Output Manager. A small “x” should appear in thebox.




• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse to locate the outman.ini file. Select the Plotter

number to be assigned to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The “Plot” dialog box willdisplay.


area.

Output Manager









Bulge Corde Error – controls curved lines. The closer the setting to 0, the


slower. A larger number creates a faster, less accurate curve. Use .008 inchesas a starting point and adjust this setting as necessary.






Plot Setting



installation.


Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Should be disabled (unchecked).



Font Options



C:\OptiTex).










adjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots. The default is 0.

Plotter Page Size

Y - The Y value is the useable width of the paper (minus margins.) The factory

setting is 72 inches. Adjust this setting according to the paper size you areusing.





setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.


• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QMan have not beensetup.


OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan start automatically when a

plot file is sent to the plotter.




Configuring the output manger.

Using the OutMan as Output manger

• Open the OutMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Control

sub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. The workingunits dialog box will display.


• Click OK.

Communication


Port Options

Port = Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow = The flow settings are different for HPGL and

DMPL.HPGL



DMPL (recommended)







Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size



• Click OK.




Configure the Qman

• Open the QMan by clicking on the icon from the Output Controlsub folder in the START menu / OptiTex folder.

Working Units



OutMan Path Setup







• Click OK.





! Note: Serial ports are needed to run the digitizer and plotter at the sametime. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on COM4



modem.



• Open the OCC program from the OptiTex folder in the START

menu.









Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1







Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.




computers automatically. Using other operation system needs toshare the plotter manually, using the windows explorer.






Troubleshooting Tips for the Ioline Summit Plotter

Ioline software show’s no plotter:

Cable - make sure it is securely fastened at both ends. If possible try another

cable.

Perform the Serial Test: included with the Ioline Control Center software.

For instructions on performing this test refer to the Summit User’s Guide.

Blinking red light on plotter after plot has been sent:

Communication problems: Check the following:


cable.

Port Configuration - Make sure the port is configured correctly:

Baud rate =9600

Parity =none

Data bits =8

Stop bits =1

Flow control

HPGL = DTR/DSR-enabled

RTS/CTS-enabled

Xon/Xoff- disabled

DMPL = DTR/DSR-disabled




RTS/CTS-disabled

Xon/Xoff- enabled

Port - Have port checked.

Plotter - Run Plotter Port Test, which requires a diagnostic module availablefrom Ioline.

The Ioline plotter won’t plot:


cable.

OutMan - Make sure it is running, the communication and handshake settings

are correct and the protocol is set to none.

QMan - Make sure it is running. Make sure the OutMan path is specifiedcorrectly.

Ioline is in Stop Mode - Press the Start/Stop key to put the plotter in start

mode (green light).

Test plot - Send a test plot from DOS or Ioline Control Panel software. If theplotter doesn’t plot from Ioline software, refer to the troubleshooting guide in

the Ioline user’s manual.

The Ioline Plotter Plots Incorrectly, Doesn’t finish the plot, skips parts of

the plot or leaves large gaps between frames:

Frame Size - Frame size is set incorrectly. Frame size should be X = 46, Y =

width of paper, typically 72”.

Plots “garbage”:




Language - Make sure the correct language is being sent. Language for this

plotter is set to either DMPL or HPGL.

Plots too large/small:

Scale Factor - Make sure the Scale Factor in the Plot dialog box is set to X=1

Y=1.

Calibrate - Run the calibration program that comes with the Ioline control

panel. For instructions on the calibration process refer to the Ioline user’smanual.

Fonts are too small/large in the HEADER of the marker:

• Adjust the font size in the Plot Setting dialog box in the SGSprograms. The plot setting dialog box is accessed by:

•From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the dialog box.

• Enter the desired font size in the Default Font Size box.

• Click OK.

! Note: If you change the font size and the fonts are still plotting incorrectly,

delete the Optikad.ini file located in the Windows directory and re-

configure plot settings.

Piece Information fonts are too large or too small:

• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pulldown Menu,then select GLOBAL INFO.




• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,locate the box called, “Adjust Descriptions.”

• Enter in the desired maximum text size. For example, if the textwas previously too large when set to 1”, change the setting to .5”

and click APPLY.

• Create a test plot to make sure the new text size is acceptable. If further changes are necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the maximum text size for the standard piece

information (or piece descriptions). On larger pieces, the text will

plot at the maximum set size. On smaller pieces, text will plot smaller

to fit on the piece.

Internal fonts are too large or too small:

• From the SGS MARK program, select the PIECE pull down Menu,then select GLOBAL INFO.

• On the right hand side of the Global pieces information dialog box,

locate the box called, “Internal Texts.”

• Enter in the desired minimum and maximum sizes. For example, if internal text should only be between .25” and 1”, set this box

accordingly. Internal text will plot no smaller than .25” and nolarger than 1”.

•Create a test plot to make sure text is acceptable. If further changesare necessary, repeat steps 1 - 3.

! Note: This setting adjusts the text size for internal texts (text added with the

text tool).




Leaves too much or not enough gap between jobs/copies:

Check the Gap after Plotting setting in the Plot Setting dialog box. The PlotSetting dialog box can be accessed by:

•From the FILE menu choose PLOT.

• Select the Setup button on the lower right of the Plot dialog box.

• Enter in a new value in the Gap After Plotting box.

• Click OK.

Pen rips the paper during plot:

Make sure pen is loaded correctly (it must be lined up on the edges of the rollfeeds).

Check the pen force.

Pen may be out of ink.

Pen may be broken.

Paper pressure roller must not be placed over the two connection points of thepaper advance bar.

Plots very Slowly:

Make sure the file format is set up correctly.

For more troubleshooting tips refer to the Ioline user’s guide.




Plotter Technology Plotter

Configuring SGS Programs

Plot Setup

The Plotter Setup command is used to select the location of the OutMan.iniand the plotter.


• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. Plot dialog box will display.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A small “x” should appear in thebox.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the

OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the PlotterTechnology Neon plotter.

• Click OK.

Plot


! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece in the workingarea.

Output Manager






optional, but are usually checked on. For detailed information on each of these

options, refer to the Plotting chapter of the manual, or the plotting tutorial.




Bulge – Set to .008



Plot Setting



installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HP-GL PlotTec.

Device Options







Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be disabled. (Unchecked)

Plotter Font File - Should show the Plot-eng.fnt file. If no font file is shown,

select Browse to locate the file.



program.



Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for Plotter Technology

plotters.


to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.

Plotter Page Size


using.

X- The X value should always be set to 20 inches for a 36” Neon

The X value should always be set to 30 inches for a 72” Neon


paper the plotter feeds and tracks at one time is 20 or 30 inches.

There is no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the




plotter. If this setting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot

incorrectly or not plot at all.



setup.


OutMan and the Qman. The OutMan and QMan were added to the Startupgroup when SGS software was installed, which means they will start

automatically when Windows is started.



• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the OUTPUTCONTROL sub directory. It can be found in START > OPTIEX 8>

OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units




• Click OK.

Communication





Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.

Xon/Xoff is checked

Protocol = None.

Paper Size



• Click OK.







COM1 or COM2.


time. The digitizer may not be on COM2 while the plotter is on

COM4 or visa versa. COM2 and COM4 may be used with a mouse

and digitizer, digitizer and modem, plotter and a mouse, or plotter

and modem.











Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow = RTS/CTS is checked.

Xon/Xoff is checked

Protocol = None.

• Click NEXT.

• Assign name to the plotter and define the queue folder. The queue

folder must be located in the same partition as the OCC application.Click on the BROWESE button to define the folder. Click FINISH.








• Close or minimize the OCC window

Hints

Use cardboard for the paper take-up roll – PVC is too heavy.

If using Heat Seal paper, set the plotter speed to low.

When changing to a new roll of Heat Seal paper, swipe the surface that thepaper would touch with a rag lightly dampened with liquid fabric softener.

(This reduces the static electricity that the Heat Seal paper generates).




Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter



• Connect the plotter to COM1 or COM2 on the computer.

! Note: On many computers, COM Ports 1 and 3 share the same IRQ, and

COM ports 2 and 4 share the same IRQ. If you have more than 3

serial port devices you may need to change the IRQ setting for one of

the COM ports. For detailed information on IRQ settings refer to the

DOS and Windows manuals for the system.


! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 Plotter must be set up in AutoSence mode.

Configuring output manger


• In the START menu, click OptiTex, and OUTMAN.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select WORKING UNITS.

• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select COMMUNICATION. Set thefollowing port options.


Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8




Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

DTR/DSR - unchecked

RTS/CTS - unchecked

Xon/Xoff - checked

Protocol- NONE.

• Click OK.

• Click SET next to Paper on Roll dialog box.

• Enter the Width and Length of the paper. Click OK.

! Note: The length of the paper needs to be longer than the plot you wish to

send.

• Minimize the OutMan. (Do not close OutMan).

Configuring QMan

• In the START menu click OPTITEX 8, and QMan.

• From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS.

• Choose the appropriate setting. Click OK.

• From the OPTIONS menu, select OUTMAN PATH.

• The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be thesame as specified in the Plot Setup.

• Minimize the QMan. (Do not close QMan).







COM1 or COM2.





modem.








Port - Select the COM port to which the plotter is connected.Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8

Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

DTR/DSR - unchecked




RTS/CTS - unchecked

Xon/Xoff - checked

Protocol - NONE.

• Click NEXT.








Configuring SGS Software

Plot Setup


area.

• From the FILE menu, select the PLOT command.

• Click Use Output Manager field. Select the output manger that youusing.

• For Outman users: Select the directory that contains the OutMan.ini

• Select the Plotter number to be assigned to the Calcomp TechJet720.




• Click OK.

Plot dialog box

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT.

• In the PLOT dialog box, select following boxes:

Use – checked

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, copies - optional.



Plotter Setting -Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.

The Plot Setting dialog box is displayed.

Plotter Setup dialog box

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2

Format – HPGL

(0,0) in Page Center – unchecked

Manual Page Replace – checked

Use CR/LF in code – checked

Use M70 – unchecked

Use bitefeed offset – unchecked




Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line – 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font – checked

Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen – 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment - .008

Plotter Page Size - X- 48 inches, Y-34.8 or width of paper.

• Click OK to exit the PLOTTER SETUP dialog box.

• Click OK to exit the PLOT dialog box.

! Note: The Calcomp TechJet 720 plotter model 5436R does not

automatically advance the paper after each frame. The user must

select CONTINUE at the plotter after each frame. A one-inch gap is

placed between each frame (paper advance).

! Note: Calcomp’s technical support number is 1-800-458-5888.

! Note: The Calcomp 907/PCI Vector mode driver sometimes works in the

SGS OptiMark




Gerber AP300 and AP310 Plotters

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software









modem.



• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:

Port : the port to which the plotter is connected

Baud Rate : 9600

Data Bits :8

Parity : None




Stop Bits : 1

Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)

Communication Protocol : Gerber

• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman.)

Configuring the Qman

• Open the Qman and from the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN SETUP.

• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located in

the directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The default

directory is C:\Optitex)

• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than oneplotter, select the desired plotter number)

• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)











modem.








Port : the port to which the plotter is connected

Baud Rate : 9600

Data Bits :8

Parity : None

Stop Bits : 1

Flow Control : turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communication Protocol: Gerber

• Click NEXT.











Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software

Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been

adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOTT.




• Display a pattern piece on the screen.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTERsection of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialogbox, select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must

be 16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper.(72 inches is the maximum)

• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.




• The following settings should be checked:

Output Manager- Use

Alert on Start

Remove on End

Alert on End

• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting

If nothing happens

If you get an error message at the plotter display

If the plotter does not move

It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardware

communication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, ortry replacing the plotter cable.

If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly

Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smallermarker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.

Tips

The plotter side of the communication cable is a 9 pin female adapter. Thecomputer side of the cable is a 25 pin female adapter, Gerber part number

055409000 Rev.-A. A 25 to 9 pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach

the cable to the computer.




Gerber AP700 Plotter

! Note: It is not necessary to install any Gerber Software









modem.



Power on- Big red button to the right.

Press ENTERS to enable (dot with a circle around it)

Initialize F2 (goes to origin)F1 (goes on-line)

• Open the Outman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select COMMUNICATION.

• In the Communication Dialog Box select the following:





Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8

Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

FlowControl turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)Communicate Protocol: Gerber

• Minimize the Outman. (Do not close Outman).


• Open the Qman and in the OPTIONS Menu, select the desiredWORKING UNITS.

• In the OPTIONS Menu, select OUTMAN PATH SETUP.

• In the OUTMAN SETUP dialog box, select Outman.ini located inthe directory where the SGS software was loaded. (The defaultdirectory is C:\Optitex)

• Select PLTR1 in the Plotter Name area. (If you have more than one

plotter, select the desired plotter number)

• Minimize the Qman. (Do not close Qman)


•

Turn off the computer.









modem.









Baud Rate - 9600

Data Bits - 8

Parity - None

Stop Bits - 1

Flow Control turn all of these options OFF (no check marks)

Communication Protocol: Gerber

• Click NEXT.











Configuring the Plotter in SGS Software

Once the plotter is configured and the serial port communications have been

adjusted, SGS software is configured to use the plotter.

• Start the SGS PDS or MARK software.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT command




• Display a pattern piece on the screen.

• From the FILE menu, select PLOT. In the PLOTTER/CUTTERsection of the PLOT dialog box, select SETUP.

• In the DRIVER FORMAT field of the PLOT SETTING dialog box,select AP-GL Gerber Plotter. In Plotter Page Size, the X must be

16.25 (the frame size) and the Y must be the width of the paper. (72inches is the maximum)

• Select OK in the PLOT SETTINGS dialog box.




• The following settings should be checked:

Output Manager- Use

Alert on Start

Remove on End

Alert on End

• Select OK in the PLOT dialog box.

Troubleshooting

If nothing happens

If you get an error message at the plotter display

If the plotter does not move

It is probably a communication problem. Recheck your hardwarecommunication, recheck the setup of the parameters in the output manager, or

try replacing the plotter cable.

If the plotter reacts (something moves) but not correctly

Recheck the format setup and the frame dimensions. Try to plot a smaller

marker with only one piece that is smaller than one frame.

Tips

The AP700 has the serial port on the INSIDE of the plotter. It is necessary to

remove some screws in order to find the port.

The AP700 plotter cable is a 25 pin female on computer side and 25 pin onplotter side, Gerber part number 050225-002, E dated 11-89 DSC. A 25 to 9

pin adapter may be necessary in order to attach the cable to the computer.




NovaJet Plotter













Configuring SGS Programs for the NovaJet

Plot Setup


and the plotter.


• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will

display.

• Enable the “Use Output Manager” A small “x” should appear in thebox.




• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox, select Browse and Select the directory that contains the

OutMan.ini. Select the Plotter number assigned to the NovaJet

• Click OK.

Plot



area.

Output Manager













Plot Setting



installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Set to HPGL

Device Options




Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font - Should be enabled (checked).

Plotter Font File - Should be grayed out if using plotter’s built in font. If notusing the plotter’s built in font , the Plot-eng.fnt file and it’s directory should

be displayed. If no font file is shown, select Browse to locate the file.

Default Font Size - This setting determines the default size of the text on the

plot.


program.

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots.








Plotter Page Size


using.

X- The X value should always be set to 35.6”.

*See your NovaJet manual for frame size. The size varies depending on the

model of the NovaJet.



no way to adjust the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If thissetting is set incorrectly, the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not

plot at all.



setup.


Using the OutMan as output manger.

• Open the OutMan by clicking on the OutMan icon in the STARTmenu. The icon can be found in the OUTPUT CONTROL folder at

OptiTex 8 menu.




Working Units

From the OPTIONS menu, choose WORKING UNITS. The working



• Click OK.

Communication


Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow = HPGL



Protocol = NONE.

Paper Size



• Click OK.







Configuring Qman

• Click on START > Optitex 8 > OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units


• Select the appropriate units. The selection should match the

working units set in the SGS plot dialog box.

• From the FILE menu, choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setup

dialog box will display.

Path Setup

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same

as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:


• Click OK.








COM1 or COM2.





modem.








Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1




Flow = HPGL


RTS/CTS = Enabled (checked)


Protocol = NONE.

• Click NEXT.











Numonics Design Partner 9000 Plotter














Configuring the SGS progrem

Plot Setup

! Note: To access the Plot command you must have something in the working

area.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot Select dialog box willbe displayed.




• Enable the “Use Output Manager”. A checkmark will be placed inthe box.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox select Browse and Select the directory that contains the

OutMan.ini. .assign the plotter number.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be

displayed.


area.

Output Manager



chapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.


Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.


• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.

The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.




Plot Setting


listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software

installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to Design Partner


plots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enablecutting between the plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.




Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should be the frame size.


setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you are

using.

! Note: The Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the

plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust the frame

size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to anything

else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.





• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not

been setup.



• Click on the OutMan icon at the START menu. It can be found atSTART > OptiTex 8 >OUTPUT CONTROL

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will be displayed.


• Click OK.

Communication


Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = NoneStop Bits = 1

Flow =DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)

RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)

Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)




Paper Size



• Click OK.



wish to send.


Configuring QueMan

• Click on the Qman icon in the START menu. It can be found at

START> OptiTex 8> OUTPUT CONTROL > QMAN

Working Units



OutMan Path Setup

• From the OPTION menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutManSetup dialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the sameas specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:





• Click OK

• Minimize the QueMan keeping it running.




COM1 or COM2.





modem.






•

Select the “my computer” option. Click NEXT.


Port Options





Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Flow =

DTR/DSR = Not enabled (no check in the box)RTS/CTS = Enabled (check in box.)

Xon/Xoff = Not enabled (no check in the box)

• Click NEXT.










Summagraphic HighPlot 7100/7200 Plotter














Configuring the SGS programs.

Plot Setup


and the plotter you want to use.


area.

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will bedisplayed.




• Enable the Use Output Manager. A checkmark will be placed in thebox.

• For OutMan users: If an OutMan.ini location does not appear in thebox select Browse and locate the directory that contains the

OutMan.ini Select the Pltr. number you want to assign to the Ioline.

• Click OK.

Plot

• From the FILE menu choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box will be

displayed.


area.

Output Manager



chapter of the user’s guide, or the plotting tutorial.


Options - Should be set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor - Should be set to X=1 Y=1.


• Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.

The Plot Setting dialog box will be displayed.




Plot Setting


listing depends on how many plotters you specified during software

installation.

Format - Plotter Language. Should be set to DMPL, HPGL/2 or HPGLGeneric. DMPL is recommended.

Font Options

Gap After Plotting - This is the amount of space left between completedplots. It is advisable to leave some space between completed plots to enable

cutting between the plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - This setting is not necessary for the Ioline plotters.

Min. Plot Spline Segment - This setting determines the smallest spline or arcto be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may be


Plotter Page Size

X - The X value should always be set to the plotter frame size.


setting is 72 inches, you will need to adjust according to the paper size you areusing.

! Note: This is the Frame Size of the plotter meaning this is the amount of paper the plotter feeds and tracks at a time. There is no way to adjust

the frame size in the software or on the plotter. If this setting is set to

anything else the plotter will either plot incorrectly or not plot at all.





• Click OK in the Plot dialog box. The settings will be saved but theplot will not be sent because the OutMan and QueMan have not

been setup.



• Open the OutMan by double clicking on the icon at the STARTmenu. It can be found at START> OPTIETX 8> OUTPUT

CONTROL> OUTMAN.

Working Units

• From the OPTIONS menu choose WORKING UNITS. Theworking units dialog box will be displayed.


• Click OK.

Communication


Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1

Paper Size






• Click OK.



wish to send.



• Open the QueMan by double clicking on the icon at the STARTmenu. It can be found at START>OPTITEX 8> OUTPUT

CONTROL> QMAN

Working Units



OutMan Path Setup

• From the FILE menu choose OUTMAN PATH. The OutMan Setupdialog box will be displayed.

The OutMan path and filename in the File Name box must be the same

as specified in the Plot Setup. If it is not:


• Click OK











modem.








Port Options


Baud Rate = 9600

Data Bits = 8

Parity = None

Stop Bits = 1




• Click NEXT.











Lectra plotter

Connecting Lectra Plotter to your Computer

In order to connect "Lectra" plotter to your computer you need to have a

special cross 25 pins serial cable.

This is the serial cable schema:

"Lectra" Plotter pins number: You Computer pins number:

"Lectra" Plotter is using only 4 pins on the 25 pins serial cable.

Pin number 1 in Lectra go to pin number 1 on your computer.




! Note: Lectra pin number 7 is a ground, on a new PC computer pin number

8 can be the ground connection! This means that to need connect

Lectra pin number 7 to pin number 8 on the PC!!

In order to drive "Lectra" plotter you need create this kind of 25 pins serial

cable!!




Where to connect your serial cable in "Lectra" plotter:

"Lectra" plotter module E32 or E33 has 7 serial COM output connects. One of

those 7 output connectors goes in to "Lectra" terminal. The terminalconnection is a flat serial cable with only 4 pins, you need to disconnect this

terminal cable and connect the terminal connection directly to you computer.

Don't put your cable in the terminal connections on the plotter, connect theterminal to your computer directly with your special crossed serial cable. Now

you can plot to your "Lectra" plotter.

In order to initialize the plotter you don't need "Lectra" terminal (you can use

"Lectra" terminal if you want to calibrate your plotter). OptiTexcommunication driver will initialize the plotter and set the pen position to

point 0.0!

Warnings:

• The default frame size is Y- 180 and X- 35. The frame size can

change (in case you are driving Lectra E-32 machine) from OptiTexplot dialog box.

• The emergency stop button on the plotter is not supported. Onceyou stopped the plotting. With the stop button, you have to re-send

the whole file again.

• The Lectra Terminal is disabled once you use OptiTex.

• OptiTex Lectra driver will initialize automatically before starting toplot.

How to Create Lectra Plot file in OptiTex version 8:

• After you finish nesting your pieces and you're ready to plot, go to

Plot dialog box.




• Check and enable "Use Output manager" option, select "OCC"("output manager service") section and press the Setup button.

• "Plotter Setup" dialog will be appearing.Note: if you are working with Win98 or Win95 you will need to

install OptiTex and reboot the computer in order to replacemsvcrt.dll and msvcp60.dll in your Windows system folder.

Without replacing these *.DLL the "Plotter Setup" dialog will work!

• Press the "Add" button to create a new plotter name and plotterqueue.

• To select a computer: select network or local computer (in order to

select a network computer you need to have a network computer

that already has a shared plotter queue) and then press "Next".

! Note: The enclosed explanation describes a local computer selection track.

• In the next dialog "Communication Setting" select "Lectra protocol"and the relevant COM port, DO NOT change any otherscommunication parameters and press the "next" button.

• The next dialog is a "Local Plotter Setting". In the plotter nameDialog box, write your plotter name. You can use any name but we

suggest using "Lectra".

(Don’t change the queue path for sharing, if your operating systemis not NT, you will need to define the share queue folder manually,

if you want other computers on the network to be able to plot to

your plotter.)Press "finish" button.

• Now you're back to the main "Plotter Setup" dialog window. Selectyour new plotter (Lectra) and press on "default button.




• Close "Plotter Setup" dialog with "Close" button.

• If the plotter queue that you've just created is new, the"Plotter/Cutter Setup" dialog will open automatically. Select from

the driver format "Lectra Flat Bed Plotter" driver. Don't change the

plotter page size! It's recommended to use OptiTex font and not thePlotter font (don't use "use build - in font" option).

• Confirm your setting with Ok button. Now you're in "Plot" dialogbox and here you will see "Alert on start" option. If this option is

checked, the job that you are sending to the plotter is in "Hold"

attribute on the “OCC ".

• Confirm your settings and send the job to the plotter by pressing the

Ok button.Now the “OCC “will open. How to use “OCC "(Output Control

Center):The " OCC " is the OptiTex new output system and in order to drive

"Lectra" plotter you need to work with the "OCC". The new “OCC" supports "Lectra" communication driver.

• When the "OCC " is loaded (after you press the "plot" dialog box

"ok" button), you will see your plotter name in the "OCC" left side

under "All queues" header and your current job (the plotting data)will be in the "OCC" right side under "Jobs".

• If you job status is hold (remember "Alert on start" option in "Plot"dialog is checked) then in order to send the job to the plotter, press

on the "green flag" icon on the tool bar and your job will be send tothe plotter.

• In order to "re-send" a job you can go to "Done" under the queuename on the “OCC " left side, select the job and press the "restart"




button on " OCC " tool bar. You can also delete a job, stop a job and

sort jobs.




Configuring the Cutting Edge Cutter

Connect the cutter

The cutter must be assembled and installed.

Install the Cutting Edge Software

Cutting Edge uses the Base module software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT.


area.


Use – checked

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies - optional.

Options -Set to Plot Continuous.


Plotter Setting - Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.

! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format - Cutting Edge




(0,0) In Page Center – unchecked

Manual Page Replace – checked

Use CR/LF in code – checked

Use M70 – unchecked

Use bitefeed offset – unchecked

Gap After Plotting - amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - 0

Plotter Font File - eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,


Default Font Size - size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen – 0

Min. Plot Spline Segment = .008

Plotter Page Size = X- longer than maximum marker

Y- useable width of paper minus margins

! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,

in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area

that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.






Tips

Buttons with drill attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge

cutter.

Using an AUX Drill attribute on buttons will execute a CUT command at the

cutter.

Using a Drill attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.

Using a Cut attribute on buttons will execute a DRILL command at the cutter.

Using a Draw attribute on buttons will execute an INK command at the cutter.

I notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Cutting Edge

cutter.

T notches will draw as I notches at the cutter.

U, V, L, and box notches will cut the same shape at the cutter.

Operational Stops insert an M01 command at the cutter that causes the cutter

to pause before or after execution.

Darts will display as INK commands. The way that darts are displayed in the

SGS software determines how darts are displayed at the cutting edge machine.

When requesting the .NC file from the Mark software, Axis lines (pleats)

display as solid INK lines. When requesting the .NC file from the PDS

software, Axis lines (pleats) display as INK notches at the beginning and endof the line.

Internal lines display as INK or CUT lines depending on how the line

attributes are set in the SGS software.




Piece Descriptions and internal text display as ANNOTATION at the Cutting

Edge machine.

If the Base line is displayed in the SGS software, the baseline will display as

an INK command at the cutting edge machine.




Eastman Cutter

There are several steps to follow when using the Eastman Cutter with the SGS

software:

• Installing the Eastman EasyCut program;

• Creating a .GBR file from Scanvec software;

• Importing the SGS .GBR file into Eastman software and cutting thefile.

This document provides information for step 2 above. For steps 1 and 3, pleaserefer to Eastman documentation.

Configuring SGS software

This document gives basic settings and configuration instructions used for

Eastman cutters.

Plot

• From the FILE menu, choose PLOT. The Plot dialog box willdisplay.

! Note: To access the Plot command, there must be a piece or a marker in the

working area.

File Name - Type in the name and path of the file. For example, if the file is tobe sent to a floppy diskette, type: A:\filename

If the file is to be sent to a directory on the C drive, type:

C:\directoryname\filename




Output Manager - Use Output Manager, Alert on Start, Alert on End,

Remove on End -Disable all of these options.

Page Format

Single and Multiple- Disable (uncheck).

Fixed Scale - Enable (checked).

Options

Plot Continuous - Enable (checked).

Scale Factor

X=1 Y=1

Check Intersections, Order by Tools, and One Page -Disable all of theseoptions.

Bulge - Set at .008



Plot Setting

Name - Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc. The number of theplotter depends on how many plotters were identified during SGS softwareinstallation.

Format - Plotter Language should be set to Eastman Cutter.




Device Options

(0,0) In Page Center - Disable (unchecked).

Number of Pens -Set at 0.

Manual Page Replace - Disable (unchecked).

Use CR/LF in code -Enable (checked)

Use M70 - Disable (unchecked).

Use bite feed offset - Disable (unchecked).

Font Options

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font -Enable (checked)




program.

Gap After Plotting - Set at 0.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line - Set at 0.

Min. Plot Spline Segment- This setting determines the smallest spline or arc

to be cut as a spline or arc. This setting is not important for setup but may beadjusted later to improve the speed or quality of plots.




Plotter Page Size

X =128 The X value represents the frame size or table length.

Y = 43.5 The Y value represents the width of the material.

! Note: Be sure to set this setting correctly. If is set incorrectly, the cutter willnot cut or will cut incorrectly.


• Click OK in the Plot dialog box.

A .GBR file has now been generated and should be located under the path and

file name that was entered at the beginning of this section under “File Name.”

Tips

1/4 inch T notches with a cut and no stop attribute cut best at the Eastman

cutter.

Buttons with a Drill M43 attribute cut best at the cutter.




Configuring the Gerber Cutter S3250

Connect the cutter


Install the Gerber Software

Gerber uses the Power Processor software to drive the cutter.

Configuring the SGS software



area.


(Use = checked)

Alert on Start, Alert on End, Remove on End, Copies = optional

Page Format = fixed scale

Options = Set to Plot Continuous.

Scale Factor = Set to X=1 Y=1

Whole pieces in frame only

Check intersections before plotting

Optimize Plot/Cut Order




Plotter Setting = Shows the Plotter language, Length and Width of page size.


The Plot Setting dialog box will display.

Name = Shows the name of the plotter - Pltr1, Pltr2, etc.

Format = Gerber Cutter

(0,0) in Page Center = unchecked

Manual Page Replace = unchecked

Use CR/LF in code = unchecked

*Use initialization in file header (M70…) = checked

Use Bitefeed Offset = unchecked (if using Version 7.x. If using a lower

version: *Use bitefeed offset = checked, -.50)

Gap After Plotting = amount of space left between plots.

Minimal Cut/Plot Line = 0

Use Plotter’s Built-in Font = unchecked

Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,


Default Font Size = size of the text to the plot.

Number of Pen = 0


Plotter Page Size = X- 999




Y- 70 (useable width of paper minus margin)



that the cutter cuts. If the Page Size setting is smaller than the marker

size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.



Tips

I or V notches with cut attributes work best when exporting to a Gerber cutter

Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-91

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGSsoftware: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)

Configuring the SGS programs.

Connect the cutter




Configuring the SGS Software






area.


(Use = checked)










The Plot Setting dialog box will display.










*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50




Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.


Number of Pen = 0







size when creating an NC file, the file will be blank.



Tips





Configuring the Gerber Cutter S-93

There are 3 main steps to configuring the Gerber Cutter for use with the SGS

software: 1) Connecting the cutter, 2) Installing the Gerber software, 3)Configuring the SGS programs.

Connect the cutter




Configuring the SGS Grade, SGS PDS, or SGS Mark software



area.


(Use = checked)












! Note: Select the Setup button to configure plotter language and frame size.The Plot Setting dialog box will display.







*Use bitefeed offset = checked, -. 50




Plotter Font File = eng.fnt file and it’s directory. If no font file is shown,select Browse to locate the file.


Number of Pen = 0







! Note: “Page Size” is the terminology generally used for plotters. However,in the case of cutters, page size refers to the dimensions of the area


size when creating a NC file, the file will be blank.



Tips




Glossary Terms 685

Glossary Terms

AAMA

Refers to a “neutral” file format created by the American Apparel Manufacturing

Association.

About

Selecting the About icon on the Standard toolbar in OptiTex PDS or the

Marker toolbar in OptiTex Mark activates a dialog box displaying theversion of software currently in use.

Align

A command found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex PDS that repositionspoints horizontally, vertically, or at an assigned angle based on the

selection of two or more points.

Array

A command found in the Marker Menu of OptiTex Mark, which allows

selected piece(s) to be arranged into rows and columns automatically onthe marker as specified in the Array dialog box.

Baseline

Baseline, also referred to as a grainline, controls the pattern piece’salignment in the working area and on the marker.

Base Size

The pattern size from which the program bases pattern changes and grade.



Glossary Terms686

Buffer

An assigned area of space placed on a single pattern or patterns in

OptiTex Mark. A buffer is often used to create extra space between

pattern pieces when cutting difficult fabrics.

Bundle

A pattern making term that refers to all patterns pieces necessary to make

one complete item or Set.

Click

The action of pressing down on the left mouse button to select an objector command on the screen.

Clipboard

A location on the computer where items are stored when they are cut orcopied from a file or document. Items remain on the clipboard until

another item is cut or copied.

Contour

The perimeter of the pattern piece.

Cursor

The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the

mouse on the computer screen.

Dart

Shaped tuck pointed at one or more ends to remove excess material and



Glossary Terms 687

Make a garment fit .

Delta Value

This refers to the X and Y-axis used for directional movement on the

working area. The X-axis represents the horizontal movement and the Y-

axis represents the vertical movement.

Dialog Box

The pop-up window that appears while using editing tools allowing the

user to insert parameters for a specific command.



Glossary Terms688

Digitizing

The process of converting a two-dimensional object into data points asdigital numbers, which are imputed into the computer to represent the

pattern pieces.

Directory

User-defined sections on the computer were file could be stored. ( e. g.

C:\Optitex7\Examples).

Display File

A marker file, usually containing one or more design files, which has been

nested. (e.g. filename.dsp).

DXF

The graphical Data Exchange Format used by CAD systems to transfer

geometric information.

Drive

The address of the storage media to be accessed: usually A and B for

removable diskettes and C, D for permanent hard disk or CD-ROM drive.

DSN File

DSN is the SGS extension for a OptiTex PDS file.

DSP File

DSP is the SGS extension for a Mark file.



Glossary Terms 689

EXE

Extension denoting a program file. This is a compiled computer program

executable from DOS or from Windows by typing the file name on the

command line and pressing the Enter key (DOS) or by double click on itsname (Windows).

Exit

Normal termination of software program.

Field

The white spaces in a dialog box where information can be entered.

File Extension

The three letters suffix at the end of a filename, which defines the format.For example: DSP, DSN, EXE, etc.

Flipping

The act of transposing the pattern piece horizontally or vertically while it

is located in the working area.

Global Rule

A grading rule based on the total number of grading points of any pattern.

Also called, “All Points Rule”.

Graded Pattern

A pattern that points have been assigned grading rules to control the way apiece changes from size to another.



Glossary Terms690

Grading

The process of assigning measurement increments to a pattern to

determine how each size of the pattern should increase or decrease in

relation to the previous size.

Grading Point

A point on the pattern contour, line and curve, which you can attach a

grading value.



Glossary Terms 691

Grading Rule

The assigned measurement increments to define the grading at a point onthe pattern piece for all sizes. There are three types of grading rules: fixed,

point and global.

Grading Table

A display window activated from the Grading Menu that displays the

assigned measurement increments for previously established gradingrules.

Grainline

Grainline, also referred to as a baseline, controls the pattern piece’salignment in the working area and on the marker.

Graphic Standard

The ASCII geometry in CAD/CAM file formats, which renders themcompatible with SGS programs.

Grayed Out

Refers to features or commands that are unavailable at the current time.Features and commands are typically grayed out when a selected item on

the piece does not correspond to the feature or command.

Group

A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe two or more selected patterns

that have been added to the pattern list and nested on the marker as asingle unit. The Group is established by highlighting the pieces and

selecting Keep in the Grouping Menu of OptiTex Mark.



Glossary Terms692

Handle Point

Any notch or button with the number 1.



Glossary Terms 693

Hard Drive

A device made of aluminum disks coated with iron oxide permanentlymounted in the computer to store data and programs. Hard disks have

more storage capacity than floppy disks.

Hex

Hexadecimal. A number written in base 16, which contains 16 possible

digits: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A (10), B (11), C (12), D (13), E (14) andF (15).

Icon

Icons are located on the toolbars and provide the pattern maker with fastaccess to the design tools.

Internals

Lines or points which are not located on the contour, and which can beused for style or cutting purposes.

Intersections

A term used in OptiTex Mark to describe the points where nested patternsoverlap on the marker area.

Invert

To relocate the first point on a selected line segment from one end the

opposite end. This command can be found in the Edit Menu of OptiTex

PDS by selecting Segment and Show.



Glossary Terms694

Key

A small piece of hardware approximately 1.5” by 2” with 25 small prongs

on one end and 25 small inlets or holes on the other end. This key is

plugged into a parallel port on the back of the computer. If the computerhas a printer attached, the key is plugged into the back of the printer plug

as if to piggyback on the printer plugs. This item is what permits SGS

software to run on your computer. When this key is not plugged into theback of the computer, a “HASP plug not found” error displays on the

screen in the HASP Error Message dialog box. Authorizer keys are

designed to prevent illegal copying and illegal use of software. Anauthorizer key is also referred to as, Plug, Security Lock, Lock or Dangle.

Landscape Mode

The Landscape mode is the opposite of Portrait Mode in printer setup. Itallows output to be printed in the width direction of the paper.

Lock

See “Key ”.

Marker

The physical layout of all the pieces in a style cut from the same material

at the same time.

Marker File

A file created in OptiTex Mark that contains a nested marker.

Marker Size

The dimensions of the marker that have been specified in the Marker

Definitions dialog box of the Marker Menu in OptiTex Mark.



Glossary Terms 695

Mirror

This command creates a symmetrical pattern piece by joining two pieces,

the original and a duplicate inverted piece, at a two-point line segment

that is selected before using the Mirror command from the Piece Menu inOptiTex PDS.

Nest

A term used to indicate the close placement of pieces on a marker layout.



Glossary Terms696

Network

A collection of devices such as computers and printers, that are connectedtogether. A network is a tool for communication that allows users to store

and retrieve information, share printers and exchange information.

Nested Pattern

A pattern that is drawn to show more than one size of the piece stacked on

top of each other also called a stacked piece or graded nest.

Nesting

The placement of pieces on a marker to achieve the most compact and

efficient layout.

Notch

A symbol placed on a pattern to indicate where the piece should be

aligned with another piece when the two are sewn together.

On-line Help

Help accessed by using either the F1 key for general index or Shift F1

keys for specific help when an option or command is selected.

Order

An order is generated in OptiTex Mark to set up the marker. The orderwill include information such as the design files to be nested on the

marker, the fabric width, and the number of each piece in the design file.

Output

Refers to data that is either printed or plotted.



Glossary Terms 697

Path

The alphanumeric code that guides the computer to a specific drive/

directory/file based on the default selection defined in Autoexec.bat file.

Piece Display Bar

Refers to a pictorial list of pieces within a design file. The Piece Display

Bar shows a small picture of each piece in a design file.

Piece List

A window that is activated from the Display Menu in OptiTex PDS and

displays the pattern pieces for the current design file.

Plot File

A file created for printing purposes. The resulting plot file can be sent to

the output device from any PC (not necessarily equipped with SGS

software) with the DOS Copy command.

Point

The part of a piece’s boundary lines used to control the shape of the piece.

A point may be a grading point or a non-grading point.

Point Rule

A rule, which is attached to a specific point and is related to the number of

sizes which are currently open, and only to those sizes.



Glossary Terms698

Polyline

Contour elements with shared attributes. (See also Single Elements).

Pop-up Menu

A list of options that appear on the screen after the right mouse button isclicked.

Pop-up Window

A window displayed on the working area as a result of user selected option.

Portrait Mode

The Portrait Mode is the opposite of Landscape Mode in printer setup. It

allows output to be printed in a lengthwise direction on the paper.

Remainders

The number of unplaced pieces in a marker file.

Right Mouse Click

The action of pressing down on the right mouse button to select an object

or command on the screen.

Round

The act of modifying an angle into a curve.

Rule Library

A collection of existing grading rules which can be attached to a pattern.

Scroll

When the number of items in a window/dialog box exceeds the amount of



Glossary Terms 699

space for display, an elevator bar appears at the right. By positioning the

mouse on this bar, the user can view all items at one window height.

Security Lock

See “Key ”.

Selected Piece

The piece displayed in the working area with a dashed line around the

piece perimeter.

Selection Tool

The screen symbol (e.g. the arrow) that indicates the position of the

mouse on the computer screen.

Set

A pattern making term that refers to all pattern pieces necessary to make

one complete item or Bundle.

Shrink Factor

The amount a pattern is increased or decreased to allow for the

dimensional of the fabric.

Size List

The box displaying all sizes being produced for a specific design file.

Snap

When using a grid on the working area in OptiTex PDS, this option

causes the cursor to jump to the nearest point, whether it be a contour



Glossary Terms700

point, grid point or piece’s end point (grid points have priority).

Solution File

A completed order of nested patterns.

Stack Point

One point on a nested pattern where the grading is set at 0,0 for all sizes inthe nest.

Swap Pieces

This icon in OptiTex PDS interchanges the original pattern piece in thepiece display bar with the piece being edited in the working area.

Toggle

Refers to the action of turning a command on/off by checking or

unchecking an item. For example, many options in the Display Menu

toggle between displaying on screen or not displaying on screen.

Tolerance Value

The maximum distance between two points on a contour to treat the

points as a single point.

Toolbar

A collection of icons positioned in a row on the screen. Toolbars provideeasy access to commands and features when using the mouse.

Tools

Design functions in the software that enables the patternmaker to



Glossary Terms 701

manipulate patterns.

Waste Limits

This area is created on the markers edge prevents the cutting of pieces

were the fabric in flawed. The area can be defined in the Marker Menu

under Marker Definitions.

Working Area

The area of the screen where pattern pieces are placed for editing.

WYSIWYG

This stands for, “What You See Is What You Get.” This concept is used

in the SGS software to indicate that what appears on the computer screen

is what will be printed or plotted onto paper.

X, Y Coordinates

A method of defining the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) location of grade

points, notch attributes, and internals. X, Y coordinates also indicate howmuch grade points increase in the horizontal and vertical direction.



Index

A

About OptiTex PDS, 33

Angle, 41

Attributes, 41

Advanced Toolbar, 102

Axes command and tool, 71

Attaching the digitizer menu., 151Attaching the Digitizer Panel, 151

Actual Size, 247

Alert on Start, 227

Annotation, 200, 215

Add Relative, 268

Align Points, 274

Attributes, 265

Angle, 304

Apply, 294

All Points, 360

Append, 344

Apply Rule, 362

Apply Rule Dialog Box, 363Add To Library, 415

Auto reseam, 451, 454

About OptiTex Grade, 461

B

Box, 60

Button, 66, 67

Browse, 195

16 button cursor, 195

Base Size Mark, 201, 215

Best Quality, 201, 215

Boundary Lines, 212

Bulge (cored Error) Inches, 242Button Attributes Dialog Box, 271

Base Parallel to Segment, 315

Baseline Only, 304

Best Quality, 290

Buffer, 290 Button Attributes Dialog Box, 71

Base Parallel to Segment, 315

Baseline Only, 304

Best Quality, 290

Buffer, 290

Base Only (F4), 429

Base size only box, 385

Bitmap Directory, 398Base Size, 347, 348

C

Context Help, 34

Copy Grading (Ctrl + G + C), 22, 23,339

CCW Folded, 61

Circle, 64, 65

Clip Fabric Pattern, 102

Counter Clockwise, 63

Cut, 112, 113

Cut Along Internal, 114

Communication Port, 195Customizing the Digitizer Panel:, 164

Cad Files to Import, 203

Change Log, 229

Copies, 228, 289, 290

Current Plotter, 244

Curve Points, 213,266

Clear Pieces, 259

Copy, 278, 434

Copy Piece, 257

Cut Piece, 255, 256

Chapter 6 Piece Menu, 287


Code, 289

Copies, 289, 290

Chapter 6 Piece Menu, 287


Code, 289

Chapter 11

Clear, 434

Compare Length, 430, 431, 433



Index

Coordinates, 421, 422

Close Rule Library, 356

Create New Rule Library, 355

Copy/Paste, 385

Countries, 397

Create By Measure, 405

Create Parallel, 381

Create Parallel Cutting, 410

Curve, 386

Curve length, 404

Custom Fit, 392

Custom fit tools, 398

Choose, 417

Colours, 445, 446

Contour to draft, 440

Chapter 10Help, 459

Check Plug Protection, 460

D

Dart, 50Delete, 34, 35

Depth, 40, 53

Direction, 53

Disengaging a Tool, 21

Dart rotation according pivot point, 56

Depth, 61

Distance, 54

Draft, 113, 116

Drill Draw Cut None, 54

Digitizer Communication Setup, 196

Digitizer Panel, 163

Digitizer Setup, 163

Digitizer Type, 194


161


162

Drive and Directory, 127

Dictionary Dialog Box, 200, 214

Drill Holes, 213

Description, 289

Direction, 326

Distance Moving, 326

Distance Stationary, 326

Delete 346

Delete Rule, 361

Default Notch, 456, 457

Design Menu, 381

E

Engaging a Tool, 21

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E), 24,25

Equal for All Sizes, 54

Edit Panel, 195

Exit (Alt+F4), 253

Export to CAD/CAM file Dialog Box, 198

Export to CAD/CAM Files, 197

Extend Internal Line, 276

Edit Dimension Dialog, 401

Edit Measure, 398Edit/Delete measures, 404

Expression, 400

Extend, 386

Equal X Grading (Ctrl + G + E), 341,342

Export Rule Library, 364

F

Flip X Grading (Ctrl + G + F), 24,341

From Next, 45

From Previous, 43

First, 61

Flip Along tool, 120

Flip Horizontal, 84,305Flip Vertical, 84,305

Folding out tool, 117

File Menu, 125

File Name and File List Box, 127,146

Find now, 138

Finder Dialog, 135



Index

File Format, 204

File Name and Browse, 227

Fit to Page, 247

Fixed Scale, 240

Format, 198, 212, 231

Fabric and Stripes, 327

Folding Allowed, 294

Fabric and Stripes, 327

Folding Allowed, 294

F3, 478

F6, 479

Fonts, 447

First Diagonal, 386

First Horizontal, 386

First Vertical, 386

Fit to measures, 394

Fixed Rule, 361

Flip Y Grading (Ctrl + G + L), 341

G

Gap after Plotting, 234

Grain (Base) Lines, 213

Grading Points, 267

Global Change Internal’s Parameters, 299

Global Info, 295

Global Pattern Information Dialog Box, 295

Grading Manually by Edit Tool, 450

Grid and Stripes, 443

Grading Library, 429

Grading Table, 429

Group, 397

H

Height, 248

History, 131, 132, 133

Hide Fabric Pattern, 102, 331

Holes and Internal Contours, 301

How to Contact SGS, 464

Hide/Show measures, 403

Hole By measure, 408

Hole to Piece, 387

Horizontal Fit, 393

I

Ignore CR. / LF, 210

Ignore Frame, 211Ignore Internals, 205

Import CAD files Dialog Box, 203

Import from CAD/CAM Files, 201

Internal Cut, 213

Internal Lines (draw), 213

Info, 287, 289

Insert 346, 468

Index (F1), 459

I Show Point Numbers, 429

Import Rule library, 355

J

Join Pieces, 109Join Pieces Dialog Box, 111

K

Knife, 60

Keyboard Commands, 477

L

Look in subfolders, 136

Layers Table Dialog Box, 200, 212

Lock Piece (F3), 452

Last Diagonal, 387

Last Horizontal, 386Last Vertical, 386

Length, 385

M

Make New, 100

Max All, 96



Index

Measure, 107

Move, 80, 81,261

Move Parallel, 76, 77

Move Point, 73

Move Proportional, 75

Match case, 137

Match whole word only, 137

Material filter, 137

Merge DSN File, 128

Make DSN files, 205

Manual Page Replace, 232

Marker Boundary, 241

Marker Header, 241

Material Code, 201, 215

Max Grade Angle, 210

Minimal Plot/Cut line, 234

Multiple, 240

Make Circle Dialog Box, 285

Make New, 260

Make Pieces, 283

Make Polygon Dialog Box, 284Make Rectangle Dialog Box, 284

Make New Base Line, 317

Material, 205, 290, 298

Max Tilt, 291

Mirror, 306

Make Circle Dialog Box, 285

Move Base Line, 473

Measure Bitmap, 398

Measurements Names, 405

Measures setup, 396

N

New (Ctrl + N), 31

Next Point, 30

Notch, 37

Number of Pleats, 61

Name, 231,289

Network Plotting, 227

No Size, 204

Notches, 213

Note, 229

Notch Both (F12), 327

Notch Moving (F12 + Shift), 327

Notch Stationary (F12 + Ctrl), 327

New Grading Rule Dialog Box, 358

New Rule, 356, 357

O

Overlap, 53

Open Dialog Box, 127

Open file, 138

Page in Center, 232

Open Style File, 140

Options, 128

Order by Tools, 242

Orientation, 201, 216

Output Manager INI File, 244Optimize Cutter Ordering, 311

Open Rule Library, 355


Open Create Dialog, 451

Open Move Dialog, 450

Open move Piece dialog, 451

Open Library, 413

Optimize Cutter Ordering, 311


Open (Ctrl+O), 126

P

Paste Grading (Ctrl + G + P), 23,340Paste Relative (Ctrl + G + R), 22,339

Paste X Grading (Ctrl + G + X), 23

Paste Y Grading (Ctrl + G + Y), 23

Pointer, 31

Previous Point, 22

Proportional, 42



Index

Pattern Group, 405

Piece to Hole, 387

Pleat, 59

Pleat Characteristics Dialog Box, 60

Pleats First Distance, 62

Panel, 195

Piece Code filter, 137

Piece name filter, 136

Preparing patterns for digitizing, 152

Printing the Digitizer Panel, 165

Piece Code, 200, 215

Piece Name, 200, 215

Plot, 219, 220

Plot Continuous, 241

Plot Setting Dialog Box, 230

Plotter (Output Manager) Setup, 221

Plotter Page Size (inches), 234

Plotter Setting, 230

Plotter Setup Dialog, 244

Print, 246

Print Dialog Box, 247Print selected pieces only, 248

Page in Center, 232

Print to file, 248

Printer Setup, 248

Printer Setup Dialog Box, 249

Paste between Two Points, 282

Paste Segment Proportional, 281

Piece, 304,422,472

Point Cleanup, 312

Print Report, 294, 298

Paste between Two Points, 282

Piece List, 423

Q

Quality Lines, 214

Quantity, 201, 205, 215

R

Redo (Ctrl+Y), 98, 255

Remove Current, 99

Replace Old, 101,259

Rotate Piece, 83

Rotate Segment, 82

Reconnect, 40Report, 142

Resolution, 195

Remove Current, 260

Round Corner, 275

Remove on End, 228

Report to Log, 229

Restore Defaults, 201, 214, 216

Ratio, 325

Relate Piece to Stripes, 332

Reseam (F6), 319

Rotate, 301

Rotate Directions, 291

Rotate Left and Rotate Right, 304Rotate To Initial Base Line, 305

Replace Old, 259

Reseam (F6), 319

Rotate, 301

Rotate Directions, 291

Rotate Left and Rotate Right, 304

Rotate To Initial Base Line, 305

Right Mouse Button, 465

Rulers, 422

Refresh 385

Rename Rule Name, 361

Reshape Variation grading, 338

S

Save, 32,144

Seam, 47, 48, 49, 267, 318

Size, 40, 277, 298

Show Control Points, 103

Show Fabric Pattern, 102

Documents

OptiTex PDS User Manual